CD 4598

SOF SUSTAINMENT TRAINING COMPLEX 14P1391
STONE BAY, CAMP LEJEUNE, NC EPROJECTS W.O. NO: 1294037
SECTION 23 00 00
AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS

08/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the

extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL (AMCA)
AMCA 201 (2002; R 2011) Fans and Systems
AMCA 210 (2007) Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans

for Aerodynamic Performance Rating
AMCA 300 (2008) Reverberant Room Method for Sound

Testing of Fans
AMCA 301 (2006; INT 2007) Methods for Calculating

Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data
AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)
AHRI 260 (2011) Sound Rating of Ducted Air Moving

and Conditioning Equipment
AHRI 410 (2001; Addendum 1 2002; Addendum 2 2005;

Addendum 3 2011) Forced-Circulation
Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils
AHRI 430 (2009) Central-Station Air-Handling Units
AHRI Guideline D (1996) Application and Installation of

Central Station Air-Handling Units
ANSI/AHRI 1060 (2005) Performance Rating of Air-to-Air

Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery
Ventilation Heat Equipment
AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA)
ABMA 11 (1990; R 2008) Load Ratings and Fatigue

Life for Roller Bearings

Life for Ball Bearings
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI S12.54 (2011) Determination of Sound Power Levels

and Sound Energy Levels of Noise Sources
using Sound Pressure
SECTION 23 00 00 Page 1
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 52.2 (2012; Errata 2013) Method of Testing

General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices
for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size
ASHRAE 62.1 (2010; Errata 2011; INT 3 2012; INT 4

2012; INT 5 2013) Ventilation for
Acceptable Indoor Air Quality
ASHRAE 68 (1997) Laboratory Method of Testing to

Determine the Sound Power In a Duct
ASHRAE 70 (2006; R 2011) Method of Testing for

Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and
Inlets
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME A13.1 (2007; R 2013) Scheme for the

Identification of Piping Systems
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 249/A 249M (2008) Standard Specification for Welded

Austenitic Steel Boiler, Superheater,
Heat-Exchanger, and Condenser Tubes
ASTM A123/A123M (2012) Standard Specification for Zinc

(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products
ASTM A167 (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for

Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip
ASTM A53/A53M (2012) Standard Specification for Pipe,

Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
ASTM A924/A924M (2010a) Standard Specification for General

Requirements for Steel Sheet,
Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM B117 (2011) Standard Practice for Operating

Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
ASTM B766 (1986; R 2008) Standard Specification for

Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium
ASTM C1071 (2012) Standard Specification for Fibrous

Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and
Sound Absorbing Material)
ASTM C553 (2011) Standard Specification for Mineral

Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications
ASTM D1654 (2008) Evaluation of Painted or Coated

Specimens Subjected to Corrosive
Environments
ASTM D3359 (2009; E 2010; R 2010) Measuring Adhesion

by Tape Test
ASTM D520 (2000; R 2011) Zinc Dust Pigment
ASTM E2016 (2011) Standard Specification for

Industrial Woven Wire Cloth
CANADIAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION (CSA)
CSA C22.2 (2011) Safety Requirements for Electrical

Equipment
INSTITUTE OF ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES AND TECHNOLOGY (IEST)
IEST RP-CC-001 (2009) HEPA and ULPA Filters
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA MG 1 (2011; Errata 2012) Motors and Generators
NEMA MG 10 (2001; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for

Selection and Use of Fixed Frequency
Medium AC Squirrel-Cage Polyphase
Induction Motors
NEMA MG 11 (1977; R 2012) Energy Management Guide for

Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 701 (2010) Standard Methods of Fire Tests for

Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films
NFPA 90A (2012) Standard for the Installation of

Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION

(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1819 (2002) Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper

Installation Guide for HVAC Systems, 5th
Edition
SMACNA 1884 (2003) Fibrous Glass Duct Construction

Standards, 7th Edition
SMACNA 1966 (2005) HVAC Duct Construction Standards

Metal and Flexible, 3rd Edition
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
40 CFR 82 Protection of Stratospheric Ozone
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 181 (2005; Reprint Oct 2008) Factory-Made Air

Ducts and Air Connectors
UL 1995 (2011) Heating and Cooling Equipment
UL 507 (1999; R 2001 thru 2007) Standard for

Electric Fans
UL 555 (2006; Reprint May 2012) Standard for Fire

Dampers
UL 586 (2009) Standard for High-Efficiency

Particulate, Air Filter Units
UL 6 (2007; reprint Nov 2010) Electrical Rigid

Metal Conduit-Steel
UL 705 (2004; Reprint Mar 2012) Standard for

Power Ventilators
UL 900 (2004; Reprint Feb 2012) Standard for Air

Filter Units
UL Bld Mat Dir (2012) Building Materials Directory
UL Electrical Constructn (2012) Electrical Construction Equipment

Directory
UL Fire Resistance (2012) Fire Resistance Directory
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Furnish ductwork, piping offsets, fittings, and accessories as required to

provide a complete installation. Coordinate the work of the different
trades to avoid interference between piping, equipment, structural, and
electrical work. Provide complete, in place, all necessary offsets in
piping and ductwork, and all fittings, and other components, required to
install the work as indicated and specified.
1.2.1 Mechanical Equipment Identification
The number of charts and diagrams shall be equal to or greater than the
number of mechanical equipment rooms. Where more than one chart or diagram
per space is required, mount these in edge pivoted, swinging leaf, extruded
aluminum frame holders which open to 170 degrees.
1.2.1.1 Charts
Provide chart listing of equipment by designation numbers and capacities

such as flow rates, pressure and temperature differences, heating and
cooling capacities, horsepower, pipe sizes, and voltage and current
characteristics.
1.2.2 Service Labeling
Label equipment, including fans, air handlers, terminal units, etc. with
labels made of self-sticking, plastic film designed for permanent

installation. Labels shall be in accordance with the typical examples
below:
SERVICE LABEL AND TAG DESIGNATION
Air handling Unit Number AHU - _____
Controls CONTROL
Exhaust Fan Number EF - _____
Fan Coil Unit Number FCU - _____
Condensing Unit Number CU - _____
Rooftop Unit Number RTU - _____
Identify similar services with different temperatures or pressures. Where

pressures could exceed 125 pounds per square inch, gage, include the
maximum system pressure in the label. Label and arrow piping in accordance
with the following:
a. Each point of entry and exit of pipe passing through walls.
b. Each change in direction, i.e., elbows, tees.
c. In congested or hidden areas and at all access panels at each point

required to clarify service or indicated hazard.
d. In long straight runs, locate labels at distances within eyesight of

each other not to exceed 75 feet. All labels shall be visible and
legible from the primary service and operating area.
For Bare or Insulated Pipes
for Outside Diameters of Lettering
1/2 thru 1-3/8 inch 1/2 inch
1-1/2 thru 2-3/8 inch 3/4 inch
2-1/2 inch and larger 1-1/4 inch
1.2.3 Color Coding
Color coding of all piping systems shall be in accordance with ASME A13.1.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;

submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detail Drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
Metallic Flexible Duct

Insulated Nonmetallic Flexible Duct Runouts
Duct Connectors
Duct Access Doors; G
Fire Dampers; G
Manual Balancing Dampers; G
Diffusers
Registers
Centrifugal Fans
In-Line Centrifugal Fans
Panel Type Power Wall Ventilators
Propeller Type Ceiling Fans
Ceiling Exhaust Fans
Air Handling Units; G
Energy Recovery Devices; G
Test Procedures
SD-06 Test Reports
Performance Tests; G
Damper Acceptance Test; G
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions

Operation and Maintenance Training
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Manual Balancing Dampers; G

Centrifugal Fans; G
In-Line Centrifugal Fans; G
Panel Type Power Wall Ventilators; G
Propeller Type Ceiling Fans; G
Ceiling Exhaust Fans; G
Air Handling Units; G
Energy Recovery Devices; G
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Except as otherwise specified, approval of materials and equipment is based

on manufacturer's published data.
a. Where materials and equipment are specified to conform to the standards

of the Underwriters Laboratories, the label of or listing with
reexamination in UL Bld Mat Dir, and UL 6 is acceptable as sufficient
evidence that the items conform to Underwriters Laboratories
requirements. In lieu of such label or listing, submit a written
certificate from any nationally recognized testing agency, adequately
equipped and competent to perform such services, stating that the items
have been tested and that the units conform to the specified
requirements. Outline methods of testing used by the specified
agencies.
b. Where materials or equipment are specified to be constructed or tested,

or both, in accordance with the standards of the ASTM International
(ASTM), the ASME International (ASME), or other standards, a
manufacturer's certificate of compliance of each item is acceptable as
proof of compliance.
c. Conformance to such agency requirements does not relieve the item from
compliance with other requirements of these specifications.
1.4.1 Prevention of Corrosion
Protect metallic materials against corrosion. Manufacturer shall provide

rust-inhibiting treatment and standard finish for the equipment
enclosures. Do not use aluminum in contact with earth, and where connected
to dissimilar metal. Protect aluminum by approved fittings, barrier
material, or treatment. Ferrous parts such as anchors, bolts, braces,
boxes, bodies, clamps, fittings, guards, nuts, pins, rods, shims, thimbles,
washers, and miscellaneous parts not of corrosion-resistant steel or
nonferrous materials shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A123/A123M for exterior locations and cadmium-plated in conformance
with ASTM B766 for interior locations.
1.4.2 Asbestos Prohibition
Do not use asbestos and asbestos-containing products.
1.4.3 Ozone Depleting Substances Used as Refrigerants
Minimize releases of Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) during repair,

maintenance, servicing or disposal of appliances containing ODS's by
complying with all applicable sections of 40 CFR 82 Part 82 Subpart F. Any
person conducting repair, maintenance, servicing or disposal of appliances
owned by NASA shall comply with the following:
a. Do not knowingly vent or otherwise release into the environment, Class

I or Class II substances used as a refrigerant.
b. Do not open appliances without meeting the requirements of 40 CFR 82

Part 82.156 Subpart F, regarding required practices for evacuation and
collection of refrigerant, and 40 CFR 82 Part 82.158 Subpart F,
regarding standards of recycling and recovery equipment.
c. Only persons who comply with 40 CFR 82 Part 82.161 Subpart F, regarding
technician certification, can conduct work on appliances containing
refrigerant.
In addition, provide copies of all applicable certifications to the

Contracting Officer at least 14 calendar days prior to initiating
maintenance, repair, servicing, dismantling or disposal of appliances,
including:
a. Proof of Technician Certification
b. Proof of Equipment Certification for recovery or recycling equipment.
c. Proof of availability of certified recovery or recycling equipment.
1.4.4 Use of Ozone Depleting Substances, Other than Refrigerants
The use of Class I or Class II ODS's listed as nonessential in 40 CFR 82

Part 82.66 Subpart C is prohibited. These prohibited materials and uses
include:
a. Any plastic party spray streamer or noise horn which is propelled by a

chlorofluorocarbon
b. Any cleaning fluid for electronic and photographic equipment which

contains a chlorofluorocarbon; including liquid packaging, solvent
wipes, solvent sprays, and gas sprays.
c. Any plastic flexible or packaging foam product which is manufactured

with or contains a chlorofluorocarbon, including, open cell foam, open
cell rigid polyurethane poured foam, closed cell extruded polystyrene
sheet foam, closed cell polyethylene foam and closed cell polypropylene
foam except for flexible or packaging foam used in coaxial cabling.
d. Any aerosol product or other pressurized dispenser which contains a

chlorofluorocarbon, except for those listed in 40 CFR 82 Part 82.66
Subpart C.
Request a waiver if a facility requirement dictates that a prohibited

material is necessary to achieve project goals. Submit the waiver request
in writing to the Contracting Officer. The waiver will be evaluated and
dispositioned.
1.4.5 Detail Drawings
Submit detail drawings showing equipment layout, including assembly and

installation details and electrical connection diagrams; ductwork layout
showing the location of all supports and hangers, typical hanger details,
gauge reinforcement, reinforcement spacing rigidity classification, and
static pressure and seal classifications. Include any information required
to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and functions properly
as a unit on the drawings and show equipment relationship to other parts of
the work, including clearances required for operation and maintenance.
Submit drawings showing bolt-setting information, and foundation bolts
prior to concrete foundation construction for all equipment indicated or
required to have concrete foundations. Submit function designation of the
equipment and any other requirements specified throughout this Section with
the shop drawings.
1.4.6 Test Procedures
Submit proposed test procedures and test schedules for the ductwork leak
test, and performance tests of systems, at least 2 weeks prior to the start
of related testing.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect stored equipment at the jobsite from the weather, humidity and
temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants.
Additionally, cap or plug all pipes until installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS
Except for the fabricated duct, plenums and casings specified in paragraphs
"Metal Ductwork" and "Plenums and Casings for Field-Fabricated Units",
provide components and equipment that are standard products of
manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacturing of products that are
of a similar material, design and workmanship. This requirement applies to
all equipment, including diffusers, registers, fire dampers, and balancing
dampers.
a. Standard products are defined as components and equipment that have

been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use in similar
applications of similar size for at least two years before bid opening.
b. Prior to this two year period, these standard products shall have been
sold on the commercial market using advertisements in manufacturers'
catalogs or brochures. These manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures
shall have been copyrighted documents or have been identified with a
manufacturer's document number.
c. Provide equipment items that are supported by a service organization.

Where applicable, provide equipment that is an ENERGY STAR Qualified
product or a Federal Energy Management Program (FEMP) designated
product.
2.2 IDENTIFICATION PLATES
In addition to standard manufacturer's identification plates, provide

engraved laminated phenolic identification plates for each piece of
mechanical equipment. Identification plates are to designate the function
of the equipment. Submit designation with the shop drawings.
Identification plates shall be three layers, black-white-black, engraved to
show white letters on black background. Letters shall be upper case.
Identification plates 1-1/2-inches high and smaller shall be 1/16-inch
thick, with engraved lettering 1/8-inch high; identification plates larger
than 1-1/2-inches high shall be 1/8-inch thick, with engraved lettering of
suitable height. Identification plates 1-1/2-inches high and larger shall
have beveled edges. Install identification plates using a compatible
adhesive.
2.3 EQUIPMENT GUARDS AND ACCESS
Fully enclose or guard belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting

setscrews, keys, and other rotating parts exposed to personnel contact
according to OSHA requirements. Properly guard or cover with insulation of
a type specified, high temperature equipment and piping exposed to contact
by personnel or where it creates a potential fire hazard. The requirements
for catwalks, operating platforms, ladders, and guardrails are specified in
Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.
2.4 ELECTRICAL WORK
a. Provide motors, controllers, integral disconnects, contactors, and

controls with their respective pieces of equipment, except controllers
indicated as part of motor control centers. Provide electrical
equipment, including motors and wiring, as specified in Section 26 20 00
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide manual or automatic control and
protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and

control wiring required for controls and devices specified, but not
shown. For packaged equipment, include manufacturer provided
controllers with the required monitors and timed restart.
b. For single-phase motors, provide high-efficiency type,

fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors, including motors that
are part of a system, in accordance with NEMA MG 11. Integral size
motors shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
c. For polyphase motors, provide squirrel-cage medium induction motors,

including motors that are part of a system , and that meet the
efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with
NEMA MG 1. Select premium efficiency polyphase motors in accordance
with NEMA MG 10.
d. Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to

drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the
nameplate rating of the motor. Provide motors rated for continuous
duty with the enclosure specified. Provide motor duty that allows for
maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum encountered interval
between start and stop. Provide motor torque capable of accelerating
the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated
voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting period.
Provide motor starters complete with thermal overload protection and
other necessary appurtenances. Fit motor bearings with grease supply
fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.
e. Where two-speed or variable-speed motors are indicated, solid-state

variable-speed controllers are allowed to accomplish the same
function. Use solid-state variable-speed controllers for motors rated
10 hp or less and adjustable frequency drives for larger motors.
Provide variable frequency drives for motors as specified in Section
26 29 23 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS UNDER 600 VOLTS.
2.5 ANCHOR BOLTS
Provide anchor bolts for equipment placed on concrete equipment pads or on

concrete slabs. Bolts to be of the size and number recommended by the
equipment manufacturer and located by means of suitable templates.
Installation of anchor bolts shall not degrade the surrounding concrete.
2.6 PAINTING
Paint equipment units in accordance with approved equipment manufacturer's

standards unless specified otherwise. Field retouch only if approved.
Otherwise, return equipment to the factory for refinishing.
2.7 INDOOR AIR QUALITY
Provide equipment and components that comply with the requirements of

ASHRAE 62.1 unless more stringent requirements are specified herein.
2.8 DUCT SYSTEMS
2.8.1 Metal Ductwork
Provide metal ductwork construction, including all fittings and components,

that complies with SMACNA 1966, as supplemented and modified by this
specification.
a. Ductwork shall be constructed meeting the requirements for the duct

system static pressure specified in APPENDIX D of Section 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.
b. Provide radius type elbows with a centerline radius of 1.5 times the
width or diameter of the duct where space permits. Otherwise, elbows
having a minimum radius equal to the width or diameter of the duct or
square elbows with factory fabricated turning vanes are allowed.
c. Provide ductwork that meets the requirements of Seal Class A. Provide

ductwork in VAV systems upstream of the VAV boxes that meets the
requirements of Seal Class A.
d. Provide sealants that conform to fire hazard classification specified

in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS and are
suitable for the range of air distribution and ambient temperatures to
which it is exposed. Do not use pressure sensitive tape as a sealant.
e. Make spiral lock seam duct, and flat oval with duct sealant and lock
with not less than 3 equally spaced drive screws or other approved
methods indicated in SMACNA 1966. Apply the sealant to the exposed
male part of the fitting collar so that the sealer is on the inside of
the joint and fully protected by the metal of the duct fitting. Apply
one brush coat of the sealant over the outside of the joint to at least
2 inch band width covering all screw heads and joint gap. Dents in the
male portion of the slip fitting collar are not acceptable. Fabricate
outdoor air intake ducts and plenums with watertight soldered or brazed
joints and seams.
2.8.1.1 Metallic Flexible Duct
a. Provide duct that conforms to UL 181 and NFPA 90A with factory-applied
insulation, vapor barrier, and end connections. Provide duct assembly
that does not exceed 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed.
Provide ducts designed for working pressures of 2 inches water gauge
positive and 1.5 inches water gauge negative. Provide flexible round
duct length that does not exceed 5 feet. Secure connections by
applying adhesive for 2 inches over rigid duct, apply flexible duct 2
inches over rigid duct, apply metal clamp, and provide minimum of three
No. 8 sheet metal screws through clamp and rigid duct.
b. Inner duct core: Provide interlocking spiral or helically corrugated

flexible core constructed of zinc-coated steel, aluminum, or stainless
steel; or constructed of inner liner of continuous galvanized spring
steel wire helix fused to continuous, fire-retardant, flexible vapor
barrier film, inner duct core.
c. Insulation: Provide inner duct core that is insulated with mineral

fiber blanket type flexible insulation, minimum of 1 inch thick.
Provide insulation covered on exterior with manufacturer's standard
fire retardant vapor barrier jacket for flexible round duct.
2.8.1.2 Insulated Nonmetallic Flexible Duct Runouts
Use flexible duct runouts only where indicated. Runout length is indicated
on the drawings, and is not to exceed 5 feet. Provide runouts that are
preinsulated, factory fabricated, and that comply with NFPA 90A and UL 181.
Provide either field or factory applied vapor barrier. Provide not less
than 20 ounce glass fabric duct connectors coated on both sides with
neoprene. Where coil induction or high velocity units are supplied with
vertical air inlets, use a streamlined, vaned and mitered elbow transition
piece for connection to the flexible duct or hose. Provide a die-stamped
elbow and not a flexible connector as the last elbow to these units other
than the vertical air inlet type. Insulated flexible connectors are
allowed as runouts. Provide insulated material and vapor barrier that
conform to the requirements of Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Do not expose the insulation material surface to the
air stream.
2.8.1.3 General Service Duct Connectors
Provide a flexible duct connector approximately 6 inches in width where

sheet metal connections are made to fans or where ducts of dissimilar
metals are connected. For round/oval ducts, secure the flexible material
by stainless steel or zinc-coated, iron clinch-type draw bands. For
rectangular ducts, install the flexible material locked to metal collars
using normal duct construction methods. Provide a composite connector
system that complies with NFPA 701 and is classified as "flame-retardent
fabrics" in UL Bld Mat Dir.
2.8.2 Duct Access Doors
Provide hinged access doors conforming to SMACNA 1966 in ductwork and

plenums where indicated and at all air flow measuring primaries, automatic
dampers, fire dampers, coils, thermostats, and other apparatus requiring
service and inspection in the duct system. Provide access doors upstream
and downstream of air flow measuring primaries and heating and cooling
coils. Provide doors that are a minimum 15 by 18 inches, unless otherwise
shown. Where duct size does not accommodate this size door, make the doors
as large as practicable. Equip doors 24 by 24 inches or larger with
fasteners operable from inside and outside the duct. Use insulated type
doors in insulated ducts.
2.8.3 Fire Dampers
Use 1.5 hour rated fire dampers unless otherwise indicated. Provide fire
dampers that conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A and UL 555. Perform
the fire damper test as outlined in NFPA 90A. Provide a pressure relief
door upstream of the fire damper. If the ductwork connected to the fire
damper is to be insulated then provide a factory installed pressure relief
damper. Provide automatic operating fire dampers with a dynamic rating
suitable for the maximum air velocity and pressure differential to which it
is subjected. Provide fire dampers approved for the specific application,
and install according to their listing. Equip fire dampers with a steel
sleeve or adequately sized frame installed in such a manner that disruption
of the attached ductwork, if any, does not impair the operation of the
damper. Equip sleeves or frames with perimeter mounting angles attached on
both sides of the wall or floor opening. Construct ductwork in fire-rated
floor-ceiling or roof-ceiling assembly systems with air ducts that pierce
the ceiling of the assemblies in conformance with UL Fire Resistance.
Provide curtain type with damper blades out of the air stream or
multi-blade type fire dampers. Install dampers that do not reduce the duct
or the air transfer opening cross-sectional area. Install dampers so that
the centerline of the damper depth or thickness is located in the
centerline of the wall, partition or floor slab depth or thickness. Unless
otherwise indicated, comply with the installation details given in
SMACNA 1819 and in manufacturer's instructions for fire dampers. Perform

acceptance testing of fire dampers according to paragraph Fire Damper
Acceptance Test and NFPA 90A.
2.8.4 Manual Balancing Dampers
a. Furnish manual balancing dampers with accessible operating

mechanisms. Use chromium plated operators (with all exposed edges
rounded) in finished portions of the building. Provide manual volume
control dampers that are operated by locking-type quadrant operators.
b. Unless otherwise indicated, provide opposed blade type multileaf

dampers with maximum blade width of 12 inches. Provide access doors or
panels for all concealed damper operators and locking setscrews.
Provide access doors or panels in hard ceilings, partitions and walls
for access to all concealed damper operators and damper locking
setscrews. Coordinate location of doors or panels with other affected
contractors.
c. Provide stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters not less

than the thickness of the insulation when the locking-type quadrant
operators for dampers are installed on ducts to be thermally insulated,
to provide clearance between the duct surface and the operator.
Stand-off mounting items shall be integral with the operator or
standard accessory of the damper manufacturer.
2.8.4.1 Square or Rectangular Dampers
a. Duct Height 12 inches and Less
(1) Frames
Width Height Galvanized Length

Steel Thickness
Maximum 19 Maximum 12 Minimum 20 Minimum 3 inches

inches inches gauge
More than 19 Maximum 12 Minimum 16 Minimum 3 inches
inches inches gauge
(2) Single Leaf Blades
Width Height Galvanized Length

Steel Thickness
Maximum 19 Maximum 12 Minimum 20 Minimum 3 inches

inches inches gauge
More than 19 Maximum 12 Minimum 16 Minimum 3 inches
inches inches gauge
(3) Blade Axles: To support the blades of round dampers, provide

galvanized steel shafts supporting the blade the entire duct
diameter frame-to-frame. Axle shafts shall extend through
standoff bracket and hand quadrant.
Width Height Material Square Shaft
Maximum 19 Maximum 12 Galvanized Steel Minimum 3/8 inch

inches inches
More than 19 Maximum 12 Galvanized Steel Minimum 1/2 inch
inches inches
(4) Axle Bearings: Support the shaft on each end at the frames with
shaft bearings. Shaft bearings configuration shall be a pressed
fit to provide a tight joint between blade shaft and damper frame.
Width Height Material
Maximum 19 inches Maximum 12 inches solid nylon, or

equivalent solid
plastic, or
oil-impregnated
More than 19 inches Maximum 12 inches oil-impregnated
bronze
(5) Control Shaft/Hand Quadrant: Provide dampers with accessible

locking-type control shaft/hand quadrant operators.
Provide stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters for the

locking-type quadrant operators on dampers installed on ducts to
be thermally insulated. Stand-off distance shall be a minimum of
50 mm 2 inches off the metal duct surface. Stand-off mounting
items shall be integral with the operator or standard accessory of
the damper manufacturer.
(6) Finish: Mill Galvanized
b. Duct Height Greater than 12 inches
(1) Provide dampers with multi-leaf opposed-type blades.
(2) Frames: Maximum 48 inches in height; maximum48 inches in width;

minimum of 16 gauge galvanized steel,
minimum of 5.5 inches long.
(2) Blades: Minimum of 16 gauge galvanized steel; 6 inch nominal

width.
(3) Blade Axles: To support the blades of round dampers, provide

galvanized square steel shafts supporting the blade the entire
duct diameter frame-to-frame. Axle shafts shall extend through
standoff bracket and hand quadrant.
(4) Axle Bearings: Support the shaft on each end at the frames with
shaft bearings constructed of oil-impregnated bronze, or solid
nylon, or a solid plastic equivalent to nylon. Shaft bearings
configuration shall be a pressed fit to provide a tight joint
between blade shaft and damper frame.
(5) Blade Actuator: Minimum 1/2 inch diameter galvanized steel.
(6) Blade Actuator Linkage: Mill Galvanized steel bar and crank
plate with stainless steel pivots.
(7) Control Shaft/Hand Quadrant: Provide dampers with accessible

locking-type control shaft/hand quadrant operators.

locking-type quadrant operators on dampers installed on ducts to
be thermally insulated. Stand-off distance shall be a minimum of
50 mm 2 inches off the metal duct surface. Stand-off mounting
items shall be integral with the operator or standard accessory of
the damper manufacturer.
(8) Finish: Mill Galvanized
2.8.4.2 Round Dampers
a. Frames
Size Galvanized Steel Length

Thickness
4 to 20 inches Minimum 20 gauge Minimum 10 inches
b. Blades
Size Galvanized Steel Thickness
4 to 20 inches Minimum 20 gauge
c. Blade Axles: To support the blades of round dampers, provide

galvanized steel shafts supporting the blade the entire duct diameter
frame-to-frame. Axle shafts shall extend through standoff bracket and
hand quadrant.
Size Shaft Size and Shape
4 to 20 inches Minimum 3/8 inch square
Size Shaft Size and Shape
d. Axle Bearings: Support the shaft on each end at the frames with shaft
bearings constructed of oil-impregnated bronze, or solid nylon, or a
solid plastic equivalent to nylon. Shaft bearings configuration shall
be a pressed fit to provide a tight joint between blade shaft and
damper frame.
Size Material
4 to 20 inches solid nylon, or equivalent

solid plastic, or
oil-impregnated bronze
22 to 30 inches solid nylon, or equivalent
solid plastic, or
oil-impregnated bronze
32 to 40 inches oil-impregnated bronze, or
stainless steel sleeve bearing
e. Control Shaft/Hand Quadrant:

Provide dampers with accessible locking-type control shaft/hand
quadrant operators.

locking-type quadrant operators on dampers installed on ducts to be
thermally insulated. Stand-off distance shall be a minimum of 2 inches
off the metal duct surface. Stand-off mounting items shall be integral
with the operator or standard accessory of the damper manufacturer.
f. Finish: Mill Galvanized
2.8.5 Automatic Balancing Dampers
Provide dampers as specified in paragraph SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS/SERVICES,

subparagraph CONTROLS.
2.8.6 Plenums and Casings for Field-Fabricated Units
2.8.6.1 Plenum and Casings
Fabricate and erect plenums and casings as shown in SMACNA 1966, as

applicable. Construct system casing of not less than 16 gauge galvanized
sheet steel. Furnish cooling coil drain pans with 1 inch threaded outlet
to collect condensation from the cooling coils. Fabricate drain pans from
not lighter than 16 gauge steel, galvanized after fabrication or of 18 gauge
corrosion-resisting sheet steel conforming to ASTM A167, Type 304, welded
and stiffened. Thermally insulate drain pans exposed to the atmosphere to
prevent condensation. Coat insulation with a flame resistant waterproofing
material. Provide separate drain pans for each vertical coil section, and
a separate drain line for each pan. Size pans to ensure capture of
entrained moisture on the downstream-air side of the coil. Seal openings
in the casing, such as for piping connections, to prevent air leakage.
Size the water seal for the drain to maintain a pressure of at least 2 inch
water gauge greater than the maximum negative pressure in the coil space.
2.8.6.2 Casing
Terminate casings at the curb line and bolt each to the curb using
galvanized angle, as indicated in SMACNA 1966.
2.8.6.3 Access Doors
Provide access doors in each section of the casing. Weld doorframes in

place, gasket each door with neoprene, hinge with minimum of two brass
hinges, and fasten with a minimum of two brass tension fasteners operable
from inside and outside of the casing. Where possible, make doors 36 by 18
inches and locate them 18 inches above the floor. Where the space
available does not accommodate doors of this size, use doors as large as
the space accommodates. Swing doors so that fan suction or pressure holds
doors in closed position, airtight. Provide a push-button station, located
inside the casing, to stop the supply.
2.8.6.4 Factory-Fabricated Insulated Sheet Metal Panels
Factory-fabricated components are allowed for field-assembled units,

provided all requirements specified for field-fabricated plenums and
casings are met. Provide panels of modular design, pretested for
structural strength, thermal control, condensation control, and acoustical
control. Seal and insulate panel joints. Provide and gasket access doors
to prevent air leakage. Provide panel construction that is not less than
20 gauge galvanized sheet steel, assembled with fasteners treated against
corrosion. Provide standard length panels that deflect not more than 1/2
inch under operation. Construct details, including joint sealing, not
specifically covered, as indicated in SMACNA 1966. Construct the plenums
and casings to withstand the specified internal pressure of the air systems.
2.8.6.5 Duct Liner
Unless otherwise specified, duct liner is not permitted.
2.8.7 Louvers
Provide louvers for installation in exterior walls that are associated with
the air supply and distribution system as specified in Section 13 34 19
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS.
2.8.8 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
Provide factory-fabricated units of steel or aluminum that distribute the

specified quantity of air evenly over space intended without causing
noticeable drafts, air movement faster than 50 fpm in occupied zone, or
dead spots anywhere in the conditioned area. Provide outlets for
diffusion, spread, throw, and noise level as required for specified
performance. Certify performance according to ASHRAE 70. Provide sound
rated and certified inlets and outlets according to ASHRAE 70. Provide
sound power level as indicated. Provide diffusers and registers with
volume damper with accessible operator, unless otherwise indicated; or if
standard with the manufacturer, an automatically controlled device is
acceptable. Provide opposed blade type volume dampers for all diffusers
and registers, except linear slot diffusers. Provide linear slot diffusers
with round or elliptical balancing dampers. Where the inlet and outlet
openings are located less than 7 feet above the floor, protect them by a
grille or screen according to NFPA 90A.
2.8.8.1 Diffusers
Provide diffuser types indicated. Furnish ceiling mounted units with

anti-smudge devices, unless the diffuser unit minimizes ceiling smudging
through design features. Provide diffusers with air deflectors of the type
indicated. Provide air handling troffers or combination light and ceiling
diffusers conforming to the requirements of UL Electrical Constructn for
the interchangeable use as cooled or heated air supply diffusers or return
air units. Install ceiling mounted units with rims tight against ceiling.
Provide sponge rubber gaskets between ceiling and surface mounted diffusers
for air leakage control. Provide suitable trim for flush mounted
diffusers. For connecting the duct to diffuser, provide duct collar that
is airtight and does not interfere with volume controller. Provide return
or exhaust units that are similar to supply diffusers.
2.8.8.2 Registers
Double-deflection supply registers. Provide manufacturer-furnished volume

dampers. Provide volume dampers of the group-operated, opposed-blade type
and key adjustable by inserting key through face of register. Operating
mechanism shall not project through any part of the register face.
Automatic volume control devices are acceptable. Provide exhaust and
return registers as specified for supply registers, except provide exhaust
and return registers that have a single set of nondirectional face bars or
vanes having the same appearance as the supply registers. Set face bars or
vanes at 45 degrees.
2.8.9 Bird Screens and Frames
Provide bird screens that conform to ASTM E2016, No. 2 mesh, aluminum or
stainless steel. Provide "medium-light" rated aluminum screens. Provide
"light" rated stainless steel screens. Provide removable type frames
fabricated from either stainless steel or extruded aluminum.
2.9 AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT
2.9.1 Fans
Test and rate fans according to AMCA 210. Calculate system effect on air
moving devices in accordance with AMCA 201 where installed ductwork differs
from that indicated on drawings. Install air moving devices to minimize
fan system effect. Where system effect is unavoidable, determine the most
effective way to accommodate the inefficiencies caused by system effect on
the installed air moving device. The sound power level of the fans shall
not exceed 85 dBA when tested according to AMCA 300 and rated in accordance
with AMCA 301. Provide all fans with an AMCA seal. Connect fans to the
motors either directly or indirectly with V-belt drive. Use V-belt drives
designed for not less than 120 percent of the connected driving capacity.
Provide variable pitch motor sheaves for 15 hp and below, and fixed pitch
as defined by AHRI Guideline D (A fixed-pitch sheave is provided on both
the fan shaft and the motor shaft. This is a non-adjustable speed drive.).
Select variable pitch sheaves to drive the fan at a speed which can produce
the specified capacity when set at the approximate midpoint of the sheave
adjustment. When fixed pitch sheaves are furnished, provide a replaceable
sheave when needed to achieve system air balance. Provide motors for
V-belt drives with adjustable rails or bases. Provide removable metal
guards for all exposed V-belt drives, and provide speed-test openings at
the center of all rotating shafts. Provide fans with personnel screens or
guards on both suction and supply ends, except that the screens need not be
provided, unless otherwise indicated, where ducts are connected to the
fan. Provide fan and motor assemblies with vibration-isolation supports or
mountings as indicated. Use vibration-isolation units that are standard
products with published loading ratings. Select each fan to produce the
capacity required at the fan static pressure indicated. Provide sound
power level as indicated. Obtain the sound power level values according to
AMCA 300. Provide standard AMCA arrangement, rotation, and discharge as
indicated. Provide power ventilators that conform to UL 705 and have a UL
label.
2.9.1.1 Centrifugal Fans
Provide fully enclosed, single-width single-inlet, or double-width

double-inlet centrifugal fans, with AMCA Pressure Class I, II, or III as
required or indicated for the design system pressure. Provide impeller
wheels that are rigidly constructed and accurately balanced both statically
and dynamically. Provide forward curved or backward-inclined airfoil
design fan blades in wheel sizes up to 30 inches. Provide
backward-inclined airfoil design fan blades for wheels over 30 inches in
diameter. Provide fan wheels over 36 inches in diameter with overhung
pulleys and a bearing on each side of the wheel. Provide fan wheels 36
inches or less in diameter that have one or more extra long bearings
between the fan wheel and the drive. Provide sleeve type, self-aligning
and self-oiling bearings with oil reservoirs, or precision self-aligning
roller or ball-type with accessible grease fittings or permanently
lubricated type. Connect grease fittings to tubing for serviceability from
a single accessible point. Provide L50 rated bearing life at not less than
200,000 hours as defined by ABMA 9 and ABMA 11. Provide steel, accurately
finished fan shafts, with key seats and keys for impeller hubs and fan
pulleys. Provide fan outlets of ample proportions, designed for the
attachment of angles and bolts for attaching flexible connections. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide motors that do not exceed 1800 rpm and have
totally enclosed enclosures. Provide manual across-the-line type motor
starters with weather-resistant enclosure. Provide remote manual switch
with pilot indicating light where indicated.
2.9.1.2 In-Line Centrifugal Fans
Provide in-line fans with centrifugal backward inclined blades, stationary

discharge conversion vanes, internal and external belt guards, and
adjustable motor mounts. Mount fans in a welded tubular casing. Provide a
fan that axially flows the air in and out. Streamline inlets with
conversion vanes to eliminate turbulence and provide smooth discharge air
flow. Enclose and isolate fan bearings and drive shafts from the air
stream. Provide precision, self aligning ball or roller type fan bearings
that are sealed against dust and dirt and are permanently lubricated.
Provide L50 rated bearing life at not less than 200,000 hours as defined by
ABMA 9 and ABMA 11. Provide motors with open enclosure unless otherwise
noted on drawings. Provide magnetic motor starters across the line with
general purpose enclosures where located indoors, and weather-resistant
enclosures where located outdoors.
2.9.1.3 Panel Type Power Wall Ventilators
Provide direct driven centrifugal type fans with backward inclined,

non-overloading wheel. Provide removable and weatherproof motor housing.
Provide unit housing that is designed for sealing to building surface and
for discharge and condensate drippage away from building surface.
Construct housing of heavy gauge aluminum. Equip unit with an aluminum or
plated steel wire discharge bird screen, disconnect switch, anodized
aluminum wall grille, manufacturer's standard gravity damper, an airtight
and liquid-tight metallic wall sleeve. Provide totally enclosed fan cooled
type motor enclosure. Use only lubricated bearings.
2.9.1.4 Propeller Type Ceiling Fans
2.9.1.4.1 Complete Unit
The entire fan assembly shall be ETL-certified and built pursuant to

construction guidelines set forth by UL 507 and CSA C22.2. The fan shall be
designed to move an effective amount of air for cooling and
destratification in large industrial applications over an extended life.
The fan and components shall be designed specifically for high volume, low
speed fans to ensure lower operational noise. The sound levels from the fan
operating at maximum speed measured in a laboratory setting shall not
exceed 55 dBA (measured 20 feet below the airfoils and 20 feet horizontally
from the center of the fan). Actual results of sound measurements in the
field may vary due to sound reflective surfaces and environmental
conditions.
2.9.1.4.2 Airfoil System
The fan shall be equipped with eight (8) Powerfoil Plus airfoils of
precision extruded aluminum alloy. The airfoils shall be connected by
means of two (2) high strength locking bolts per airfoil. The airfoils
shall be connected to the hub and interlocked with zinc plated steel
retainers. As an option, airfoils may be powder coated as specified by the
architect or owner.
The fan shall be equipped with eight (8) Powerfoil Plus winglets on the end
of the airfoils and eight (8) AirFences™ positioned on the airfoils at the
optimum location for performance. The winglets shall be attached at the
tip of each airfoil. The winglets and AirFences shall be molded of high
density polypropylene. The standard color of the winglets and AirFences
shall be "Safety Yellow".
2.9.1.4.3 Motor and Gearbox
The fan motor shall be an AC induction type inverter rated at 1725 RPM,
230/460 VAC, and 60 Hz for 3 phase and 1725 RPM, 208 VAC, and 60 Hz for 1
phase. The motor shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled (TEFC) with an IP55
NEMA classification. The motor shall be manufactured with a double baked
Class F insulation and be capable of continuous operation in -30 degrees F
to 122 degrees F ambient conditions.
The gearbox shall be a helical gear reducer. The gear box shall be
precision finished from hardened steel for low noise and long service life
with double lip seals to keep oil in and contaminants out. The gear box
shall be lubricated for life. The gear reducer shall have a standard
backlash of less than 25 arc minutes and be equipped with a 17-4 stainless
steel shaft of 1-1/4 inches diameter.
2.9.1.4.4 Motor Frame
The motor frame and mount shall be constructed of steel and powder coated
for corrosion resistance and appearance. Non visible, steel, threaded rods
in each structural member of the motor frame shall provide a redundant
safety feature in the event of a catastrophic event.
2.9.1.4.5 Hub
The fan hub shall be made of laser cut aluminum for high strength and light
weight. The hub shall consist of two aluminum plates, eight (8) aluminum
spars and one (1) spacer fastened with a pin and collar rivet system. The
hub shall be secured to the output shaft of the gearbox by means of a steel
coupling interface. The hub shall incorporate four (4) safety retaining
clips made of 1/4 inch thick steel that shall restrain the hub/airfoil
assembly.
2.9.1.4.6 Mounting System
The fan mounting system shall be designed for quick and secure installation
from a structural support beam. All components in the mounting system
shall be of welded construction using low carbon steel no less than 3/16
inch thick and be powder coated for appearance and resistance to
corrosion. All mounting bolts shall be SAE Grade 8 or equivalent. As an
option, mounting components may be colored as specified by the architect or
owner.
2.9.1.4.7 Safety Cable
The fan shall be equipped with a safety cable that provides an additional
means of securing the fan assembly to the building structure. The safety
cable shall be 3/8 inch to 1/4 inch diameter and fabricated out of 7 x 19
stranded galvanized steel. The loops shall be secured with swaged
Nicopress fittings, pre-loaded and tested to 3,000 lbs f.
Field construction of safety cables is not permitted.
2.9.1.4.8 Wall Controller
The fan controller shall be constructed using a NEMA 4X, Variable Speed
Drive (VSD) that is mounted to the wall at ground-level and factory
programmed to minimize the starting and braking torques, for smooth and
efficient operation. The wall control shall be equipped with touchpad
controls and an LED display for controlling the fan's direction, operation,
speed, and programming. The wall controller shall provide 100% control of
all fan functions. The wall control shall be equipped with an EMI/RFI
filter to limit interference with other electronic equipment and a rotary
switch disconnect for lock-out/tag-out requirements.
The fan shall be mounted to an angle iron or I-beam structure. The fan
installation area shall be free of obstructions such as lights, cables,
sprinklers or other building structures; with the airfoils at least 2 feet
clear of all obstructions. The fan should not be installed where it will
be continuously subjected to wind gusts or in close proximity to the
outputs of HVAC systems. The design criteria for the fan mounting system
shall be capable of handling 300 feet-lbs of torque.
2.9.1.5 Ceiling Exhaust Fans
Provide centrifugal type, direct driven suspended cabinet-type ceiling

exhaust fans. Provide fans with acoustically insulated housing. Provide
chatter-proof backdraft damper. Provide egg-crate design or louver design
integral face grille. Mount fan motors on vibration isolators. Furnish

unit with mounting flange for hanging unit from above. Provide U.L. listed
fans.
2.9.2 Coils
Provide fin-and-tube type coils constructed of seamless copper tubes and

aluminum fins mechanically bonded or soldered to the tubes. Provide copper
tube wall thickness that is a minimum of 0.016 inches. Provide aluminum
fins that are 0.0055 inch minimum thickness. Provide casing and tube
support sheets that are not lighter than 16 gauge galvanized steel, formed
to provide structural strength. When required, provide multiple tube
supports to prevent tube sag. Test each coil at the factory under water at
not less than 400 psi air pressure and make suitable for 200 psi working
pressure and 300 degrees F operating temperature unless otherwise stated.
Mount coils for counterflow service. Rate and certify coils to meet the
requirements of AHRI 410.
2.9.2.1 Heat Recovery Glycol Coils
Install heat recovery glycol coils with a pitch of not less than 1/8
inch/foot of the tube length toward the drain end. Use headers constructed
of cast iron, welded steel or copper. Furnish each coil with a plugged
vent and drain connection extending through the unit casing. Provide
removable water coils with drain pans.
2.9.2.2 Eliminators
Equip each cooling coil having an air velocity of over 400 fpm through the
net face area with moisture eliminators, unless the coil manufacturer
guarantees, over the signature of a responsible company official, that no
moisture can be carried beyond the drip pans under actual conditions of
operation. Construct of minimum 24 gage copper, removable through the
nearest access door in the casing or ductwork. Provide eliminators that
have not less than two bends at 45 degrees and are spaced not more than
2-1/2 inches center-to-center on face. Provide each bend with an
integrally formed hook as indicated in the SMACNA 1884.
2.9.2.3 Corrosion Protection for Coastal Installations
Provide corrosion protection for all exterior HVAC equipment, including air
handling units, heat exchanger coil surfaces, equipment casings, air cooled
condensing units, air conditioning units that are exposed to the weather.
Corrosion protection shall meet or exceed the requirements of a 3000 hour
salt spray test in accordance with ASTM B117. The specified capacities on
the plans and specifications shall be the capacities after the required
corrosion protection coatings are applied. This corrosion protection is
also required on HVAC equipment within buildings that are subject to the
outside weather conditions. Specifically, equipment requiring protection
is defined as the first HVAC equipment (excluding louvers) met by the
outside air in the supply air ductwork system. Provide manufacturer's
standard off-the-shelf anti-corrosion options for "coastal" or "sea coast"
installations that meet or exceed the requirements stated above.
2.9.3 Air Filters
List air filters according to requirements of UL 900, except list high

efficiency particulate air filters of 99.97 percent efficiency by the DOP
Test method under the Label Service to meet the requirements of UL 586.
2.9.3.1 Extended Surface Pleated Panel Filters
Provide 2 inch depth, sectional, disposable type filters of the size

indicated with a MERV of 8 when tested according to ASHRAE 52.2. Provide
initial resistance at 500 fpm that does not exceed 0.36 inches water gauge.
Provide UL Class 2 filters, and nonwoven cotton and synthetic fiber mat
media. Attach a wire support grid bonded to the media to a moisture
resistant fiberboard frame. Bond all four edges of the filter media to the
inside of the frame to prevent air bypass and increase rigidity.
2.9.3.2 High-Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) Filters
Provide HEPA filters that meet the requirements of IEST RP-CC-001 and are
individually tested and certified to have an efficiency of not less than
99.97 percent, and an initial resistance at 800 fpm that does not exceed 5.0
inches water gauge. Provide filters that are constructed by pleating a
continuous sheet of filter medium into closely spaced pleats separated by
corrugated aluminum or mineral-fiber inserts, strips of filter medium, or
by honeycomb construction of the pleated filter medium. Provide
interlocking, dovetailed, molded neoprene rubber gaskets of 5-10 durometer
that are cemented to the perimeter of the upstream face of the filter cell
sides. Provide self-extinguishing rubber-base type adhesive or other
materials conforming to fire hazard classification specified in Section
23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Provide filter cell
sides that are galvanized steel assembled in a rigid manner. Provide
overall cell side dimensions that are correct to 1/16 inch, and squareness
that is maintained to within 1/8 inch. Provide holding frames that use
spring loaded fasteners or other devices to seal the filter tightly within
it and that prevent any bypass leakage around the filter during its
installed life. Provide air capacity and the nominal depth of the filter
as indicated. Install each filter in a factory preassembled side access
housing or a factory-made sectional supporting frame as indicated. Provide
prefilters of the type, construction and efficiency indicated.
2.9.3.3 Holding Frames
Fabricate frames from not lighter than 16 gauge sheet steel with
rust-inhibitor coating. Equip each holding frame with suitable filter
holding devices. Provide gasketed holding frame seats. Make all joints
airtight.
2.9.3.4 Filter Gauges
Provide dial type filter gauges, diaphragm actuated draft for all filter
stations, including those filters which are furnished as integral parts of
factory fabricated air handling units. Gauges shall be at least 3-7/8
inches in diameter, with white dials with black figures, and graduated in
0.01 inch of water, with a minimum range of 1 inch of water beyond the
specified final resistance for the filter bank on which each gauge is
applied. Provide each gauge with a screw operated zero adjustment and two
static pressure tips with integral compression fittings, two molded plastic
vent valves, two 5 foot minimum lengths of 1/4 inch diameter aluminum
tubing, and all hardware and accessories for gauge mounting.
2.10 AIR HANDLING UNITS
2.10.1 Factory-Fabricated Air Handling Units
Provide single-zone draw-through type or single-zone blow-through type

units as indicated. Units shall include fans, coils, airtight insulated
casing, prefilters, secondary filter sections, adjustable V-belt drives,
belt guards for externally mounted motors, access sections where indicated,
mixing box vibration-isolators, and appurtenances required for specified
operation. Provide vibration isolators as indicated. Physical dimensions
of each air handling unit shall be suitable to fit space allotted to the
unit with the capacity indicated. Provide air handling unit that is rated
in accordance with AHRI 430 and AHRI certified for cooling.
2.10.1.1 Casings
Provide the following:
a. Casing sections 2 inch double wall type, constructed of a minimum 18

gauge galvanized steel, or 18 gauge corrosion-resisting sheet steel
conforming to ASTM A167, Type 304. Inner casing of double-wall units
that are a minimum 20 gauge solid galvanized steel or
corrosion-resisting sheet steel conforming to ASTM A167, Type 304.
Design and construct casing with an integral insulated structural
galvanized steel frame such that exterior panels are non-load bearing.
b. Individually removable exterior panels with standard tools. Removal

shall not affect the structural integrity of the unit. Furnish casings
with access sections, according to paragraph AIR HANDLING UNITS,
inspection doors, and access doors, all capable of opening a minimum of
90 degrees, as indicated.
c. Insulated, fully gasketed, double-wall type inspection and access

doors, of a minimum 18 gauge outer and 20 gauge inner panels made of
either galvanized steel or corrosion-resisting sheet steel conforming
to ASTM A167, Type 304. Doors shall be rigid and provided with heavy
duty hinges and latches. Inspection doors shall be a minimum 12 inches
wide by 12 inches high. Access doors shall be a minimum 24 inches
wide, the full height of the unit casing or a minimum of 6 foot,
whichever is less.
d. Double-wall insulated type drain pan (thickness equal to exterior

casing) constructed of 16 gauge corrosion resisting sheet steel
conforming to ASTM A167, Type 304, conforming to ASHRAE 62.1.
Construct drain pans water tight, treated to prevent corrosion, and
designed for positive condensate drainage. When 2 or more cooling
coils are used, with one stacked above the other, condensate from the
upper coils shall not flow across the face of lower coils. Provide
intermediate drain pans or condensate collection channels and
downspouts, as required to carry condensate to the unit drain pan out
of the air stream and without moisture carryover. Construct drain pan
to allow for easy visual inspection, including underneath the coil
without removal of the coil and to allow complete and easy physical
cleaning of the pan underneath the coil without removal of the coil.
Coils shall be individually removable from the casing.
e. Casing insulation that conforms to NFPA 90A. Single-wall casing

sections handling conditioned air shall be insulated with not less than
1 inch thick, 1-1/2 pound density coated fibrous glass material having
a thermal conductivity not greater than 0.23 Btu/hr-sf-F. Double-wall

casing sections handling conditioned air shall be insulated with not
less than 2 inches of the same insulation specified for single-wall
casings. Foil-faced insulation is not an acceptable substitute for use
with double wall casing. Double wall insulation shall be completely
sealed by inner and outer panels.
f. Factory applied fibrous glass insulation that conforms to ASTM C1071,

except that the minimum thickness and density requirements do not
apply, and that meets the requirements of NFPA 90A. Make air handling
unit casing insulation uniform over the entire casing. Foil-faced
insulation is not an acceptable substitute for use on double-wall
access doors and inspections doors.
g. A latched and hinged inspection door, in the fan and coil sections.
Plus additional inspection doors, access doors and access sections.
2.10.1.2 Heating and Cooling Coils
Provide coils as specified in paragraph AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT.
2.10.1.3 Air Filters
Provide air filters as specified in paragraph AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT for

types and thickness indicated.
2.10.1.4 Fans
Provide the following:
a. Fans that are double-inlet, centrifugal type with each fan in a

separate scroll. Dynamically balance fans and shafts prior to
installation into air handling unit, then after it has been installed
in the air handling unit, statically and dynamically balance the entire
fan assembly. Mount fans on steel shafts, accurately ground and
finished.
b. Fan bearings that are sealed against dust and dirt and are precision
self-aligning ball or roller type, with L50 rated bearing life at not
less than 200,000 hours as defined by ABMA 9 and ABMA 11. Bearings
shall be permanently lubricated or lubricated type with lubrication
fittings readily accessible at the drive side of the unit. Support
bearings by structural shapes, or die formed sheet structural members,
or support plates securely attached to the unit casing. Do not fasten
bearings directly to the unit sheet metal casing. Furnish fans and
scrolls with coating indicated.
c. Fans that are driven by a unit-mounted, or a floor-mounted motor

connected to fans by V-belt drive complete with belt guard for
externally mounted motors. Furnish belt guards that are the
three-sided enclosed type with solid or expanded metal face. Belt
drives shall be designed for not less than a 1.3 service factor based
on motor nameplate rating.
d. Where fixed sheaves are required, the use of variable pitch sheaves is
allowed during air balance, but replace them with an appropriate fixed
sheave after air balance is completed. Select variable pitch sheaves
to drive the fan at a speed that produces the specified capacity when
set at the approximate midpoint of the sheave adjustment. Furnish
motors for V-belt drives with adjustable bases, and with open,
splashproof enclosures.
e. Motor starters of magnetic type with weather-resistant enclosure.

Select unit fan or fans to produce the required capacity at the fan
static pressure with sound power level as indicated. Obtain the sound
power level values according to AMCA 300, ASHRAE 68, or AHRI 260.
2.10.1.5 Access Sections and Filter/Mixing Boxes
Provide access sections where indicated and furnish with access doors as
shown. Construct access sections and filter/mixing boxes in a manner
identical to the remainder of the unit casing and equip with access doors.
Design mixing boxes to minimize air stratification and to promote thorough
mixing of the air streams.
2.11 ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNITS
All units shall be factory assembled, internally wired, and 100 Percent run
tested to check operation, fan/blower rotation and control sequence before
leaving the factory. Wiring internal to the unit shall be numbered for
simplified identification. Units shall be ETL listed and labeled,
classified in accordance with UL 1995 / CSA C22.2. Unit(s) shall be
complete with all components and accessories as specified.
2.11.1 Quality Assurance
All unit(s) shall be factory run tested before shipping. A proof copy of
the test shall be placed in the unit electrical power & control panel.
Unit(s) shall bear the ETL label, tested in accordance to UL 1995.
Electrical components shall be UL listed; fans shall be tested in an AMCA
certified laboratory; insulation shall comply with NFPA 90A; coils shall
tested in accordance to AHRI 410 ; energy recovery exchangers shall be in
accordance to ANSI/AHRI 1060, "Rating Air-to-Air Energy Recovery
Equipment"; filters shall be tested in accordance to ASHRAE 52.2. The unit
manufacturer shall have an independent testing agency test the air leakage,
panel deflection and sound pressure levels for a typical unit providing at
minimum the supply airflow of units in question and not exceeding 20,000
CFM. The air leakage of the unit(s) shall not exceed 1 Percent at 8"
inches H2O positive static pressure and a copy of the report must be
submitted upon request. Unit shall be constructed to limit frame and panel
deflection to 1/250th of the panel length at 8" inches H2O positive static
pressure and a copy of the report must be submitted upon request. The unit
shall also be tested in accordance with ANSI S12.54 and instrumentation
used must be in compliance with the requirements of AMCA 300 for sound
readings. The sound tests conducted shall report overall sound power and
pressure readings for supply air outlet, return air inlet and casing
radiated.
2.11.1.1 Housing
The unit housing shall be constructed from a frame, base and panel
assembly. Unit shall be completely factory assembled and shipped in one
piece as shown on drawings. The frame shall consist of die cast corners
and extruded aluminum profiles welded together for reinforcement. The base
structure shall be fully welded with formed heavy gauge galvanized steel.
Double lined heavy duty galvanized steel, G-90 floor insulated with R12
foam shall be mechanically fastened to the base structure which shall
consist of an anti-vibration gasket to diminish the metal to metal
contact. Base structure shall have galvanized lifting lugs. All roof and
wall panels shall be made from G-90 galvanized steel, minimum 18-gauge
exterior and 20 gauge interior. All panels and access doors shall be
double wall construction with (R-8.6) two-inch thick, minimum 1.8 PCF
fiberglass insulation. Panels shall be fastened from the interior and
gasketed along the frame to reduce thermal transmission. Fixed panels shall
be removable without affecting the housing integrity. Access doors shall
be provided to all major components to facilitate quick and easy access.
If access doors do not open against unit operating pressure, provide safety
latches that allow access doors to partially open after first handle
movement and fully open after second handle movement. Removable panels
provided for equipment pull out for coil(s), heat exchanger(s) and fan
intake section(s) shall have key tooled threaded insert fasteners. Hinges
shall be aluminum butt hinges designed to open 180 degrees. Access doors
shall be sealed with a full "U-Shaped" gasket for tightness along the door
edge. Bulb type gaskets shall not be acceptable. The airflow separation
wall between the outside air intake and exhaust air outlet shall be a one
inch double wall insulated. Floor openings shall be covered with safety
walk on gratings. All roof and side wall seams shall be positively sealed
to prevent water and air leakage. Outdoor units shall have a rain gutter
above each access door and a watertight roof shall be provided with a
UV-reflective membrane. Outdoor units shall have the entire exterior
finished with (2) two coats of acrylic urethane enamel. Paint shall pass
ASTM B117 3000-hour salt fog resistance test.
2.11.1.2 Weather Hood(s)
Intake hood shall include an aluminum frame to hold 2 inch pleated

filters. Hood shall be designed with an angle and include a removable
louver for access to OA Pre-Filters and be designed for maximum 450 FPM air
velocity.
2.11.1.3 Fans
The fans shall be carefully positioned and installed at an optimal distance

to respect uniform airflow across the heat exchanger & coil(s).
Plug Fans: Fans shall be direct drive radial centrifugal fans with
free running impeller. No fan belts will be acceptable for this
application. Fans shall be compact, optimized and construction
made of galvanized sheet steel with backward curved high
efficiency impeller, protected by an epoxy powder coating. The
single inlet shall be mounted onto constant speed direct drive
motor, equipped with an air flow optimized inlet cone from
galvanized sheet steel. Fans will require to be operated by a
Variable speed drive.
The fan housing and motor assembly shall be isolated from the unit
cabinetry with a minimum 95 Percent efficient isolators. Fan(s) shall have
flexible duct canvas and galvanized spring isolators. Painted isolators are
unacceptable.
2.11.1.4 Fan Motors
The fan motors shall meet NEMA standard dimensions and comply with the
Energy policy Act of 1997. Motors shall have high efficiencies with low
noise and vibration output. Motors shall have ODP enclosure with Premium
efficiency performance. Units shall be designed for constant application.
Please refer to the unit schedule for the application type.

Option: A shaft grounding brush kit will be provided to prevent electrical
damage to motor bearings by safely channeling harmful shaft currents to
ground.
2.11.1.5 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
Refer to Specification Section 26 29 23 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES for VFD

requirements. VFDs will be installed without a by-pass.
2.11.1.6 Pre-Filters
Filters shall be factory installed upstream of the heat exchanger and

coils, in both airstreams. The filters shall be MERV 8. Each filter shall
consist of 100 Percent synthetic media, expanded metal on the downstream
and enclosing with high wet-strength beverage board with diagonal support
bonded on air entering and air exiting side of each pleat.
2.11.1.7 Dampers Non-Insulated
Dampers shall be installed where shown on the drawings. Dampers shall be

low leak type with rubber edges, opposed or parallel blades, and
constructed from extruded aluminum. Galvanized dampers will not be
acceptable. The exhaust air outlet shall have a standard aluminum gravity
type damper, unless otherwise noted below.
Dampers shall be installed in the compartments (as shown on the drawings)

with linkage rod for actuators:
Actuators shall be 24V factory installed; two-position or modulating type

(please refer to the control diagrams). All actuators shall have spring
return mechanism and auxiliary switches. Dampers will be installed in the
failed close position unless otherwise noted.
2.11.1.8 Dehumidification Section with Variable Air Cooled Condensers
Provide integral variable capacity through variable speed compressor air

cooled condensing section. The condensing unit shall be factory piped,
wired, and ready for field installation and charge with R-410A refrigerant.
Each compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater function,
anti-short cycling and a variable frequency drive (VFD) which includes a
built-in phase loss detector. Compressors shall be variable speed scroll
type. Each condenser fan banks shall be equipped with a variable frequency
drive (VFD). Protective guards shall be included. All condenser fans
shall have an asynchronous external motor type, insulation class F, IP54
and 100 Percent variable speed. Exterior cabinet shall be capable of
withstanding 3000 hour salt spray exposure per ASTM B117. Compressors shall
be mounted on rubber and shear vibration insulators. Condenser Coil
construction shall consist of aluminum alloys for the fins, tubes and
manifolds or Copper coils with aluminum fins. Assembled condenser coils
shall be leak tested and pressure tested at 650 psig. Condenser fans shall
modulate to reach minimal energy consumption while meeting the cooling load
required by the associated air handling unit.
The following components are compulsory and must be included in the ACCU:
liquid line filter/dryer, vertical receiver with temperature relief device,
hi pressure switch, hi and low pressure transducers, hi/low pressure
gauges, suction and liquid lines shutoff valves, suction line accumulators.
The following safety devices are also compulsory and must be included in
the ACCU:
Compressor lockout protection for internal or external overload, low

pressure protection, high pressure protection and compressor reverse
rotation protection.
Controls shall include: automatic compressor lead/lag control, compressor

minimum off time (5 min), capacity control with variable speed compressors
and alarm relay out to indicate when the unit is in alarm condition.
All refrigeration parts, including compressors shall be installed in a
closed vented service compartment separate from the condenser coil airflow.
Each refrigeration system shall be factory tested. Minimum (5) five year
compressor warranties shall be provided.
2.11.1.9 DX Coils
Coils shall be factory installed in the unit. Coils shall be designed with
respective circuits to match the design requirements. All coils shall have
a distributor per circuit connection. Primary surface shall be round
seamless copper tube. Secondary surface shall consist of aluminum plate
fins. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fins to provide a
continuous primary to secondary compression bond over the entire finned
length for maximum heat transfer rates. Casing shall be constructed of
continuous galvanized steel. Coils shall be circuited for counter-flow
heat transfer. The complete coil shall be tested with 315 pounds air
pressure and be suitable for operation at 250 psig working pressures.
Maximum finned coil height shall be 60 inches and shall not exceed 500 FPM
face velocity.
Drain pan shall be provided on cooling coils. Cooling coils shall sit on
stainless steel support rails, which shall stand a minimum of (2) two inches
above the highest point of the floor drain pan. Stacked coils shall be
provided for larger airflows and intermediate drain pans shall be provided
for each coil bank. Drain pans shall be stainless steel with stainless
steel drain connections on one side only. Pan shall be sloped in two
planes. All coils shall be certified in accordance with AHRI 410.
2.11.1.10 Water Coils
Coils shall be are factory installed in the unit. Primary surface shall be
round seamless copper tube. Secondary surface shall consist of aluminum
plate fins for higher capacity and structural strength. Fins shall have
full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover over the entire
tube for maximum heat transfer. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into
the fins to provide a continuous primary to secondary compression bond over
the entire finned length for maximum heat transfer rates. Casing shall be
constructed of continuous galvanized steel. Coils shall be circuited for
counter-flow heat transfer. The complete coil shall be tested with 315
pounds air pressure and be suitable for operation at 250 psig working
pressures. Maximum finned coil height shall be 60 inches and shall not
exceed 500 FPM face velocity.
Drain pan shall be provided for cooling coils. Cooling coils shall sit on
stainless steel support rails, which shall stand a minimum of (2) two inches
above the highest point of the floor drain pan. Stacked coils shall be
provided for larger airflows and intermediate drain pans shall be provided
for each coil bank. Drain pans shall be stainless steel with stainless
steel drain connections on one side only. Pan shall be sloped in two
planes. All coils shall be certified in accordance with AHRI 410.
2.11.1.11 Indirect Gas Fired Duct Furnace
Furnish and install where shown on plans Gas-fired Duct Furnace Heat
Module(s). The module shall be a Recognized Component by (UL / ETL). All
modules will have a minimum thermal efficiency of 80 Percent. The module
shall employ a tubular heat exchanger and a draft inducer assembly to
provide for positive venting of flue gases. Burner assemblies shall employ
in-shot type burners constructed of aluminized steel body and sintered
metal flame holder with integral carryover plenum. The ignition system will
include a Igniter and flame rod detection. Ceramic hot surface ignition
systems are unacceptable. Gas-fired duct furnace(s) provided shall employ
a tubular heat exchanger constructed of 18-gauge minimum, type 409
stainless steel, and having a minimum wall thickness of 0.047 inch. Tubes
shall be produced to ASTM A 249/A 249M standards for heat exchanger
application. Tubes shall employ restrictors to eliminate noise associated
with expansion and contraction of internal baffles during heating cycles,
and to provide for unobstructed drainage of condensate that occurs in the
tubes during cooling operation. Drainage shall be configured so that
burners and burner surfaces are not exposed to condensate during cooling
system operation. Full Modulation control shall be provided. On a call
for heat and subsequent safe burner light OFF, the burner firing rate is
controlled between 20 Percent and 100 Percent of full rated capacity. The
modulation will be continuous between 20 Percent and 100 Percent; "stepped"
modulation is not acceptable. Controls shall include an ignition control
with alarm capable contact and one hour auto reset on lockout, roll out
switch, high limit switch and a proving switch of loss of the induced draft
fan. Additionally, on modulating and 2-stage systems all timing and
switching functions shall be controlled through an electronic timer relay
control. Staging controller available for 0 to 10VDC or 4 to 20mA input
signals from building management control.
Burners will use Natural Gas (with gas pressure min 7 inches-max 14 inches
wc) unless otherwise specified.
2.11.1.12 Roof Curb
A non-insulated, pre-fabricated roof curb shall be provided. The roof curb

will be made of 16-gauge galvanized steel.
2.11.1.13 Power & Safety Control
The power and control center shall be integral to the unit housing and
rated equivalent to NEMA 3R. Panels that are externally mounted to the
unit shall not be accepted, regardless of the NEMA rating they may have. A
separate access door shall be provided with an approved locking device.
All electrical components contained in the panel shall be UL certified and
labeled. The unit shall be complete with VFDs, fuses, cascading overloads
(without VFD's or 2 motors on same VFD), relays, phase protection for
compressorized units, terminals for main ON/OFF and step-down transformer.
All components shall be factory wired for single point power connection by
the manufacturer of the unit. A non-fused safety disconnect switch shall
be factory installed for ON/OFF servicing. Any power or control wiring that
is field installed shall not be accepted under any circumstances. The
Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) is 5kA rms symmetrical, 600V Maximum.
2.11.1.14 Service Power & Lighting
GFI, lights, and switches shall be factory installed and wired to a common
junction box. A separate power connection 120V/1 will be required (powered
by others).
2.11.1.15 Air Temperature Control Package
The unit shall be delivered with factory installed control system. Under
no circumstances shall control be provided by other than the manufacturer
of the equipment. Field installed control package by the ATC will not be
acceptable. The control system shall consist of a microprocessor with LCD
display, 7 day time clock, 20 day holiday schedule, occupied/unoccupied
mode switch, warm up mode, cool down mode, hi-lo limit discharge control,
fan status, dirty filter status, temperature and humidity sensors, and
alarm history. The control system main purpose will be as specified on the
Sequence of Operation. Space temperature and humidity wall mount sensors
shall be field mounted. Indoor installed units shall have Outdoor Air
temperature and humidity sensors field mounted. Terminals for remote
control shall be provided for entire unit ON/OFF, OCCUPIED/UNOCCUPIED mode
selection and alarm contact. Refer to the Sequence of Operation and
control schematic for detailed description and options.
2.11.1.16 Communication Interface Card
The microprocessor shall be capable of communicating with the following

protocol BACnet MS/TP RS-485.
2.11.1.17 Remote Control LCD Display Panel
Remote control panel shall be wall mount type. The panel shall have an LCD
display and scroll buttons to allow change set-points and view status of
unit. In addition, the remote panel shall have a built in buzzer which
will sound upon alarm status.
2.12 ENERGY RECOVERY DEVICES
2.12.1 Run-Around-Coil
Provide assembly that is air-to-liquid-to-air energy recovery system for

transfer of sensible heat from exhaust air to supply air stream and that
delivers an energy transfer effectiveness not less than that indicated
without cross-contamination with maximum energy recovery at minimum life
cycle cost. Computer optimize components for capacity, effectiveness,
number of coil fins per inch, number of coil rows, flow rate, heat transfer
rate of 60 percent by volume of propylene glycol solution, and frost
control. Provide coils that conform to paragraph AIR HANDLING UNITS.
Provide related pumps, and piping specialties.
2.13 FACTORY PAINTING
Factory paint new equipment, which are not of galvanized construction.

Paint with a corrosion resisting paint finish according to ASTM A123/A123M
or ASTM A924/A924M. Clean, phosphatize and coat internal and external
ferrous metal surfaces with a paint finish which has been tested according
to ASTM B117, ASTM D1654, and ASTM D3359. Submit evidence of satisfactory
paint performance for a minimum of 125 hours for units to be installed
indoors and 3,000 hours for units to be installed outdoors. Provide rating
of failure at the scribe mark that is not less than 6, average creepage not
greater than 1/8 inch. Provide rating of the inscribed area that is not
less than 10, no failure. On units constructed of galvanized steel that
have been welded, provide a final shop docket of zinc-rich protective paint
on exterior surfaces of welds or welds that have burned through from the
interior according to ASTM D520 Type I.
Factory painting that has been damaged prior to acceptance by the

Contracting Officer shall be field painted in compliance with the
requirements of paragraph FIELD PAINTING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.
2.14 SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS/SERVICES
2.14.1 Heat Recovery Glycol Piping
The requirements for heat recovery glycol piping are specified in Section
23 05 15 COMMON PIPING FOR HVAC.
2.14.2 Refrigerant Piping
The requirements for refrigerant piping are specified in Section 23 23 00

REFRIGERANT PIPING.
2.14.3 Condensate Drain Lines
Provide and install condensate drainage for each item of equipment that
generates condensate in accordance with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL
PURPOSE except as modified herein.
2.14.4 Backflow Preventers
The requirements for backflow preventers are specified in Section 22 00 00

PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.
2.14.5 Insulation
The requirements for shop and field applied insulation are specified in
Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
2.14.6 Controls
The requirements for controls are specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING,

ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS and 23 09 23.13 22 BACnet DIRECT
DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions
in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before
performing the work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
a. Install materials and equipment in accordance with the requirements of

the contract drawings and approved manufacturer's installation
instructions. Accomplish installation by workers skilled in this type
of work. Perform installation so that there is no degradation of the
designed fire ratings of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors.
b. No installation is permitted to block or otherwise impede access to any

existing machine or system. Install all hinged doors to swing open a
minimum of 120 degrees. Provide an area in front of all access doors
that clears a minimum of 3 feet. In front of all access doors to
electrical circuits, clear the area the minimum distance to energized

circuits as specified in OSHA Standards, part 1910.333
(Electrical-Safety Related work practices)and an additional 3 feet.
c. Except as otherwise indicated, install emergency switches and alarms in

conspicuous locations. Mount all indicators, to include gauges,
meters, and alarms in order to be easily visible by people in the area.
3.2.1 Condensate Drain Lines
Provide water seals in the condensate drain from all units. Provide a
depth of each seal of 2 inches plus the number of inches, measured in water
gauge, of the total static pressure rating of the unit to which the drain
is connected. Provide water seals that are constructed of 2 tees and an
appropriate U-bend with the open end of each tee plugged. Provide pipe cap
or plug cleanouts where indicated. Connect drains indicated to connect to
the sanitary waste system using an indirect waste fitting. Insulate air
conditioner drain lines as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION
FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
3.2.2 Equipment and Installation
Provide frames and supports for tanks, compressors, pumps, valves, air
handling units, fans, coils, dampers, and other similar items requiring
supports. Floor mount or ceiling hang air handling units as indicated.
Anchor and fasten as detailed. Set floor-mounted equipment on not less than
6 inch concrete pads or curbs doweled in place unless otherwise
indicated. Make concrete foundations heavy enough to minimize the
intensity of the vibrations transmitted to the piping, duct work and the
surrounding structure, as recommended in writing by the equipment
manufacturer. In lieu of a concrete pad foundation, build a concrete
pedestal block with isolators placed between the pedestal block and the
floor. Make the concrete foundation or concrete pedestal block a mass not
less than three times the weight of the components to be supported.
Provide the lines connected to the pump mounted on pedestal blocks with
flexible connectors. Submit foundation drawings as specified in paragraph
DETAIL DRAWINGS. Provide concrete for foundations as specified in Section
03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
3.2.3 Access Panels
Install access panels for concealed valves, vents, controls, dampers, and
items requiring inspection or maintenance of sufficient size, and locate
them so that the concealed items are easily serviced and maintained or
completely removed and replaced. Provide access panels as specified in
Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.
3.2.4 Flexible Duct
Install pre-insulated flexible duct in accordance with the latest printed

instructions of the manufacturer to ensure a vapor tight joint. Provide
hangers, when required to suspend the duct, of the type recommended by the
duct manufacturer and set at the intervals recommended.
3.2.5 Metal Ductwork
Install according to SMACNA 1966 unless otherwise indicated. Install duct

supports for sheet metal ductwork according to SMACNA 1966, unless
otherwise specified. Do not use friction beam clamps indicated in
SMACNA 1966. Anchor risers on high velocity ducts in the center of the
vertical run to allow ends of riser to move due to thermal expansion.
Erect supports on the risers that allow free vertical movement of the
duct. Attach supports only to structural framing members and concrete
slabs. Do not anchor supports to metal decking unless a means is provided
and approved for preventing the anchor from puncturing the metal decking.
Where supports are required between structural framing members, provide
suitable intermediate metal framing. Where C-clamps are used, provide
retainer clips.
3.2.6 Dust Control
To prevent the accumulation of dust, debris and foreign material during

construction, perform temporary dust control protection. Protect the
distribution system (supply and return) with temporary seal-offs at all
inlets and outlets at the end of each day's work. Keep temporary
protection in place until system is ready for startup.
3.2.7 Insulation
Provide thickness and application of insulation materials for ductwork,

piping, and equipment according to Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Externally insulate outdoor air intake ducts and
plenums up to the point where the outdoor air reaches the conditioning unit.
3.2.8 Duct Test Holes
Provide holes with closures or threaded holes with plugs in ducts and
plenums as indicated or where necessary for the use of pitot tube in
balancing the air system. Plug insulated duct at the duct surface, patched
over with insulation and then marked to indicate location of test hole if
needed for future use.
3.2.9 Power Transmission Components Adjustment
Test V-belts and sheaves for proper alignment and tension prior to
operation and after 72 hours of operation at final speed. Uniformly load
belts on drive side to prevent bouncing. Make alignment of direct driven
couplings to within 50 percent of manufacturer's maximum allowable range of
misalignment.
3.3 EQUIPMENT PADS
Provide equipment pads to the dimensions shown or, if not shown, to conform
to the shape of each piece of equipment served with a minimum 3-inch margin
around the equipment and supports. Allow equipment bases and foundations,
when constructed of concrete or grout, to cure a minimum of 14 calendar
days before being loaded.
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
Install work in such a manner and at such time that a minimum of cutting
and patching of the building structure is required. Make holes in exposed
locations, in or through existing floors, by drilling and smooth by
sanding. Use of a jackhammer is permitted only where specifically
approved. Make holes through masonry walls to accommodate sleeves with an
iron pipe masonry core saw.
3.5 CLEANING
Thoroughly clean surfaces of piping and equipment that have become covered
with dirt, plaster, or other material during handling and construction
before such surfaces are prepared for final finish painting or are enclosed
within the building structure. Before final acceptance, clean mechanical
equipment, including piping, ducting, and fixtures, and free from dirt,
grease, and finger marks. Incorporate housekeeping for field construction
work which leaves all furniture and equipment in the affected area free of
construction generated dust and debris; and, all floor surfaces
vacuum-swept clean.
3.6 PENETRATIONS
Provide sleeves and prepared openings for duct mains, branches, and other
penetrating items, and install during the construction of the surface to be
penetrated. Cut sleeves flush with each surface. Place sleeves for round
duct 15 inches and smaller. Build framed, prepared openings for round duct
larger than 15 inches and square, rectangular or oval ducts. Sleeves and
framed openings are also required where grilles, registers, and diffusers
are installed at the openings. Provide one inch clearance between
penetrating and penetrated surfaces except at grilles, registers, and
diffusers. Pack spaces between sleeve or opening and duct or duct
insulation with mineral fiber conforming with ASTM C553, Type 1, Class B-2.
a. Sleeves: Fabricate sleeves, except as otherwise specified or indicated,

from 20 gauge thick mill galvanized sheet metal. Where sleeves are
installed in bearing walls or partitions, provide black steel pipe
conforming with ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 20.
b. Framed Prepared Openings: Fabricate framed prepared openings from 20

gauge galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated.
c. Insulation: Provide duct insulation in accordance with Section 23 07 00

THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS continuous through sleeves
and prepared openings except firewall penetrations. Terminate duct
insulation at fire dampers and flexible connections. For duct handling
air at or below 60 degrees F, provide insulation continuous over the
damper collar and retaining angle of fire dampers, which are exposed to
unconditioned air.
d. Closure Collars: Provide closure collars of a minimum 4 inches wide,

unless otherwise indicated, for exposed ducts and items on each side of
penetrated surface, except where equipment is installed. Install
collar tight against the surface and fit snugly around the duct or
insulation. Grind sharp edges smooth to prevent damage to penetrating
surface. Fabricate collars for round ducts 15 inches in diameter or
less from 20 gauge galvanized steel. Fabricate collars for square and
rectangular ducts, or round ducts with minimum dimension over 15 inches
from 18 gauge galvanized steel. Fabricate collars for square and
rectangular ducts with a maximum side of 15 inches or less from 20 gauge
galvanized steel. Install collars with fasteners a maximum of 6 inches
on center. Attach to collars a minimum of 4 fasteners where the
opening is 12 inches in diameter or less, and a minimum of 8 fasteners
where the opening is 20 inches in diameter or less.
e. Firestopping: Where ducts pass through fire-rated walls, fire

partitions, and fire rated chase walls, seal the penetration with fire
stopping materials as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.7 FIELD PAINTING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces
need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the
surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and
solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except clean to bare
metal on metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F.
Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after
the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and
retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Provide aluminum or light
gray finish coat.
a. Temperatures less than 120 degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, apply

one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness
of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness
of one mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of one mil per coat to metal surfaces subject to temperatures
less than 120 degrees F.
b. Temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F: Apply two coats of 400
degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of
two mils to metal surfaces subject to temperatures between 120 and 400
degrees F.
c. Temperatures greater than 400 degrees F: Apply two coats of 315

degrees C 600 degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum
dry film thickness of two mils to metal surfaces subject to
temperatures greater than 400 degrees F.
3.8 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS
Provide identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or

engraved anodized aluminum, indicating service and item number on all
valves and dampers. Provide tags that are 1-3/8 inch minimum diameter with
stamped or engraved markings. Make indentations black for reading
clarity. Attach tags to valves with No. 12 AWG 0.0808-inch diameter
corrosion-resistant steel wire, copper wire, chrome-plated beaded chain or
plastic straps designed for that purpose.
3.9 DUCTWORK LEAK TESTS
The requirements for ductwork leak tests are specified in Section 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.
3.10 DAMPER ACCEPTANCE TEST
Submit the proposed schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of test.
Operate all fire dampers and smoke dampers under normal operating
conditions, prior to the occupancy of a building to determine that they
function properly. Test each fire damper equipped with fusible link by
having the fusible link cut in place. Test dynamic fire dampers with the
air handling and distribution system running. Reset all fire dampers with
the fusible links replaced after acceptance testing. To ensure optimum
operation and performance, install the damper so it is square and free from
racking.
3.11 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
The requirements for testing, adjusting, and balancing are specified in

Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC. Begin testing,
adjusting, and balancing only when the air supply and distribution,
including controls, has been completed, with the exception of performance
tests.
3.12 PERFORMANCE TESTS
After testing, adjusting, and balancing is complete as specified, test each

system as a whole to see that all items perform as integral parts of the
system and temperatures and conditions are evenly controlled throughout the
building. Record the testing during the applicable season. Make
corrections and adjustments as necessary to produce the conditions
indicated or specified. Conduct capacity tests and general operating tests
by an experienced engineer. Provide tests that cover a period of not less
than 7 days for each system and demonstrate that the entire system is
functioning according to the specifications. Make coincidental chart
recordings at points indicated on the drawings for the duration of the time
period and record the temperature at space thermostats or space sensors,
the humidity at space humidistats or space sensors and the ambient
temperature and humidity in a shaded and weather protected area.
Submit test reports for the ductwork leak test, and performance tests in
booklet form, upon completion of testing. Document phases of tests
performed including initial test summary, repairs/adjustments made, and
final test results in the reports.
3.13 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
Provide a temporary bypass for water coils to prevent flushing water from
passing through coils. Thoroughly clean ducts, plenums, and casing of
debris and blow free of small particles of rubbish and dust and then vacuum
clean before installing outlet faces. Wipe equipment clean, with no traces
of oil, dust, dirt, or paint spots. Provide temporary filters prior to
startup of all fans that are operated during construction, and install new
filters after all construction dirt has been removed from the building, and
the ducts, plenums, casings, and other items specified have been vacuum
cleaned. Maintain system in this clean condition until final acceptance.
Properly lubricate bearings with oil or grease as recommended by the
manufacturer. Tighten belts to proper tension. Adjust control valves and
other miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment to setting indicated or
directed. Adjust fans to the speed indicated by the manufacturer to meet
specified conditions. Maintain all equipment installed under the contract
until close out documentation is received, the project is completed and the
building has been documented as beneficially occupied.
3.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
3.14.1 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Submit six manuals at least 2 weeks prior to field training. Submit data
complying with the requirements specified in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA. Submit Data Package 3 for the items/units listed under
3.14.2 Operation And Maintenance Training
Conduct a training course for the members of the operating staff as

designated by the Contracting Officer. Make the training period consist
of a total of 8 hours of normal working time and start it after all work
specified herein is functionally completed and the Performance Tests have
been approved. Conduct field instruction that covers all of the items
contained in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals as well as
demonstrations of routine maintenance operations. Submit the proposed
On-site Training schedule concurrently with the Operation and Maintenance
Manuals and at least 14 days prior to conducting the training course.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 23 03 00.00 20
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

08/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
This section applies to all sections of Divisions: 21, FIRE SUPPRESSION;

22, PLUMBING; and 23, HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING of this
project specification, unless specified otherwise in the individual section.
1.3.1 Material and Equipment Qualifications
Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers

regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, which are of a
similar material, design and workmanship. Standard products shall have
been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid
opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and
materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product
shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year period.
1.3.2 Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a two-year field service record will be

acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not
less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory
tests, can be shown.
1.3.3 Service Support
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a

certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of
the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These
service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment
installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a
regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.
1.3.4 Manufacturer's Nameplate
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's

name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 1

acceptable.
1.3.5 Modification of References
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory

provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.3.5.1 Definitions
For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract
documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word
"should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code official"
shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For Navy owned
property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the
"Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner"
shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit
holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."
1.3.5.2 Administrative Interpretations
For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of

Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative
requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations
(FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer
in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this project.
References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied
appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his
administrative cognizance and the FAR.
Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before
and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace
damaged or defective items.
1.5 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Furnish motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors with their

respective pieces of equipment. Motors, controllers, disconnects and
contactors shall conform to and have electrical connections provided under
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Furnish internal wiring for
components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment.
Extended voltage range motors will not be permitted. Controllers and
contactors shall have a maximum of 120 volt control circuits, and shall
have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls furnished. When motors
and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated, the cost of
additional electrical service and related work shall be included under the
section that specified that motor or equipment. Power wiring and conduit
for field installed equipment shall be provided under and conform to the
requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
1.6 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL
When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent

instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel
SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 2

in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety

requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be
thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained
in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.
Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the
equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for
regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction
furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than
4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time
for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the
equipment or system.
When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are

made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to
acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.
1.7 ACCESSIBILITY
Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation,

maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves,
expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access, in
locations freely accessible through access doors.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT
New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall
be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section.
3.1.1 Factory Painting Systems
Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to

certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125
hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors
shall withstand 3000 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test
shall be in accordance with ASTM B117, and for that test the acceptance
criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test,
the paint shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no
loss of adhesion; and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage
beyond 0.125 inch on either side of the scratch mark.
The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment
shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If
manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use
on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory
painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.
3.1.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces
Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces
need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the
surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and
solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces
SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 3

subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F shall be cleaned to bare

metal.
Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after
the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and
retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be
aluminum or light gray.
a. Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, the

metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F shall
receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of 1 mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry
film thickness of 1 mil per coat.
b. Temperatures Between 120 and 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to

temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of
400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum
thickness of 2 mils.
c. Temperatures Greater Than 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to

temperatures greater than 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 600
degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry film
thickness of 2 mils.
SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 4

SECTION 23 05 15
COMMON PIPING FOR HVAC

02/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)
AISC 325 (2005) Steel Construction Manual
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS WHB-2.9 (2004) Welding Handbook; Volume 2, Welding

Processes, Part 1
ASME B16.1 (2010) Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged

Fittings Classes 25, 125, and 250
ASME B16.22 (2012) Standard for Wrought Copper and

Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
ASME B16.3 (2011) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings,

Classes 150 and 300
ASME B16.39 (2009) Standard for Malleable Iron

Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250,
and 300
ASME B16.5 (2013) Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings:

NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard
ASME B16.9 (2012) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought

Steel Buttwelding Fittings
ASME B31.3 (2012) Process Piping
ASME B40.100 (2005; R 2010) Pressure Gauges and Gauge

Attachments
ASME BPVC SEC IX (2010) BPVC Section IX-Welding and Brazing

Qualifications
ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 (2010) BPVC Section VIII-Rules for

Construction of Pressure Vessels Division 1

Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges,
and Pipe Fittings
ASTM A197/A197M (2000; R 2011) Standard Specification for

Cupola Malleable Iron
ASTM A234/A234M (2011a) Standard Specification for Piping

Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy
Steel for Moderate and High Temperature
Service
ASTM A276 (2010) Standard Specification for

Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
ASTM A278/A278M (2001; R 2011) Standard Specification for

Gray Iron Castings for Pressure-Containing
Parts for Temperatures Up to 650 degrees F
(350 degrees C)
ASTM A307 (2012) Standard Specification for Carbon

Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile
Strength

Welded and Seamless
ASTM A563 (2007a) Standard Specification for Carbon

and Alloy Steel Nuts
ASTM A6/A6M (2012) Standard Specification for General

Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel
Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling
ASTM B32 (2008) Standard Specification for Solder

Metal
ASTM B62 (2009) Standard Specification for

Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings
ASTM B88 (2009) Standard Specification for Seamless

Copper Water Tube
ASTM C109/C109M (2012) Standard Test Method for

Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube
Specimens)
ASTM C404 (2011) Standard Specification for

Aggregates for Masonry Grout
ASTM C476 (2010) Standard Specification for Grout

for Masonry

Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications
ASTM C67 (2012) Standard Test Methods for Sampling

and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile

Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM E1 (2007) Standard Specification for ASTM

Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers
ASTM E814 (2011a) Standard Test Method for Fire

Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops
ASTM F104 (2011) Standard Classification System for

Nonmetallic Gasket Materials
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS

INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-125 (2010) Gray Iron and Ductile Iron In-Line,

Spring-Loaded, Center-Guided Check Valves
MSS SP-58 (2009) Pipe Hangers and Supports -

Materials, Design and Manufacture,
Selection, Application, and Installation
MSS SP-67 (2011) Butterfly Valves
MSS SP-69 (2003; Notice 2012) Pipe Hangers and

Supports - Selection and Application (ANSI
Approved American National Standard)
MSS SP-72 (2010a) Ball Valves with Flanged or

Butt-Welding Ends for General Service
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
CID A-A-1922 (Rev A; Notice 2) Shield, Expansion

(Caulking Anchors, Single Lead)
CID A-A-1923 (Rev A; Notice 2) Shield, Expansion (Lag,

Machine and Externally Threaded Wedge Bolt
Anchors)
CID A-A-1924 (Rev A; Notice 2) Shield, Expansion (Self

Drilling Tubular Expansion Shell Bolt
Anchors
CID A-A-1925 (Rev A; Notice 2) Shield Expansion (Nail

Anchors)
CID A-A-55614 (Basic; Notice 2) Shield, Expansion

(Non-Drilling Expansion Anchors)
CID A-A-55615 (Basic; Notice 2) Shield, Expansion (Wood

Screw and Lag Bolt Self-Threading Anchors
UL 1479 (2003; Reprint Oct 2012) Fire Tests of

Through-Penetration Firestops
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS

applies to work specified in this section.
Section 23 05 48.00 40 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT applies to work specified in this section.
Submit Record Drawings for pipes, valves and accessories providing current
factual information including deviations and amendments to the drawings,
and concealed and visible changes in the work.
Submit Coordination Drawings for pipes, valves and specialties showing

coordination of work between different trades and with the structural and
architectural elements of work. Detail all drawings sufficiently to show
overall dimensions of related items, clearances, and relative locations of
work in allotted spaces. Indicate on drawings where conflicts or clearance
problems exist between various trades.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit the following for pipes, valves and specialties showing

conformance with the referenced standards contained within this
section.
Record Drawings
Coordination Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Submit equipment and performance data for the following items

consisting of corrosion resistance, life expectancy, gage
tolerances, and grade line analysis.
Submit Manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:
Pipe and Fittings

Piping Specialties
Valves
Miscellaneous Materials
Supporting Elements
SD-06 Test Reports
Submit test reports on the following tests in accordance with

paragraph entitled, "Piping Installation," of this section.
Hydrostatic Tests
Air Tests
Valve-Operating Tests
Drainage Tests
Pneumatic Tests
Non-Destructive Electric Tests
System Operation Tests
SD-07 Certificates
Submit Certificates for the following in accordance with paragraph

entitled, "Pipe Installation," of this section.
Surface Resistance
Shear and Tensile Strengths
Temperature Ratings
Bending Tests
Flattening Tests
Transverse Guided Weld Bend Tests
Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with

paragraph entitled, "Operation and Maintenance," of this section.
1.4.1 Material and Equipment Qualifications
Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers

regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, which are of a
similar material, design and workmanship. Standard products shall have
been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid
opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and
materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product
shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year period.
1.4.2 Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a two-year field service record will be

acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not
less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory
tests, can be shown.
1.4.3 Service Support
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a

certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of
the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These
service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment
installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a
regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.
1.4.4 Manufacturer's Nameplate

conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory

provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.4.5.1 Definitions
For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract
documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word
"should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code official"
shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For Navy owned
property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the
"Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner"
shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit
holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."
1.4.5.2 Administrative Interpretations
For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of

Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative
requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations
(FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer
in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this project.
References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied
appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his
administrative cognizance and the FAR.
and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace
damaged or defective items.
1.6 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Furnish motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors with their

respective pieces of equipment. Motors, controllers, disconnects and
contactors shall conform to and have electrical connections provided under
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Furnish internal wiring for
components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment.
Extended voltage range motors will not be permitted. Controllers and
contactors shall have a maximum of 120 volt control circuits, and shall
have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls furnished. When motors
and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated, the cost of
additional electrical service and related work shall be included under the
section that specified that motor or equipment. Power wiring and conduit
for field installed equipment shall be provided under and conform to the
requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
1.7 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL
When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent

instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel
in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety
requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be
thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and trained in

operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.
Give instruction during the first regular work week after the equipment or
system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular
operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction
furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than
4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time
for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the
equipment or system.
When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are

made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to
acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.
1.8 ACCESSIBILITY
Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation,

maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves,
expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access, in
locations freely accessible through access doors.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
2.1.1 Type BCS, Black Carbon Steel
Pipe 1/8 through 10 inches shall be Schedule 40 seamless or

electric-resistance welded black carbon steel, conforming to ASTM A53/A53M,
Type E, Grade B (electric-resistance welded) Type S (seamless).
Fittings 2 inches and under shall be 150-pounds per square inch, gage (psig)
working steam pressure (wsp) banded black malleable iron screwed,
conforming to ASTM A197/A197M and ASME B16.3.
Unions 2 inches and under shall be 250 pounds per square inch, wsp female,
screwed, black malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, and ground joint,
conforming to ASME B16.39.
Fittings 2-1/2 inches and over shall be Steel butt weld, conforming to
ASTM A234/A234M and ASME B16.9 to match pipe wall thickness.
Flanges 2-1/2 inches and over shall be 150-pound forged-steel conforming to

ASME B16.5, welding neck to match pipe wall thickness.
2.1.2 Type CPR, Copper
2.1.2.1 Type CPR-A, Copper Above Ground
Tubing 2 inches and under shall be seamless copper tubing, conforming to

ASTM B88, Type L (hard-drawn for all horizontal and all exposed vertical
lines, annealed for concealed vertical lines).
Fittings 2 inches and under shall be 150-psigwsp wrought-copper solder

joint fittings conforming to ASME B16.22.
Unions 2 inches and under shall be 150-psig wsp wrought-copper solder

joint, conforming to ASME B16.22.
Solder must be 60-40 tin-antimony, alloy Sb-5, conforming to ASTM B32.
2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES
2.2.1 Air Separator
Air separated from converter discharge water shall be ejected by a

reduced-velocity device vented to the compression tank.
Air separator shall be carbon steel, designed, fabricated, tested, and

stamped in conformance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 for service pressures not
less than 125 psi.
2.2.2 Air Vents
Manual air vents shall be 3/8-inch globe valves.
Automatic air vents on pumps, mains, and where indicated shall be of

ball-float construction. Vent inlet shall be not less than 3/4-inch ips
and the outlet not less than 1/4-inch ips. Orifice shall be 1/8 inch.
Provide corrosion-resistant steel trim conforming to ASTM A276. Vent shall
be fitted with try-cock. Vent shall discharge air at any pressure up to
150 psi. Outlet shall be copper tube routed.
2.2.3 Compression Tank
Provide compression tank designed, fabricated, tested, and stamped for a

working pressure of not less than 125 psi in accordance with
ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1. Tank shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication
to produce not less than 1.5 ounces of zinc coating per square foot of
single-side surface.
Tank accessories shall include red-lined gage-glass complete with glass

protectors and shutoff valves, air charger and drainer, and manual vent.
2.2.4 Dielectric Connections
Dissimilar pipe metals shall be electrically insulated from each other by

couplings, unions, or flanges commercially manufactured for that purpose
and rated for the service pressure and temperature.
2.2.5 Flexible Metallic Pipe
Flexible pipe shall be the bellows-type with wire braid cover and designed,
constructed, and rated in accordance with the applicable requirements of
ASME B31.3.
Working pressure minimum rating shall be 100 psi at 300 degrees F.
Minimum burst pressure shall be four times working pressure at 300 degrees F.
Bellows material shall be AISI Type 316L corrosion-resistant steel. Braid
shall be AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant steel wire.
Flanged end connection rating and materials shall conform to specifications

for system primary-pressure rating.
2.2.6 Pressure Gages
Pressure gages shall conform to ASME B40.100 and to requirements specified

herein. Pressure-gage size shall be 3-1/2 inches nominal diameter. Case
shall be corrosion-resistant steel, conforming to any of the AISI 300
series of ASTM A6/A6M, with an ASM No. 4 standard commercial polish or
better. Equip gages with adjustable red marking pointer and damper-screw
adjustment in inlet connection. Service-pressure reading shall be at
midpoint of gage range. All gages shall be Grade B or better and be
equipped with gage isolators.
2.2.7 Sleeve Couplings
Sleeve couplings for plain-end pipe shall consist of one steel middle ring,
two steel followers, two chloroprene or Buna-N elastomer gaskets, and the
necessary steel bolts and nuts.
2.2.8 Thermometers
Thermometers shall conform to ASTM E1, except for being filled with a red
organic liquid. Thermometers shall be an industrial pattern armored glass
model, (well-threaded and seal-welded). Thermometers installed 6 feet or
higher above the floor shall have an adjustable angle body. Scale shall be
not less than 7 inches long. Case face shall be manufactured from
manufacturer's standard polished aluminum or AISI 300 series polished
corrosion-resistant steel. Thermometer range shall be 0 deg F to 150 deg F.
Provide thermometers with nonferrous separable wells. Provide lagging
extension to accommodate insulation thickness.
2.2.9 Line Strainers, Water Service
Strainers shall be Y-type with removable basket. Strainers in sizes 2-inch

ips and smaller shall have screwed ends. In sizes 2-1/2-inch ips and
larger, strainers shall have flanged ends. Body working-pressure rating
shall exceed maximum service pressure of system in which installed by at
least 50 percent. Body shall have cast-in arrows to indicate direction of
flow. All strainer bodies fitted with screwed screen retainers shall have
straight threads and gasketed with nonferrous metal. Strainer bodies
2-1/2-inches and larger, fitted with bolted-on screen retainers, shall have
offset blowdown holes. All strainers larger than2-1/2-inches shall be
fitted with manufacturer's standard ball-type blowdown valve. Body
material shall be cast iron conforming to Class 30 ASTM A278/A278M. Where
system material is nonferrous, metal strainer body material shall be
nonferrous metal.
Minimum free-hole area of strainer element shall be equal to not less than
3.4 times the internal area of connecting piping. Strainer screens shall
have perforations not to exceed 0.045-inch. Strainer screens shall have
finished ends fitted to machined screen chamber surfaces to preclude bypass
flow. Strainer element material shall be AISI Type 304 corrosion-resistant
steel.
2.3 VALVES
2.3.1 Ball and Butterfly Valves
Ball valves shall conform to MSS SP-72 for Figure 1A, 1 piece body and
shall be rated for service at not less than 175 psig at 200 degrees F.
Valve bodies in sizes 2 inches and smaller shall be screwed-end
connection-type constructed of Class A copper alloy. Valve bodies in sizes

2-1/2 inches and larger shall be flanged-end connection type, constructed
of Class D material. Balls and stems of valves 2 inches and smaller shall
be manufacturer's standard with hard chrome plating finish. Balls and
stems of valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be manufacturer's standard
Class C corrosion-resistant steel alloy with hard chrome plating. Balls of
valves 6 inches and larger may be Class D with 900 Brinell hard chrome
plating. Valves shall be suitable for flow from either direction and shall
seal equally tight in either direction. Valves with ball seals held in
place by spring washers are not acceptable. All valves shall have
adjustable packing glands. Seats and seals shall be tetrafluoroethylene.
Butterfly valves shall conform to MSS SP-67. Valves shall be wafer type
for mounting between specified flanges and shall be rated for 150-psig
shutoff and nonshock working pressure. Bodies shall be cast ferrous metal
conforming to ASTM A126, Class B, and to ASME B16.1 for body wall
thickness. Seats and seals shall be of the resilient elastomer type
designed for field removal and replacement.
2.3.2 Drain, Vent, and Gage Cocks
Drain, vent, and gage cocks shall be lever handle, ground key type, with
washer and screw, constructed of polished ASTM B62 bronze, and rated 125-psi
wsp. End connections shall be rated for specified service pressure.
Pump vent cocks, and where spray control is required, shall be UL

umbrella-hood type, constructed of manufacturer's standard polished brass.
Cocks shall be 1/2-inch ips male, end threaded, and rated at not less than
125 psi at 225 degrees F.
2.3.3 Nonslam Check Valves (NSV)
Check valves at pump discharges in sizes 2 inches and larger shall be

nonslam or silent-check type conforming to MSS SP-125. Valve disc or plate
shall close before line flow can reverse to eliminate slam and water-hammer
due to check-valve closure. Valve shall be Class 125 rated for 200-psi
maximum, nonshock pressure at 150 degrees F in sizes to 12 inches. Valves
shall be fitted with flanges conforming to ASME B16.1. Valve body may be
cast iron, conforming to ASTM A278/A278M, Class 40 or equivalent strength
ductile iron. Disks shall be manufacturer's standard bronze, aluminum
bronze, or corrosion-resistant steel. Pins, springs, and miscellaneous
trim shall be manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant steel. Disk and
shaft seals shall be Buna-N elastomer tetrafluoroethylene.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
2.4.1 Bolting
Flange and general purpose bolting shall be hex-head and must conform to
ASTM A307, Grade B (bolts, for flanged joints in piping systems where one
or both flanges are cast iron). Heavy hex-nuts shall conform to ASTM A563.
Square-head bolts and nuts are not acceptable. Threads shall be
coarse-thread series.
2.4.2 Elastomer Caulk
Polysulfide- or polyurethane-base elastomer caulking material shall be

two-component type, conforming to ASTM C920.
2.4.3 Flange Gaskets
Compressed non-asbestos sheet, conforming to ASTM F104, coated on both

sides with graphite or similar lubricant, with nitrile composition, binder
rated to 750 degrees F.
2.4.4 Grout
Shrink-resistant grout shall be a premixed and packaged metallic-aggregate,

mortar-grouting compound conforming to ASTM C404 and ASTM C476.
Shrink-resistant grout shall be a combination of premeasured and packaged

epoxy polyamide or amine resins and selected aggregate mortar grouting
compound conforming to the following requirements:
Tensile strength 1,900 psi, minimum
Compressive strength ASTM C109/C109M 14,000 psi, minimum
Shrinkage, linear 0.00012 inch per inch, maximum
Water absorption ASTM C67 0.1 percent, maximum
Bond strength to 1,000 psi, minimum steel in shear

minimum
2.4.5 Pipe Thread Compounds
Use tetrafluoroethylene tape not less than 2 to 3 mils thick in potable and
process water and in chemical systems for pipe sizes to and including
1-inch ips. Tetrafluoroethylene dispersions and other suitable compounds
shall be used for all other applications upon approval by the Contracting
Officer; however, no lead-containing compounds shall be used in potable
water systems.
2.5 SUPPORTING ELEMENTS
Provide all necessary piping systems and equipment supporting elements,

including but not limited to: building structure attachments;
supplementary steel; hanger rods, stanchions, and fixtures; vertical pipe
attachments; horizontal pipe attachments; anchors; guides; and
spring-cushion, variable, or constant supports. All supporting elements
shall be suitable for stresses imposed by systems pressures and
temperatures and natural and other external forces normal to this facility
without damage to supporting element system or to work being supported.
Supporting elements shall conform to requirements of ASME B31.3, MSS SP-58,

and MSS SP-69 except as noted.
Attachments welded to pipe shall be made of materials identical to that of

pipe or materials accepted as permissible raw materials by referenced code
or standard specification.
Supporting elements exposed to weather shall be hot-dip galvanized or

stainless steel. Materials shall be of such a nature that their apparent
and latent-strength characteristics are not reduced due to galvanizing
process. Supporting elements in contact with copper tubing shall be
electroplated with copper.
Type designations specified herein are based on MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.
Masonry anchor group-, type-, and style-combination designations shall be
in accordance with CID A-A-1922, CID A-A-1923, CID A-A-1924, CID A-A-1925 ,
CID A-A-55614, and CID A-A-55615. Support elements, except for
supplementary steel, shall be cataloged, load rated, commercially
manufactured products.
2.5.1 Building Structure Attachments
2.5.1.1 Beam Clamps
Beam clamps shall be center-loading MSS SP-58 Type 20.
When it is not possible to use center-loading beam clamps,

eccentric-loading beam clamps, MSS SP-58 Type 19 may be used for piping
sizes 2 inches and less and for piping sizes 2 through 10 inches provided
two counterbalancing clamps are used per point of pipe support. Where more
than one rod is used per point of pipe support, rod diameter shall be
determined in accordance with referenced standards.
2.5.1.2 C-Clamps
Do not use C-clamps.
2.5.2 Horizontal Pipe Attachments
2.5.2.1 Single Pipes
Support piping in sizes to and including 2-inch ips by MSS SP-58 Type 6
solid malleable iron pipe rings, except that split-band-type rings shall be
used in sizes up to 1-inch ips.
Support piping in sizes through 8-inch ips inclusive by MSS SP-58 Type 1
attachments.
MSS SP-58 Type 1 and Type 6 assemblies shall be used on vapor-sealed

insulated piping and shall have an inside diameter larger than pipe being
supported to provide adequate clearance during pipe movement.
MSS SP-58 Type 40 shields shall be used on all insulated piping. Area of
the supporting surface shall be such that compression deformation of
insulated surfaces does not occur. Longitudinal and transverse shield
edges shall be rolled away from the insulation.
Provide insulated piping without vapor barrier on roll supports with

MSS SP-58 Type 39 saddles.
Spring supports shall be as indicated.
2.5.2.2 Parallel Pipes
Trapeze hangers fabricated from structural steel shapes, with U-bolts,

shall be used in congested areas and where multiple pipe runs occur.
Structural steel shapes shall be of commercially available, proprietary
design, rolled steel.
2.5.3 Vertical Pipe Attachments
Vertical pipe attachments shall be MSS SP-58 Type 8.
Shop drawing data shall include complete fabrication and attachment details
of any spring supports.
2.5.4 Hanger Rods and Fixtures
Only circular cross section rod hangers shall be used to connect building
structure attachments to pipe support devices. Pipe, straps, or bars of
equivalent strength shall be used for hangers only where approved by the
Contracting Officer.
Turnbuckles, swing eyes, and clevises shall be provided as required by

support system to accommodate temperature change, pipe accessibility, and
adjustment for load and pitch. Rod couplings are not acceptable.
2.5.5 Supplementary Steel
Where it is necessary to frame structural members between existing members

or where structural members are used in lieu of commercially rated
supports, design and fabricate such supplementary steel in accordance with
AISC 325.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PIPE INSTALLATION
Submit certificates for pipes, valves and specialties showing conformance

with test requirements as contained in the reference standards contained in
this section. Certificates shall verify Surface Resistance, Shear and
Tensile Strengths, Temperature Ratings, Bending Tests, Flattening Tests and
Transverse Guided Weld Bend Tests.
Test reports for Hydrostatic Tests, Air Tests, Valve-Operating Tests,

Drainage Tests, Pneumatic Tests, Non-Destructive Electric Tests and System
Operation Tests shall be provided by the Contractor, in compliance with
referenced standards contained within this section.
Fabricate and install piping systems in accordance with ASME B31.3,

MSS SP-69, and AWS WHB-2.9.
Connections between steel piping and copper piping shall be electrically

isolated from each other with dielectric couplings (or unions) or flanged
with gaskets rated for the service.
Make final connections to equipment with unions or flanges provided every

100 feet of straight run. Provide unions in the line downstream of
screwed- and welded-end valves.
Ream all pipe ends before joint connections are made.
Screwed joints shall be made up with specified joint compound and not more
than three threads shall show after joint is made up.
Apply joint compounds to the male thread only and exercise care to prevent
compound from reaching the unthreaded interior of the pipe.
Provide screwed unions, welded unions, or bolted flanges wherever required

to permit convenient removal of equipment, valves, and piping accessories
from the piping system for maintenance.
Securely support piping systems with due allowance for thrust forces,
thermal expansion and contraction, and shall not be subjected to
mechanical, chemical, vibrational or other damage as specified in ASME B31.3.
Field welded joints shall conform to the requirements of the AWS WHB-2.9,
ASME B31.3, and ASME BPVC SEC IX.
3.2 VALVES
Provide valves in piping mains and all branches and at equipment where
indicated and as specified.
Provide valves to permit isolation of branch piping and each equipment item
from the balance of the system.
Valves unavoidably located in furred or other normally inaccessible places

shall be provided with access panels adequately sized for the location and
located so that concealed items may be serviced, maintained, or replaced.
3.3 SUPPORTING ELEMENTS INSTALLATION
Provide supporting elements in accordance with the referenced codes and

standards.
Support piping from building structure. No piping shall be supported from

roof deck or from other pipe.
Piping shall run parallel with the lines of the building. Space and
install piping and components so that a threaded pipe fitting may be
removed between adjacent pipes and so that there shall be no less than 1/2
inch of clear space between the finished surface and other work and between
the finished surface of parallel adjacent piping. Hangers on different
adjacent service lines running parallel with each other shall be arranged
to be in line with each other and parallel to the lines of the building.
Install piping support elements at intervals specified hereinafter, at

locations not more than 3 feet from the ends of each runout, and not over 1
foot from each change in direction of piping.
Load rating for all pipe-hanger supports shall be based on insulated weight
of lines filled with water and forces imposed. Deflection per span shall
not exceed slope gradient of pipe. Supports shall be in accordance with
the following minimum rod size and maximum allowable hanger spacing for
specified pipe. For concentrated loads such as valves, the allowable span
must be reduced proportionately:
PIPE SIZE ROD SIZE STEEL PIPE COPPER PIPE

INCHES INCHES FEET FEET
1 and smaller 3/8 8 6
1-1/4 to 1-1/2 3/8 10 8
2 3/8 10 8
2-1/2 to 3-1/2 1/2 12 12
4 to 5 5/8 16 14
PIPE SIZE ROD SIZE STEEL PIPE COPPER PIPE

INCHES INCHES FEET FEET
6 3/4 16 16
8 to 12 7/8 20 20
14 to 18 1 20 20
20 and over 1-1/4 20 20
Provide vibration isolation supports where needed. Refer to Section

23 05 48.00 40 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
where A/C equipment and piping is installed.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
Effective sound stopping and adequate operating clearance shall be provided

to prevent structure contact where piping penetrates walls, floors, or
ceilings into occupied spaces adjacent to equipment rooms; where similar
penetrations occur between occupied spaces; and where penetrations occur
from pipe chases into occupied spaces. Occupied spaces shall include space
above ceilings where no special acoustic treatment of ceiling is provided.
Penetrations shall be finished to be compatible with surface being
penetrated.
3.5 SLEEVES
Provide sleeves where piping passes through roofs, masonry, concrete walls
and floors.
Sleeves passing through steel decks shall be continuously welded to the

deck.
Sleeves that extend through floors, roofs, load bearing walls, and fire
barriers shall be continuous and fabricated from Schedule 40 steel pipe,
with welded anchor lugs. All other sleeves shall be formed by molded
linear polyethylene liners or similar materials that are removable.
Diameter of sleeves shall be large enough to accommodate pipe, insulation,
and jacketing without touching the sleeve and shall provide a minimum
3/8-inch clearance. Sleeve size must accommodate mechanical and thermal
motion of pipe to preclude transmission of vibration to walls and the
generation of noise.
Space between a pipe, bare or insulated, and the inside of a pipe sleeve or
a construction surface penetration shall be packed solid with a mineral
fiber conforming to ASTM C553 Type V (flexible blanket), (to 1,000 degrees
F). Provide this packing wherever the piping passes through firewalls,
equipment room walls, floors, and ceilings connected to occupied spaces,
and other locations where sleeves or construction-surface penetrations
occur between occupied spaces. Where sleeves or construction surface
penetrations occur between conditioned and unconditioned spaces, the space
between a pipe, bare or insulated, and the inside of a pipe sleeve or
construction surface penetration shall be filled with an elastomer caulk to
a depth of 1/2 inch. All surfaces to be caulked shall be oil- and
grease-free.
Through-Penetration fire stop materials and methods shall be in accordance
with ASTM E814 and UL 1479.
Exterior wall sleeves shall be caulked watertight with lead and oakum or
mechanically expandable chloroprene inserts with mastic-sealed metal
components.
Sleeve height above roof surface shall be a minimum of 12 and a maximum of

18 inches.
3.6 FLASHINGS
Provide flashings at penetrations of building boundaries by mechanical

systems and related work.
3.7 DISINFECTION
Flush piping with potable water until visible grease, dirt and other
contaminants are removed (visual inspection).
3.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be consistent with manufacturer's

standard brochures, schematics, printed instructions, general operating
procedures and safety precautions. Test data shall be clear and readily
legible.
SECTION 23 05 48.00 40
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

02/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ACOUSTICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ASA)
ASA S2.71 (1983; R 2006) Guide to the Evaluation of

Human Exposure to Vibration in Buildings
NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB)
NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS (2005) Procedural Standards for TAB

(Testing, Adjusting and Balancing)
Environmental Systems
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

applies to work specified in this section to the extent applicable.
Ensure all vibration-control apparatus is the product of a single

manufacturing source, where possible. Human exposure levels should be
considered using ASA S2.71 and NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS.
Scheduled isolation mounting is in inches and is a minimum static

deflection.
Spans referred to in Part 2, "Vibration-Isolation Systems Application,"

means longest bay dimension.
Determine exact mounting sizes and number of isolators by the isolator

manufacturer based on equipment that will be installed. Check equipment
revolutions per minute (rpm) and spring deflections to verify that
resonance cannot occur.
Five working days prior to commencement of installation, submit

installation drawings for vibration isolator systems including equipment
and performance requirements.
Indicate within outline drawings for vibration isolator systems, overall

physical features, dimensions, ratings, service requirements, and weights
of equipment.
Within ten working days of Contract Award, submit equipment and performance
data for vibration isolator systems including equipment base design;
inertia-block mass relative to support equipment weight; spring loads and
free, operating, and solid heights of spring; spring diameters; nonmetallic
isolator loading and deflection; disturbing frequency; natural frequency of
mounts; deflection of working member; and anticipated amount of physical
SECTION 23 05 48.00 40 Page 1

movement at the reference points.
Ensure data includes the following:
a. Mountings
b. Bases
c. Isolators
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation Drawings; G
Outline Drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
Equipment and Performance Data; G
Isolators; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Type of Isolator; G
Type of Base; G
Allowable Deflection; G
Measured Deflection; G
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TYPE OF VIBRATION-ISOLATION PROVISIONS
Design for vibration isolation using NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS as

applicable to the following sections.
Submit test reports for testing vibration isolation for each type of
isolator and each type of base, and meet referenced standards contained
within this section. Include in test reports allowable deflection and
measured deflection also meeting referenced standards within this section.
2.1.1 Materials
Ensure rubber is natural rubber and elastomer is chloroprene. Shore A

durometer measurement of both materials and range between 40 and 60.
Inorganic materials such as precompressed, high-density, fibrous glass

encased in a resilient moisture-impervious membrane may be used in lieu of
specified natural rubber and elastomers. Where this substitution is made,
SECTION 23 05 48.00 40 Page 2

ensure specified deflections are modified by the manufacturing source to

accommodate physical characteristics of inorganic materials and to provide
equal or better vibration isolation.
Ensure weather-exposed metal vibration-isolator parts are corrosion

protected. Chloroprene coat springs.
2.1.2 Mountings
Provide the following mountings:
Type B: Double rubber-in-shear with molded-in steel reinforcement in

top and bottom. Maximum deflections up to 0.50 inch are allowed.
Type C: Free-standing laterally stable open-spring type for

deflections over 0.50 inch, with built-in bearing and leveling
provisions, 0.25-inch thick Type A base elastomer pads, and
accessories. Ensure outside diameter of each spring is equal to or
greater than 0.9 times the operating height of the spring under rated
load.
Type D: Partially housed type, containing one or more vertically

restrained springs with at least 0.50 inch clearance maintained around
springs, with adjustable limit stops, 0.25-inch thick Type A base
elastomer pads, and accessories.
Type F: Combination spring and rubber-in-shear steel framed for

hanger-rod mounting, with minimum total static deflection of 1 inch.
2.1.3 Bases
Provide the following bases:
Type U: Unit isolators without rails, structural-steel bases, or

inertia blocks.
Type R: Rails, connected mill-rolled structural steel, of sufficient

dimension to preclude deflection at midpoint of unsupported span in
excess of 1/1,440th of the span between isolators, power transmission,
component misalignment, and any overhung weight. Where Type R bases
are specified and the equipment proposed requires additional base
support, use a Type S base.
Type S: Structural-steel bases common to a supported assembly, made

from welded-joint mill-rolled structural steel with closed-perimeter
configuration, isolators attached to outrigger supports.
Ensure height of steel members is sufficient to provide stiffness

required to maintain equipment manufacturer's recommended alignment and
duty efficiency of power-transmission components. Ensure height of
steel member does not result in member deflection at midpoint of
unsupported span of more than 1/1,440th of the span between isolators.
Minimum height is 5 inches.
Type CIB: Provide concrete inertia blocks common to the entire

assembly, with welded-joint construction, mill-rolled structural-steel
perimeters, welded-in No. 4 reinforcing bars 8 inches on center each
way near the bottom of the block, outrigger-isolator mounting
provisions, anchor bolts, and be filled with 3,000 psi cured-strength
SECTION 23 05 48.00 40 Page 3

concrete.
2.2 VIBRATION-ISOLATION SYSTEMS APPLICATION
Vibration isolation design per NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS.
2.2.1 Centrifugal Pump Locations
ON\ABOVE ON\ABOVE ON\ABOVE

GRADE GRADE GRADE
BASEMENT 20-FOOT 30-FOOT 40-FOOT
TYPE BELOW-GRADE FLOOR-SPAN FLOOR-SPAN FLOOR-SPAN
EQUIPMENT PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS*
Close-
couple
through
5 hp None -R-0.35 C-S-1.0 C-S-1.0
Bedplate-
mounted
through
5 hp None C-CIB-1.0 C-CIB-1.5 C-CIB-1.75
7-1/2 hp None C-CIB-1.0 C-CIB-1.75 C-CIB-2.5
*TYPE OF MOUNTING, BASE, AND MINIMUM DEFLECTION IN INCHES
2.2.2 Air-Cooled Condensing Unit Locations
20-FOOT 30-FOOT 40-FOOT

ROOF-SPAN ROOF-SPAN ROOF-SPAN
TYPE EQUIPMENT PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS*
Through 5 hp
over 900 rpm B-U-0.5 D-U-1.0 D-U-1.75
Over 5 hp
to 500 rpm B-U-0.5 D-U-1.75 D-U-2.5
500 rpm and over B-U-0.5 D-U-1.0 D-U-1.75
2.2.3 Low-Pressure Suspended Air-Handling Unit (AHU) Locations
Vibration-isolation provisions apply to ceiling-suspended Air Moving and

Conditioning Association Class A packaged central-station units.

Through 5 hp F-U-1.0 F-U-1.0 F-U-1.0
7-1/2 hp and over

250 to 500 rpm F-U-1.75 F-U-1.75 F-U-1.75
SECTION 23 05 48.00 40 Page 4


500 rpm and over F-U-1.0 F-U-1.25 F-U-1.55
2.2.4 Low-Pressure AHU Locations
Vibration-isolation provisions apply to floor-mounted Air Moving and

Conditioning Association Class A packaged central-station units.

GRADE GRADE GRADE
Through
5 hp B-U-0.35 C-U-1.0 C-U-1.0 C-U-1.0
7-1/2 hp
and over
250 to
500 rpm B-U-0.35 C-U-1.75 C-U-1.75 C-U-1.75
500 rpm B-U-0.35 C-U-1.0 C-U-1.5
2.2.5 Centrifugal Pump Locations

GRADE GRADE GRADE
Close-
couple
through
5 hp None -R-0.35 C-S-1.0 C-S-1.0
Bedplate-
mounted
through
5 hp None C-CIB-1.0 C-CIB-1.5 C-CIB-1.75
7-1/2 hp None C-CIB-1.0 C-CIB-1.75 C-CIB-2.5
2.3 PIPE AND DUCT VIBRATION ISOLATION
Type G: Provide isolators with in-series contained steel springs and

preformed fibrous-glass or chloroprene-elastomer elements for
connecting to building-structure attachments. Load devices by
supported system during operating conditions to produce a minimum
SECTION 23 05 48.00 40 Page 5

spring and elastomer static deflection of 1 inch and 3/8 inch,

respectively.
2.3.1 Vertical Piping
Type L: Provide isolators which are pipe base-support devices with one
or more contained steel springs. Load devices by supported system
during operating conditions to produce a minimum static deflection of 1
inch. Equip devices with precompression and vertical-limit features,
as well as a minimum 1/4-inch thick elastomer sound pad and isolation
washers, for mounting to floor.
Type M: Provide isolators which are elastomer mounted baseplate and

riser pipe-guide devices, with contained double acting elastomer
elements which under rated load have a minimum static deflection of 3/8
inch. Size isolator to accommodate thermal insulation within the
stationary guide ring.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Ensure rails and structural steel bases are raised not less than 1 inch
above the floor and are level when equipment supported is under operating
load.
Ensure vibration-isolation installation and deflection testing after

equipment start-up is directed by a competent representative of the
manufacturer.
3.2 TESTS AND REPORTS
Ensure vibration-isolation devices are deflection tested. Submit test

reports in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Submittals," substantiating
that all equipment has been isolated as specified and that minimum
specified deflections have been met. Make all measurements in the presence
of the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 23 05 48.00 40 Page 6

SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

08/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASA S1.11 (2004; Errata 2005; R 2009) Specification

for Octave- Band and
Fractional-Octave-Band Analog and Digital
Filters (ASA 65)
ASA S1.4 (1983; Amendment 1985; R 2006)

Specification for Sound Level Meters (ASA
47)
AMCA 203 (1990; R 2011) Field Performance

Measurements of Fan Systems

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE HVAC APP IP HDBK (2011) HVAC Applications Handbook, I-P

Edition
ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL (AABC)
AABC MN-1 (2002; 6th ed) National Standards for

Total System Balance
AABC MN-4 (1996) Test and Balance Procedures
NEBB MASV (2006) Procedural Standards for

Measurements and Assessment of Sound and
Vibration
NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS (2005) Procedural Standards for TAB

(Testing, Adjusting and Balancing)
Environmental Systems

(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1780 (2002) HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting

and Balancing, 3rd Edition
SMACNA 1858 (2004) HVAC Sound And Vibration Manual -

First Edition
SMACNA 1972 CD (2012) HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual -

2nd Edition
1.2 DEFINITIONS
a. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
b. COTR: Contracting Officer's Technical Representative.
c. DALT: Duct air leakage test
d. DALT'd: Duct air leakage tested
e. HVAC: Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning; or heating,

ventilating, and cooling.
f. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau
g. Out-of-tolerance data: Pertains only to field acceptance testing of

Final DALT or TAB report. When applied to DALT work, this phase means
"a leakage rate measured during DALT field acceptance testing which
exceeds the leakage rate allowed by Appendix D REQUIREMENTS FOR DUCT
AIR LEAK TESTING." When applied to TAB work this phase means "a
measurement taken during TAB field acceptance testing which does not
fall within the range of plus 5 to minus 5 percent of the original
measurement reported on the TAB Report for a specific parameter."
h. Season of maximum heating load: The time of year when the outdoor
temperature at the project site remains within plus or minus 30 degrees
Fahrenheit of the project site's winter outdoor design temperature,
throughout the period of TAB data recording.
i. Season of maximum cooling load: The time of year when the outdoor
temperature at the project site remains within plus or minus 5 degrees
Fahrenheit of the project site's summer outdoor design temperature,
throughout the period of TAB data recording.
j. Season 1, Season 2: Depending upon when the project HVAC is completed

and ready for TAB, Season 1 is defined, thereby defining Season 2.
Season 1 could be the season of maximum heating load, or the season of
maximum cooling load.
k. Sound measurements terminology: Defined in AABC MN-1, NEBB MASV, or

SMACNA 1858 (TABB).
l. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing (of HVAC systems).
m. TAB'd: HVAC Testing/Adjusting/Balancing procedures performed.
n. TAB Agency: TAB Firm
o. TAB team field leader: TAB team field leader
p. TAB team supervisor: TAB team engineer.
q. TAB team technicians: TAB team assistants.
r. TABB: Testing Adjusting and Balancing Bureau.
1.2.1 Similar Terms
In some instances, terminology differs between the Contract and the TAB
Standard primarily because the intent of this Section is to use the
industry standards specified, along with additional requirements listed
herein to produce optimal results.
The following table of similar terms is provided for clarification only.

Contract requirements take precedent over the corresponding AABC, NEBB, or
TABB requirements where differences exist.
SIMILAR TERMS
Contract Term AABC Term NEBB Term TABB Term
TAB Standard National Procedural International

Standards for Standards for Standards for
Testing and Testing, Environmental
Balancing Adjusting and Systems Balance
Heating, Balancing of
Ventilating, and Environmental
Air Conditioning Systems
Systems
TAB Specialist TAB Engineer TAB Supervisor TAB Supervisor
Systems Readiness Construction Field Readiness Field Readiness

Check Phase Inspection Check & Check & Prelim.
Preliminary Field Field Procedures
Procedures
1.3 WORK DESCRIPTION
The work includes duct air leakage testing (DALT) and testing, adjusting,
and balancing (TAB) of newheating, ventilating, and cooling (HVAC) air
distribution systems including ducts, and piping which are located within,
on, under, between, and adjacent to buildings.
Perform TAB in accordance with the requirements of the TAB procedural

standard recommended by the TAB trade association that approved the TAB
Firm's qualifications. Comply with requirements of AABC MN-1,
NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, or SMACNA 1780 (TABB) as supplemented and
modified by this specification section. All recommendations and suggested
practices contained in the TAB procedural standards are considered
mandatory.
Conduct DALT and TAB of the indicated existing systems and equipment and
submit the specified DALT and TAB reports for approval. Conduct DALT
testing in compliance with the requirements specified in SMACNA 1972 CD,
except as supplemented and modified by this section. Conduct DALT and TAB
work in accordance with the requirements of this section.
1.3.1 Air Distribution Systems
Test, adjust, and balance systems (TAB) in compliance with this section.
Obtain Contracting Officer's written approval before applying insulation to

exterior of air distribution systems as specified under Section 23 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
1.3.2 Water Distribution Systems
TAB systems in compliance with this section. Obtain Contracting Officer's

written approval before applying insulation to water distribution systems
as specified under Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL
SYSTEMS. At Contractor's option and with Contracting Officer's written
approval, the piping systems may be insulated before systems are TAB'd.
Terminate piping insulation immediately adjacent to each flow control

valve, automatic control valve, or device. Seal the ends of pipe
insulation and the space between ends of pipe insulation and piping, with
waterproof vapor barrier coating.
After completion of work under this section, insulate the flow control
valves and devices as specified under Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION
FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
1.3.3 TAB SCHEMATIC DRAWINGS
Show the following information on TAB Schematic Drawings:
1. A unique number or mark for each piece of equipment or terminal.
2. Air quantities at air terminals.
3. Air quantities and temperatures in air handling unit schedules.
4. Water quantities and temperatures in thermal energy transfer equipment

schedules.
5. Water quantities and heads in pump schedules.
6. Water flow measurement fittings and balancing fittings.
7. Ductwork Construction and Leakage Testing Table that defines the DALT
test requirements, including each applicable HVAC duct system ID or
mark, duct pressure class, duct seal class, and duct leakage test
pressure. This table is included in the file for Graphics for Unified
Facilities Guide Specifications:
http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/NAVGRAPH/graphtoc.pdf
The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Specialist must review the
Contract Plans and Specifications and advise the Contracting Officer of any
deficiencies that would prevent the effective and accurate TAB of the
system. The TAB Specialist must provide a Design Review Report
individually listing each deficiency and the corresponding proposed
corrective action necessary for proper system operation.
1.3.4 Related Requirements
Requirements for price breakdown of HVAC TAB work are specified in Section
01 20 00.00 20 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES.
Requirements for construction scheduling related to HVAC TAB work are

specified in Section 01 32 17.00 20 NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULES (NAS).
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Tab Firm; G
Designation of TAB team assistants; G
Designation of TAB team engineer; G
Designation of TAB team field leader; G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Report Forms; G
SD-06 Test Reports
DALT and TAB Work Execution Schedule; G
DALT and TAB Procedures Summary; G
Design review report; G
Pre-Final DALT report; G
Final DALT report; G
TAB report for Season 1; G
TAB report for Season 2; G
SD-07 Certificates
Independent TAB agency and personnel qualifications; G
Advance notice of Pre-Final DALT field work; G
Completed Pre-Final DALT Work Checklist; G
Advance Notice of Season 1 TAB Field Work; G
Completed Season 1 Pre-TAB Work Checklist
Advance Notice of Season 2 TAB Field Work; G
Completed Season 2 Pre-TAB Work Checklist
TAB Firm; G
Independent TAB Agency and Personnel Qualifications; G
DALT and TAB Submittal and Work Schedule; G
Design review report; G
1.5.1 Independent TAB Agency and Personnel Qualifications
To secure approval for the proposed agency, submit information certifying

that the TAB agency is a first tier subcontractor who is not affiliated
with any other company participating in work on this contract, including
design, furnishing equipment, or construction. Further, submit the
following, for the agency, to Contracting Officer for approval:
a. Independent AABC or NEBB or TABB TAB agency:
TAB agency: AABC registration number and expiration date of current

certification; or NEBB certification number and expiration date of
current certification; or TABB certification number and expiration
date of current certification.
TAB team supervisor: Name and copy of AABC or NEBB or TABB TAB
supervisor certificate and expiration date of current
certification.
TAB team field leader: Name and documented evidence that the team
field leader has satisfactorily performed full-time supervision of
TAB work in the field for not less than 3 years immediately
preceding this contract's bid opening date.
TAB team field technicians: Names and documented evidence that each
field technician has satisfactorily assisted a TAB team field
leader in performance of TAB work in the field for not less than
one year immediately preceding this contract's bid opening date.
Current certificates: Registrations and certifications are current,

and valid for the duration of this contract. Renew Certifications
which expire prior to completion of the TAB work, in a timely
manner so that there is no lapse in registration or
certification. TAB agency or TAB team personnel without a current
registration or current certification are not to perform TAB work
on this contract.
b. TAB Team Members: TAB team approved to accomplish work on this

contract are full-time employees of the TAB agency. No other personnel
is allowed to do TAB work on this contract.
c. Replacement of TAB team members: Replacement of members may occur if

each new member complies with the applicable personnel qualifications
and each is approved by the Contracting Officer.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
1.6.1 DALT and TAB Submittal and Work Schedule
Comply with additional requirements specified in Appendix C: DALT AND TAB

SUBMITTAL AND WORK SCHEDULE included at the end of this section
1.6.2 Projects with Phased Construction
This specification section is structured as though the HVAC construction,

and thereby the TAB work, will be completed in a single phase. When the
construction is completed in phases, the DALT work and TAB work must be
planned, completed, and accepted for each construction phase.
1.6.2.1 Phasing of Work
This specification section is structured as though the HVAC construction,

and thereby the TAB work, is going to be completed in a single phase in
spite of the fact that there will be two seasons. All elements of the TAB
work are addressed on this premise. When a contract is to be completed in
construction phases, including the TAB work, and the DALT work, the TAB
work and DALT work must be planned for, completed and approved by the
Contracting Officer with each phase. An example of this case would be one
contract that requires the rehabilitation of the HVAC in each of several
separated buildings. At the completion of the final phase, compile all
approved reports and submit as one document.
1.7 SUBCONTRACTOR SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
Perform all work in this section in accordance with the paragraph entitled
"Subcontractor Special Requirements" in Section 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE
REQUIREMENTS, stating that all contract requirements of this section must
be accomplished directly by a first tier subcontractor. No work may be
performed by a second tier subcontractor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 WORK DESCRIPTIONS OF PARTICIPANTS
Comply with requirements of this section as specified in Appendix A WORK

DESCRIPTIONS OF PARTICIPANTS.
3.2 PRE-DALT/TAB MEETING
Meet with the Contracting Officer's technical representative (COTR)to

develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of the DALT work and
TAB work requirements. Ensure that the TAB supervisor is present at this
meeting. Requirements to be discussed include required submittals, work
schedule, and field quality control.
3.3 DALT PROCEDURES
3.3.1 Instruments, Consumables and Personnel
Provide instruments, consumables and personnel required to accomplish the

DALT field work. Follow the same basic procedure specified below for TAB
Field Work, including maintenance and calibration of instruments, accuracy
of measurements, preliminary procedures, field work, workmanship and
treatment of deficiencies. Calibrate and maintain instruments in
accordance with manufacturer's written procedures.
3.3.2 Advance Notice of Pre-Final DALT Field Work
On completion of the installation of each duct system indicated to be

DALT'd, notify the Contracting Officer in writing prior to the COTR's duct
selection field visit.
3.3.3 Ductwork To Be DALT'd
From each duct system indicated as subject to DALT, the COTR will randomly
select sections of each completed duct system for testing by the
Contractor's TAB Firm. The sections selected will not exceed 20 percent of
the total measured linear footage of duct systems indicated as subject to
DALT. Sections of duct systems subject to DALT will include 20 percent of
main ducts, branch main ducts, branch ducts and plenums for supply, return,
exhaust, and plenum ductwork.
It is acceptable for an entire duct system to be DALT'd instead of

disassembling that system in order to DALT only the 20 percent portion
specified above.
3.3.4 DALT Testing
Perform DALT on the HVAC duct sections of each system as selected by the
COTR. Use the duct class, seal class, leakage class and the leak test
pressure data indicated on the drawings, to comply with the procedures
specified in SMACNA 1972 CD.
In spite of specifications of SMACNA 1972 CD to the contrary, DALT ductwork

of construction class of 3-inch water gauge static pressure and below if
indicated to be DALT'd. Complete DALT work on the COTR selected ductwork
within 48 hours after the particular ductwork was selected for DALT.
Separately conduct DALT work for large duct systems to enable the DALT work
to be completed in 48 hours.
3.3.5 Pre-final DALT Report
After completion of the DALT work, prepare a Pre-final DALT Report meeting
the additional requirements specified in Appendix B REPORTS - DALT and
TAB. Data required by those data report forms shall be furnished by the
TAB team. Prepare the report neatly and legibly; the Pre-final DALT report
shall provide the basis for the Final DALT Report.
TAB supervisor shall review, approve and sign the Pre-Final DALT Report and
submit this report within one day of completion of DALT field work.
Verbally notify the COTR that the field check of the Pre-Final DALT Report
data can commence.
3.3.6 Quality Assurance - COTR DALT Field Acceptance Testing
In the presence of the COTR and TAB team field leader, verify for accuracy
Pre-final DALT Report data selected by the COTR. For each duct system,
this acceptance testing shall be conducted on a maximum of 50 percent of
the duct sections DALT'd.
Further, if any data on the Pre-final DALT report form for a given duct
section is out-of-tolerance, then field acceptance testing shall be
conducted on data for one additional duct section, preferably in the same
duct system, in the presence of the COTR.
3.3.7 Additional COTR Field Acceptance Testing
If any of the duct sections checked for a given system are determined to
have a leakage rate measured that exceeds the leakage rate allowed by
SMACNA Leak Test Manual for an indicated duct construction class and
sealant class, terminate data checking for that section. The associated
Pre-final DALT Report data for the given duct system will be disapproved.
Make the necessary corrections and prepare a revised Pre-final DALT
Report. Reschedule a field check of the revised report data with the COTR.
3.3.8 Certified Final DALT Report
On successful completion of all field checks of the Pre-Final DALT Report

data for all systems, the TAB Supervisor shall assemble, review, approve,
sign and submit the Final DALT Report in compliance with Appendix B
REPORTS - DALT and TAB to the Contracting Officer for approval.
3.3.9 Prerequisite for TAB Field Work
Do not commence TAB field work prior to the completion and approval, for
all systems, of the Final DALT Report.
3.4 TAB PROCEDURES
3.4.1 TAB Field Work
Test, adjust, and balance the HVAC systems until measured flow rates (air
and water flow) are within plus or minus 5 percent of the design flow rates
as specified or indicated on the contract documents.
That is, comply with the the requirements of AABC MN-1 , or SMACNA 1780
(TABB) and SMACNA 1858 (TABB),except as supplemented and modified by this
section.
Provide instruments and consumables required to accomplish the TAB work.

Calibrate and maintain instruments in accordance with manufacturer's
written procedures.
Test, adjust, and balance the HVAC systems until measured flow rates (air
and water flow) are within plus or minus 5 percent of the design flow rates
as specified or indicated on the contract documents. Conduct TAB work,
including measurement accuracy, and sound measurement work in conformance
with the AABC MN-1 and AABC MN-4, or NEBB TABES and NEBB MASV, or SMACNA
1780 (used by TABB) and SMACNA 1858 sound measurement procedures, except
as supplemented and modified by this section. The only water flow and air
flow reporting which can be deferred until the Season 2 is that data which
would be affected in terms of accuracy due to outside ambient conditions.
3.4.2 Preliminary Procedures
Use the approved pre-field engineering report as instructions and

procedures for accomplishing TAB field work. TAB engineer is to locate, in
the field, test ports required for testing. It is the responsibility of
the sheet metal contractor to provide and install test ports as required by
the TAB engineer.
3.4.3 TAB Air Distribution Systems
3.4.3.1 Units With Coils
Report heating and cooling performance capacity tests for gas fired heat
exchangers and DX coils for the purpose of verifying that the coils meet
the indicated design capacity. Submit the following data and calculations
with the coil test reports:
a. For air handlers with capacities greater than 7.5 tons (90,000 Btu)
cooling, such as factory manufactured units, central built-up units and
rooftop units, conduct capacity tests in accordance with AABC MN-4,
procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing."
Do not determine entering and leaving wet and dry bulb temperatures by
single point measurement, but by the average of multiple readings in
compliance with paragraph 3.5-5, "Procedures", (in subparagraph d.) of
AABC MN-4, Procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing."
Submit part-load coil performance data from the coil manufacturer

converting test conditions to design conditions; use the data for the
purpose of verifying that the coils meet the indicated design capacity
in compliance with AABC MN-4, Procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing,"
paragraph 3.5.7, "Actual Capacity Vs. Design Capacity" (in subparagraph
c.).
b. For units with capacities of 7.5 tons (90,000 Btu) or less, such as fan
coil units, duct mounted reheat coils associated with VAV terminal
units, and unitary units, such as through-the-wall heat pumps:
Determine the apparent coil capacity by calculations using single point

measurement of entering and leaving wet and dry bulb temperatures;
submit the calculations with the coil reports.
3.4.3.2 Air Handling Units
Air handling unit systems including fans (air handling unit fans, exhaust
fans and winter ventilation fans), coils, ducts, plenums, mixing boxes,
terminal units, variable air volume boxes, and air distribution devices for
supply air, return air, outside air, mixed air relief air, and makeup air.
3.4.3.3 Rooftop Air Conditioning
Rooftop air conditioning systems including fans, coils, ducts, plenums, and
air distribution devices for supply air, return air, and outside air.
For refrigeration compressors/condensers/condensing units/evaporators,

report data as required by NEBB, AABC, and TABB standard procedures,
including refrigeration operational data.
3.4.3.4 Heating and Ventilating Units
Heating and ventilating unit systems including fans, coils, ducts, plenums,
roof vents, registers, diffusers, grilles, and louvers for supply air,
return air, outside air, and mixed air.
3.4.3.5 Makeup Air Units
Makeup air unit systems including fans, coils, ducts, plenums, registers,
diffusers, grilles, and louvers for supply air, return air, outside air,
and mixed air.
3.4.3.6 Fan Coils
Fan coil unit systems including fans, coils, ducts, plenums, and air
distribution devices for supply air, return air, and outside air.
3.4.3.7 Exhaust Fans
Exhaust fan systems including fans, ducts, plenums, grilles, and hoods for
exhaust air.
3.4.4 Sound Measurement Work
3.4.4.1 Areas To Be Sound Measured
In the following spaces, measure and record the sound power level for each
octave band listed in ASHRAE HVAC APP IP HDBK Noise Criteria:
a. All HVAC mechanical rooms, including machinery spaces and other spaces
containing HVAC power drivers and power driven equipment.
b. All spaces sharing a common barrier with each mechanical room,

including rooms overhead, rooms on the other side of side walls, and
rooms beneath the mechanical room floor.
c. RTU System: Rooms: Indoor Shooting Ranges
3.4.4.2 Procedure
Measure sound levels in each room, when unoccupied except for the TAB team,
with all HVAC systems that would cause sound readings in the room operating
in their noisiest mode. Record the sound level in each octave band.
Attempt to mitigate the sound level and bring the level to within the
specified ASHRAE HVAC APP IP HDBK noise criteria goals, if such mitigation
is within the TAB team's control. State in the report the
ASHRAE HVAC APP IP HDBK noise criteria goals. If sound level cannot be
brought into compliance, provide written notice of the deficiency to the
Contractor for resolution or correction.
3.4.4.3 Timing
Measure sound levels at times prescribed by AABC or NEBB or TABB.
3.4.4.4 Meters
Measure sound levels with a sound meter complying with ASA S1.4, Type 1 or
2, and an octave band filter set complying with ASA S1.11. Use measurement
methods for overall sound levels and for octave band sound levels as
prescribed by NEBB.
3.4.4.5 Calibration
Calibrate sound levels as prescribed by AABC or NEBB or TABB, except that

calibrators emitting a sound pressure level tone of 94 dB at 1000 hertz
(Hz) are also acceptable.
3.4.4.6 Background Noise Correction
Determine background noise component of room sound (noise) levels for each
(of eight) octave bands as prescribed by AABC or NEBB or TABB.
3.4.5 TAB Work on Performance Tests With Seasonal Limitations
3.4.5.1 Performance Tests
Accomplish proportionate balancing TAB work on the air distribution systems

and water distribution systems, in other words, accomplish adjusting and
balancing of the air flows and water flows, any time during the duration of
this contract, subject to the limitations specified elsewhere in this
section. However, accomplish, within the following seasonal limitations,
TAB work on HVAC systems which directly transfer thermal energy.
3.4.5.2 Season Of Maximum Load
Visit the contract site for at least two TAB work sessions for TAB field
measurements. Visit the contract site during the season of maximum heating
load and visit the contract site during the season of maximum cooling load,
the goal being to TAB the operational performance of the heating systems and
cooling systems under their respective maximum outdoor environment-caused
loading. During the seasonal limitations, TAB the operational performance
of the heating systems and cooling systems.
3.4.5.3 Ambient Temperatures
On each tab report form used for recording data, record the outdoor and
indoor ambient dry bulb temperature range and the outdoor and indoor
ambient wet bulb temperature range within which the report form's data was
recorded. Record these temperatures at beginning and at the end of data
taking.
3.4.5.4 Sound Measurements
Comply with paragraph entitled "Sound Measurement Work," specifically, the

requirement that a room must be operating in its noisiest mode at the time
of sound measurements in the room. The maximum noise level measurements
could depend on seasonally related heat or cooling transfer equipment.
3.4.6 Workmanship
Conduct TAB work on the HVAC systems until measured flow rates are within
plus or minus 5 percent of the design flow rates as specified or indicated
on the contract documents. This TAB work includes adjustment of balancing
valves, balancing dampers, and sheaves. Further, this TAB work includes
changing out fan sheaves and pump impellers if required to obtain air and
water flow rates specified or indicated. If, with these adjustments and
equipment changes, the specified or indicated design flow rates cannot be
attained, contact the Contracting Officer for direction.
3.4.7 Deficiencies
Strive to meet the intent of this section to maximize the performance of

the equipment as designed and installed. However, if deficiencies in
equipment design or installation prevent TAB work from being accomplished
within the range of design values specified in the paragraph entitled
"Workmanship," provide written notice as soon as possible to the Contractor
and the Contracting Officer describing the deficiency and recommended

correction.
Responsibility for correction of installation deficiencies is the

Contractor's. If a deficiency is in equipment design, call the TAB team
supervisor for technical assistance. Responsibility for reporting design
deficiencies to Contractor is the TAB team supervisor's.
3.4.8 TAB Reports
Additional requirements for TAB Reports are specified in Appendix B

REPORTS - DALT and TAB
3.4.9 Quality Assurance - COTR TAB Field Acceptance Testing
3.4.9.1 TAB Field Acceptance Testing
During the field acceptance testing, verify, in the presence of the COTR,
random selections of data (water, air quantities, air motion, sound level
readings) recorded in the TAB Report. Points and areas for field
acceptance testing are to be selected by the COTR. Measurement and test
procedures are the same as approved for TAB work for the TAB Report.
Field acceptance testing includes verification of TAB Report data recorded

for the following equipment groups:
Group 1: All air handling units (rooftop and single zone).
Group 2: 25 percent of the VRF fan coils and associated diffusers and
registers.
Group 3: 25 percent of the supply diffusers, registers, grilles associated

with constant volume air handling units.
Group 4: 25 percent of the return grilles, return registers, exhaust

grilles and exhaust registers.
Group 5: 25 percent of the supply fans, exhaust fans, and pumps.
Further, if any data on the TAB Report for Groups 2 through 5 is found not
to fall within the range of plus 5 to minus 5 percent of the TAB Report
data, additional group data verification is required in the presence of the
COTR. Verify TAB Report data for one additional piece of equipment in
that group. Continue this additional group data verification until
out-of-tolerance data ceases to be found.
3.4.9.2 Additional COTR TAB Field Acceptance Testing
If any of the acceptance testing measurements for a given equipment group

is found not to fall within the range of plus 5 to minus 5 percent of the
TAB Report data, terminate data verification for all affected data for that
group. The affected data for the given group will be disapproved. Make
the necessary corrections and prepare a revised TAB Report. Reschedule
acceptance testing of the revised report data with the COTR.
3.4.9.3 Prerequisite for Approval
Compliance with the field acceptance testing requirements of this section

is a prerequisite for the final Contracting Officer approval of the TAB
Report submitted.
3.5 MARKING OF SETTINGS
Upon the final TAB work approval, permanently mark the settings of HVAC
adjustment devices including valves, gauges, splitters, and dampers so that
adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. Provide permanent
markings clearly indicating the settings on the adjustment devices which
result in the data reported on the submitted TAB report.
3.6 MARKING OF TEST PORTS
The TAB team is to permanently and legibly mark and identify the location
points of the duct test ports. If the ducts have exterior insulation, make
these markings on the exterior side of the duct insulation. Show the
location of test ports on the as-built mechanical drawings with dimensions
given where the test port is covered by exterior insulation.
3.7 APPENDICES
Appendix A WORK DESCRIPTIONS OF PARTICIPANTS

Appendix B REPORTS - DALT and TAB
Appendix C DALT AND TAB SUBMITTAL AND WORK SCHEDULE
Appendix D REQUIREMENTS FOR DUCT AIR LEAK TESTING
Appendix A
WORK DESCRIPTIONS OF PARTICIPANTS
The Contractor is responsible for ensuring compliance with all requirements

of this specification section. However, the following delineation of
specific work items is provided to facilitate and co-ordinate execution of
the various work efforts by personnel from separate organizations.
1. Contractor
a. HVAC documentation: Provide pertinent contract documentation to the

TAB Firm, to include the following: the contract drawings and
specifications; copies of the approved submittal data for all HVAC
equipment, air distribution devices, and air/water measuring/balancing
devices; the construction work schedule; and other applicable documents
requested by the TAB Firm. Provide the TAB Firm copies of contract
revisions and modifications as they occur.
b. Schedules: Ensure the requirements specified under the paragraph "DALT

and TAB Schedule" are met.
c. Pre-DALT and TAB meeting: Arrange and conduct the Pre-DALT and TAB
meeting. Ensure that a representative is present for the sheet metal
contractor, the mechanical contractor, the electrical contractor, and
the automatic temperature controls contractor.
d. Coordinate Support: Provide and coordinate support personnel required

by the TAB Firm in order to accomplish the DALT and TAB field work.
Support personnel may include factory representatives, HVAC controls
installers, HVAC equipment mechanics, sheet metal workers, pipe
fitters, and insulators. Ensure support personnel are present at the
work site at the times required.
e. Correct Deficiencies: Ensure the notifications of Construction

Deficiencies are provided as specified herein. Refer to the paragraph
entitled "Construction Deficiencies." Correct each deficiency as soon
as practical with the Contracting Officer, and submit revised schedules
and other required documentation.
f. Pre-TAB Work Checklists: Complete check out and debugging of HVAC

equipment, ducts, and controls prior to the TAB engineer arriving at
the project site to begin the TAB work. Debugging includes searching
for and eliminating malfunctioning elements in the HVAC system
installations, and verifying all adjustable devices are functioning as
designed. Include as pre-TAB work checklist items, the deficiencies
pointed out by the TAB team supervisor in the design review report.
Prior to the TAB field team's arrival, ensure completion of the applicable
inspections and work items listed in the TAB team supervisor's DALT and
TAB Work Procedures Summary. Do not allow the TAB team to commence TAB
field work until all of the following are completed.
g. Give Notice of Testing: Submit advance notice of TAB field work

accompanied by completed prerequisite HVAC Work List
h. Insulation work: Ensure that no insulation is shall not be installed

on ducts to be DALT'd until DALT work on the subject ducts is complete.
Ensure the duct and piping systems are properly insulated and vapor
sealed upon the successful completion and acceptance of the DALT and
TAB work.
2. TAB Team Supervisor
a. Overall management: Supervise and manage the overall TAB team work
effort, including preliminary and technical DALT and TAB procedures and
TAB team field work.
b. Schedule: Ensure the requirements specified under the paragraph "DALT

and TAB Schedule" are met.
c. Submittals: Provide the submittals specified herein.
d. Pre-DALT/TAB meeting: Attend meeting with Contractor. Ensure TAB

personnel that will be involved in the TAB work under this contract
attend the meeting.
e. Design Review Report: Submit typed report describing omissions and

deficiencies in the HVAC system's design that would preclude the TAB
team from accomplishing the duct leakage testing work and the TAB work
requirements of this section. Provide a complete explanation including
supporting documentation detailing the design deficiency. State that
no deficiencies are evident if that is the case.
f. Support required: Specify the technical support personnel required

from the Contractor other than the TAB agency; such as factory
representatives for temperature controls or for complex equipment.
Inform the Contractor in writing of the support personnel needed and
when they are needed. Furnish the notice as soon as the need is
anticipated, either with the design review report, or the DALT and TAB
Procedures Summary, the during the DALT or TAB field work.
Ensure the Contractor is properly notified and aware of all support

personnel needed to perform the TAB work. Maintain communication with
the Contractor regarding support personnel throughout the duration of
the TAB field work, including the TAB field acceptance testing checking.
Ensure all inspections and verifications for the Pre-Final DALT and
Pre-TAB Checklists are completely and successfully conducted before
DALT and TAB field work is performed.
g. Advance Notice: Monitor the completion of the duct system

installations and provide the Advance Notice for Pre-Final DALT field
work as specified herein.
h. Technical Assistance: Provide technical assistance to the DALT and TAB

field work.
i. Deficiencies Notification: Ensure the notifications of Construction

Deficiencies are provided as specified herein. Comply with
requirements of the paragraph entitled "Construction Deficiencies."
Resolve each deficiency as soon as practical and submit revised
schedules and other required documentation.
j. Procedures: Develop the required TAB procedures for systems or system

components not covered in the TAB Standard.
3. TAB Team Field Leader
a. Field manager: Manage, in the field, the accomplishment of the work

specified in Part 3, "Execution."
b. Full time: Be present at the contract site when DALT field work or TAB
field work is being performed by the TAB team; ensure day-to-day TAB
team work accomplishments are in compliance with this section.
c. Prerequisite HVAC work: Do not bring the TAB team to the contract site
until a copy of the prerequisite HVAC work list, with all work items
certified by the Contractor to be working as designed, reaches the
office of the TAB Agency.
Appendix B
REPORTS - DALT and TAB
All submitted documentation must be typed, neat, and organized. All

reports must have a waterproof front and back cover, a title page, a
certification page, sequentially numbered pages throughout, and a table of
contents. Tables, lists, and diagrams must be titled. Generate and submit
for approval the following documentation:
1. DALT and TAB Work Execution Schedule
Submit a detailed schedule indicating the anticipated calendar date for

each submittal and each portion of work required under this section. For
each work entry, indicate the support personnel (such as controls provider,
HVAC mechanic, etc.) that are needed to accomplish the work. Arrange
schedule entries chronologically.
2. DALT and TAB Procedures Summary
Submit a detailed narrative describing all aspects of the DALT and TAB
field work to be performed. Clearly distinguish between DALT information
and TAB information. Include the following:
a. A list of the intended procedural steps for the DALT and TAB field work
from start to finish. Indicate how each type of data measurement will
be obtained. Include what Contractor support personnel are required
for each step, and the tasks they need to perform.
b. A list of the project's submittals that are needed by the TAB Firm in
order to meet this Contract's requirements.
c. The schematic drawings to be used in the required reports, which may

include building floor plans, mechanical room plans, duct system plans,
and equipment elevations. Indicate intended TAB measurement locations,
including where test ports need to be provided by the Contractor.
d. The data presentation forms to be used in the report, with the

preliminary information and initial design values filled in.
e. A list of DALT and TAB instruments to be used, edited for this project,
to include the instrument name and description, manufacturer, model
number, scale range, published accuracy, most recent calibration date,
and what the instrument will be used for on this project.
f. A thorough checklist of the work items and inspections that need to be

accomplished before DALT field work can be performed. The Contractor
must complete, submit, and receive approval of the Completed Pre-Final
DALT Work Checklist before DALT field work can be accomplished.
g. A thorough checklist of the work items and inspections that need to be

accomplished before the Season 1 TAB field work can be performed. The
Contractor must complete, submit, and receive approval of the Completed
Season 1 Pre-TAB Work Checklist before the Season 1 TAB field work can
be accomplished.
h. A thorough checklist of the work items and inspections that need to be
accomplished before the Season 2 TAB field work can be performed. The
Contractor must complete, submit, and receive approval of the Completed
Season 2 Pre-TAB Work Checklist before the Season 2 TAB field work can
be accomplished.
i. The checklists specified above shall be individually developed and

tailored specifically for the work under this contract. Refer to
NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, Section III, "Preliminary TAB Procedures"
under the paragraphs titled, "Air Distribution System Inspection" and
"Hydronic Distribution System Inspection" for examples of items to
include in the checklists.
3. Design Review Report
Submit report containing the following information:
a. Review the contract specifications and drawings to verify that the TAB
work can be successfully accomplished in compliance with the
requirements of this section. Verify the presence and location of
permanently installed test ports and other devices needed, including
gauge cocks, thermometer wells, flow control devices, circuit setters,
balancing valves, and manual volume dampers.
b. Submit a typed report describing omissions and deficiencies in the HVAC

system's design that would preclude the TAB team from accomplishing the
DALT work and the TAB work requirements of this section. Provide a
complete explanation including supporting documentation detailing the
design deficiency. If no deficiencies are evident, state so in the
report.
4. Pre-Final DALT Report for COTR DALT Field Checks
Report the data for the Pre-Final DALT Report meeting the following
requirements:
a. Submit a copy of the approved DALT and TAB Procedures Summary: Provide
notations describing how actual field procedures differed from the
procedures listed.
b. Report format: Submit a comprehensive report for the DALT field work
data using data presentation forms equivalent to the "Air Duct Leakage
Test Summary Report Forms" located in the SMACNA 1972 CD. In
addition, submit in the report, a marked duct shop drawing which
identifies each section of duct tested with assigned node numbers for
each section. Node numbers shall be included in the completed report
forms to identify each duct section.
c. Calculations: Include a copy of all calculations prepared in

determining the duct surface area of each duct test section. Include
in the DALT reports copy(s) of the calibration curve for each of the
DALT test orifices used for testing.
d. Instruments: List the types of instruments actually used to measure

the data. Include in the listing each instrument's unique
identification number, calibration date, and calibration expiration
date. Instruments are to be calibrated within one year of the date of
use in the field; instrument calibration is to be traceable to the
measuring standards of the National Institute of Standards and
Technology.
e. TAB Supervisor Approval: Include on the submitted report the typed

name of the TAB supervisor and the dated signature of the TAB
supervisor.
5. Final DALT Report
On successful completion of all COTR field checks of the Pre-final DALT

Report data for all systems, the TABS Supervisor shall assemble, review,
sign and submit the Final DALT Report to the Contracting Officer for
approval.
6. TAB Reports: Submit TAB Report for Season 1 and TAB Report for Season 2
in the following manner:
a. Procedure Summary: Submit a copy of the approved DALT and TAB

Procedures Summary. When applicable, provide notations describing how
actual field procedures differed from the procedures listed.
b. Report format: Submit the completed data forms approved in the

pre-field TAB Engineering Report completed by TAB field team, reviewed,
approved and signed by the TAB supervisor. Bind the report with a
waterproof front and back cover. Include a table of contents
identifying by page number the location of each report. Report forms
and report data shall be typewritten. Handwritten report forms or
report data are not acceptable.
c. Temperatures: On each TAB report form reporting TAB work accomplished

on HVAC thermal energy transfer equipment, include the indoor and
outdoor dry bulb temperature range and indoor and outdoor wet bulb
temperature range within which the TAB data was recorded. Include in
the TAB report continuous time versus temperature recording data of wet
and dry bulb temperatures for the rooms, or zones, as designated in the
following list:
Indoor Shooting Ranges
(1) Data shall be measured and compiled on a continuous basis for the
period in which TAB work affecting those rooms is being done.
(2) Data shall be measured/recorded only after the HVAC systems

installations are complete, the systems fully balanced and the
HVAC systems controls operating in fully automatic mode. Provide
a detailed explanation wherever a final measurement did not
achieve the required value.
(3) Data may be compiled using direct digital controls trend logging
where available. Otherwise, the Contractor shall temporarily
install calibrated time versus temperature/humidity recorders for
this purpose. The HVAC systems and controls shall have been fully
operational a minimum of 24 hours in advance of commencing data
compilation. The specified data shall be included in the Season I
and Season 2 TAB Report.
d. Air System Diagrams: Provided updated diagrams with final installed

locations of all terminals and devices, any numbering changes, and
actual test locations.
e. Air Static Pressure Profiles: Report static pressure profiles for air
duct systems including: Rooftop Units, Air Handling Units, Make Up Air
Units and Indoor Range Exhaust Fans. Report static pressure data for
all supply, return, relief, exhaust and outside air ducts for the
systems listed. The static pressure report data shall include, in
addition to AABC or NEBB or TABB required data, the following:
(1) Report supply fan, return fan, relief fan, and exhaust fan inlet
and discharge static pressures.
(2) Report static pressure drop across chilled water coils, DX coils,
hot water coils, steam coils, electric resistance heating coils
and heat reclaim devices installed in unit cabinetry or the system
ductwork.
(3) Report static pressure drop across outside air, return air, and
supply air automatic control dampers, both proportional and
two-position, installed in unit cabinetry.
(4) Report static pressure drop across air filters, acoustic

silencers, moisture eliminators, air flow straighteners, air flow
measuring stations or other pressure drop producing specialty
items installed in unit cabinetry, or in the system ductwork.
Examples of these specialty items are smoke detectors, white sound
generators, RF shielding, wave guides, security bars, blast
valves, small pipes passing through ductwork, and duct mounted
humidifiers.
Do not report static pressure drop across duct fittings provided for
the sole purpose of conveying air, such as elbows, transitions,
offsets, plenums, manual dampers, and branch takes-offs.
(5) Report static pressure drop across outside air and relief/exhaust
air louvers.
(6) Report static pressure readings of supply air, return air,

exhaust/relief air, and outside air in duct at the point where
these ducts connect to each air moving unit.
f. Duct Transverses: Report duct traverses for main and branch main
supply, exhaust ducts. This shall include all ducts, including those
which lack 7 1/2 duct diameters upstream and 2 1/2 duct diameters
downstream of straight duct unobstructed by duct
fittings/offsets/elbows. The TAB Agency shall evaluate and report
findings on the duct traverses taken. Evaluate the suitability of the
duct traverse measurement based on satisfying the qualifications for a
pitot traverse plane as defined by AMCA 203, "Field Measurements",
Section 8, paragraph 8.3, "Location of Traverse Plane".
g. Instruments: List the types of instruments actually used to measure

the tab data. Include in the listing each instrument's unique
identification number, calibration date, and calibration expiration
date.
Instrumentation, used for taking wet bulb temperature readings shall

provide accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent at the measured face
velocities. Submit instrument manufacturer's literature to document
instrument accuracy performance is in compliance with that specified.
h. Performance Curves: The TAB Supervisor shall include, in the TAB
Reports, factory pump curves and fan curves for pumps and fans TAB'd on
the job.
i. Calibration Curves: The TAB Supervisor shall include, in the TAB

Reports, a factory calibration curve for installed flow control
balancing valves, flow venturis and flow orifices TAB'd on the job.
j. Data From TAB Field Work: After completion of the TAB field work,
prepare the TAB field data for TAB supervisor's review and approval
signature, using the reporting forms approved in the pre-field
engineering report. Data required by those approved data report forms
shall be furnished by the TAB team. Except as approved otherwise in
writing by the Contracting Officer, the TAB work and thereby the TAB
report shall be considered incomplete until the TAB work is
accomplished to within the accuracy range specified in the paragraph
entitled "Workmanship."
Appendix C
DALT AND TAB SUBMITTAL AND WORK SCHEDULE
Perform the following items of work in the order listed adhering to the
dates schedule specified below. Include the major items listed in this
schedule in the project network analysis schedule required by Section
01 32 17.00 20 NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULES (NAS).
Submit TAB Agency and TAB Personnel Qualifications: Within 42 calendar

days after date of contract award.
Submit the DALT and TAB Work Execution Schedule: within 14 days after
receipt of the TAB agency and TAB personnel qualifications approval.
Revise and re-submit this schedule 28 days prior to commencement of
DALT work and 28 days prior to the commencement of TAB Season 1 work
and TAB Season 2 work.
Submit the DALT and TAB Work Procedures Summary: within 14 days after
receipt of the initial approved DALT and TAB Work Execution Schedule.
Meet with the COTR at the Pre-DALT/TAB Meeting: Within 28 calendar days
after receipt of the approved initial DALT/TAB Execution Schedule.
Submit Design Review Report: Within 56 calendar days after the receipt of
the approved initial DALT and TAB Work Execution Schedule.
Advance Notice of Pre-Final DALT Field Work: After the completed

installation of the HVAC duct system to be DALT'd, submit to the
Contracting Officer an Advance Notice of Pre-Final DALT Field Work
accompanied by the completed Pre-Final DALT Work Checklistchecklist for
the subject duct system.
Ductwork Selected for DALT: Within 14 calendar days after receiving an

acceptable completed Pre-Final DALT Work Checklist, the Contracting
Officer's technical representative (COTR) will select the project
ductwork sections to be DALT'd.
DALT Field Work: Within 48 hours of COTR's selection, complete DALT field
work on selected project ductwork.
Submit Pre-Final DALT Report: Within two working days after completion of
DALT field work, submit Pre-final DALT Report. Separate Pre-final DALT
reports may be submitted to allow phased testing from system to system.
Quality Assurance - COTR DALT Field Checks: Upon approval of the Pre-final
DALT Report, the COTR's DALT field check work shall be scheduled with
the Contracting Officer.
Submit Final DALT Report: Within 14 calendar days after completion of

successful DALT Work Field Check, submit Season 1 TAB report.
Advance Notice of Season 1 TAB Field Work: At a minimum of 14 calendar

days prior to Season 1 TAB Field Work, submit advance notice of TAB
field work accompanied by completed
Season 1 Pre-TAB Work Checklist.
Season 1 TAB Field Work: At a minimum of 84 calendar days prior to CCD,
and when the ambient temperature is within Season 1 limits, accomplish

Season 1 TAB field work.
Submit Season 1 TAB Report: Within 14 calendar days after completion of

Season 1 TAB field work, submit initial Season 1 TAB report.
Season 1 Quality Assurance - COTR TAB Field Check: 30 calendar days after
initial Season 1 TAB report is approved by the Contracting Officer,
conduct Season 1 field check.
Complete Season 1 TAB Work: Prior to CCD, complete all TAB work except
Season 2 TAB work and submit final.
Receive the approved TAB report: Within 21 calendar days, receive the
report from Contracting Officer approved TAB report.
Advance Notice of Season 2 TAB Field Work: At a minimum of 126 calendar

days after CCD, submit advance notice of Season 2 TAB field work
accompanied by completed Season 2 Pre-TAB Work Checklist.
Season 2 TAB Field Work: Within 14 calendar days after date of advance
notice of Season 2 TAB field work and when the ambient temperature is
within Season 2 limits, accomplish Season 2 TAB field work.
Submit Season 2 TAB Report: Within 14 calendar days after completion of

Season 2 TAB field work, submit Season 2 TAB report.
Season 2 Quality Assurance - COTR TAB Field Checks: 28 calendar days after
the Season 2 TAB report is approved by the Contracting Officer, conduct
Season 2 field check.
Complete Season 2 TAB Work: Within 14 calendar days after the completion
of Season 2 TAB field data check, complete all TAB work.
Receive the approved TAB report: Within calendar 21 days, receive the
report from Contracting Officer.
Appendix D
REQUIREMENTS FOR DUCT AIR LEAK TESTING
SYSTEMS
Package
Rooftop
w/CV
Unit No.
1-8
Duct System for Supply 2

Static
Pressure, in
inches W.C.
for Return 1
for Exhaust 1
for 1
Outside Air
System for Supply A

Oval/Round
Duct and for Return A
Rectangular
Duct SMACNA
Seal Class for Exhaust A
for A
Outside Air
System for Supply 6

Oval/Round
Duct SMACNA
Leak Class
for Return 12
for Exhaust 12
for 12
Outside Air
Appendix D
SYSTEMS
Package
Rooftop
w/CV
Unit No.
1-8
System for Supply 12

Rectangular
Duct SMACNA
Leak Class
for Return 24
for Exhaust 12
for 24
Outside Air
Duct Test for Supply 50

Pressure, in
inches W.C.
for Return 1
for Exhaust 1
for 1
Outside Air
Appendix D
SYSTEMS
AHU & MAU & CV VRF Fan Indoor
CV Unit Unit Coil Units Shooting
Range Exhaust
Systems Unit
No. 1-8
Duct System for 2 2 0.5 n/a

Static Supply
Pressure,
in
for 1 1 0.5 n/a
millimeters
Return
W.C.
for 0.5 0.5 n/a 1
Exhaust
for 1 1 n/a n/a
Outside
Air
System for A A A A
Oval/Round Supply
Duct and for A A A A
Rectangular Return
Duct SMACNA
Seal Class for A A A A
Exhaust
for A A A A
Outside
Air
System for 6 6 12 n/a

Oval/Round Supply
Duct SMACNA
Leak Class
for 12 12 12 n/a
Return
for 12 12 n/a 12
Exhaust
for 12 12 n/a n/a
Outside
Air
Appendix D
SYSTEMS
AHU & MAU & CV VRF Fan Indoor
CV Unit Unit Coil Units Shooting
Range Exhaust
Systems Unit
No. 1-8
System for 12 12 24 n/a

Rectangular Supply
Duct SMACNA
Leak Class
for 24 24 24 n/a
Return
for 24 24 n/a 24
Exhaust
for 24 24 n/a n/a
Outside
Air
Duct Test for 2 2 0.5 n/a
Pressure, Supply
in inches
W.C.
for 1 1 0.5 n/a
Return
for 0.5 0.5 n/a 1
Exhaust
for 1 1 n/a n/a
Outside
Air
SECTION 23 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

02/13
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

basic designation only. At the discretion of the Government, the
manufacturer of any material supplied will be required to furnish test
reports pertaining to any of the tests necessary to assure compliance with
the standard or standards referenced in this specification.

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 90.1 - IP (2010; Errata 1-3 2011; INT 1-12 2011;

Addenda A, B, C, G, H, J, K, O, P, S, Y,
Z, BZ, CG, CI and DS 2012; Errata 4-8
2012; INT 13-16 2012; Errata 9-12 2013;
INT 17 2013) Energy Standard for Buildings
Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings

Strip
ASTM A240/A240M (2012a) Standard Specification for

Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure
Vessels and for General Applications

Stainless Steel Wire
ASTM B209 (2010) Standard Specification for Aluminum

and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders
for Thermal Insulation
ASTM C1290 (2011) Standard Specification for Flexible

Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to
Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts
ASTM C1710 (2011) Standard Guide for Installation of

Flexible Closed Cell Preformed Insulation
in Tube and Sheet Form
Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement
ASTM C450 (2008) Standard Practice for Fabrication

of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for
NPS Piping, and Vessel Lagging
ASTM C534/C534M (2011) Standard Specification for

Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular
Form

Fiber Pipe Insulation
ASTM C552 (2012b) Standard Specification for

Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation
ASTM C585 (2010) Standard Practice for Inner and

Outer Diameters of Thermal Insulation for
Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing
ASTM C612 (2010) Mineral Fiber Block and Board

Thermal Insulation
ASTM C647 (2008) Properties and Tests of Mastics and

Coating Finishes for Thermal Insulation
ASTM C795 (2008) Standard Specification for Thermal

Insulation for Use in Contact with
Austenitic Stainless Steel

ASTM C921 (2010) Standard Practice for Determining

the Properties of Jacketing Materials for
Thermal Insulation
ASTM D2863 (2012) Measuring the Minimum Oxygen

Concentration to Support Candle-Like
Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index)
ASTM D5590 (2000; R 2010; E 2012) Standard Test

Method for Determining the Resistance of
Paint Films and Related Coatings to Fungal
Defacement by Accelerated Four-Week Agar
Plate Assay
ASTM D882 (2012) Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic

Sheeting
ASTM E2231 (2009) Specimen Preparation and Mounting

of Pipe and Duct Insulation Materials to
Assess Surface Burning Characteristics
ASTM E84 (2012c) Standard Test Method for Surface

Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
ASTM E96/E96M (2012) Standard Test Methods for Water

Vapor Transmission of Materials
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM APP GUIDE (updated on-line) Approval Guide

http://www.approvalguide.com/

INDUSTRY (MSS)


NFPA 90B (2012) Standard for the Installation of

Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems
TECHNICAL ASSOCIATION OF THE PULP AND PAPER INDUSTRY (TAPPI)
TAPPI T403 OM (2010) Bursting Strength of Paper
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
MIL-A-24179 (1969; Rev A; Am 2 1980; Notice 1 1987)

Adhesive, Flexible Unicellular-Plastic
Thermal Insulation
MIL-A-3316 (1987; Rev C; Am 2 1990) Adhesives,

Fire-Resistant, Thermal Insulation
MIL-PRF-19565 (1988; Rev C) Coating Compounds, Thermal

Insulation, Fire- and Water-Resistant,
Vapor-Barrier
UL 723 (2008; Reprint Sep 2010) Test for Surface

Materials
UL 94 (1996; Reprint Feb 2013) Standard for

Tests for Flammability of Plastic
Materials for Parts in Devices and
Appliances
1.2.1 General
Provide field-applied insulation and accessories on mechanical systems as

specified herein; factory-applied insulation is specified under the piping,
duct or equipment to be insulated.
1.2.2 Recycled Materials
Provide thermal insulation containing recycled materials to the extent

practicable, provided that the materials meet all other requirements of
this section. The minimum recycled material content of the following
insulation are:
Rock Wool 75 percent slag of weight
Fiberglass 20-25 percent glass cullet by weight
Rigid Foam 9 percent recovered material
1.3 SUBMITTALS

Submit the two SD types, SD-03 Product Data, and SD-08 Manufacturer's
Instructions at the same time for each system.
SD-03 Product Data
Pipe Insulation Systems; G

Duct Insulation Systems; G
Equipment Insulation Systems; G
Pipe Insulation Systems; G

Duct Insulation Systems; G
Equipment Insulation Systems; G
1.4.1 Installer Qualification
Qualified installers shall have successfully completed three or more

similar type jobs within the last 5 years.
Materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's unopened containers.

Materials delivered and placed in storage shall be provided with protection
from weather, humidity, dirt, dust and other contaminants. The Contracting
Officer may reject insulation material and supplies that become dirty,
dusty, wet, or contaminated by some other means. Packages or standard
containers of insulation, jacket material, cements, adhesives, and coatings
delivered for use, and samples required for approval shall have
manufacturer's stamp or label attached giving the name of the manufacturer
and brand, and a description of the material, date codes, and approximate
shelf life (if applicable). Insulation packages and containers shall be
asbestos free.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS
Provide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers

regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially
duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years
prior to bid opening. Submit a complete list of materials, including
manufacturer's descriptive technical literature, performance data, catalog
cuts, and installation instructions. The product number, k-value,
thickness and furnished accessories including adhesives, sealants and
jackets for each mechanical system requiring insulation shall be included.
The product data must be copyrighted, have an identifying or publication
number, and shall have been published prior to the issuance date of this
solicitation. Materials furnished under this section shall be submitted
together in a booklet.
2.1.1 Insulation System
Provide field-applied insulation for heating, ventilating, and cooling

(HVAC) air distribution systems and piping systems that are located within,
on, under, and adjacent to buildings; and for plumbing systems. Insulation
shall be CFC and HCFC free.
2.1.2 Surface Burning Characteristics
Unless otherwise specified, insulation shall have a maximum flame spread

index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in
accordance with ASTM E84. Flame spread, and smoke developed indexes,
shall be determined by ASTM E84 or UL 723. Insulation shall be tested in
the same density and installed thickness as the material to be used in the
actual construction. Test specimens shall be prepared and mounted
according to ASTM E2231.
2.2 MATERIALS
Provide insulation that meets or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 - IP.
Insulation exterior shall be cleanable, grease resistant, non-flaking and
non-peeling. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to
corrosion, soften, or otherwise attack surfaces to which applied in either
wet or dry state. Materials to be used on stainless steel surfaces shall
meet ASTM C795 requirements. Calcium silicate shall not be used on chilled
or cold water systems. Materials shall be asbestos free. Provide product
recognized under UL 94 (if containing plastic) and listed in FM APP GUIDE.
2.2.1 Adhesives
2.2.1.1 Mineral Fiber Insulation Cement
Cement shall be in accordance with ASTM C195.
2.2.1.2 Lagging Adhesive
Lagging is the material used for thermal insulation, especially around a

cylindrical object. This may include the insulation as well as the
cloth/material covering the insulation. Lagging adhesives shall be
nonflammable and fire-resistant and shall have a maximum flame spread index
of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance
with ASTM E84. Adhesive shall be MIL-A-3316, Class 1, pigmented white and
be suitable for bonding fibrous glass cloth to faced and unfaced fibrous
glass insulation board; for bonding cotton brattice cloth to faced and
unfaced fibrous glass insulation board; for sealing edges of and bonding
glass tape to joints of fibrous glass board; for bonding lagging cloth to
thermal insulation; or Class 2 for attaching fibrous glass insulation to
metal surfaces. Lagging adhesives shall be applied in strict accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations for pipe and duct insulation.
2.2.1.3 Contact Adhesive
Adhesives may be any of, but not limited to, the neoprene based, rubber
based, or elastomeric type that have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and
a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84. The adhesive shall not adversely affect, initially or in
service, the insulation to which it is applied, nor shall it cause any
corrosive effect on metal to which it is applied. Any solvent dispersing
medium or volatile component of the adhesive shall have no objectionable
odor and shall not contain any benzene or carbon tetrachloride. The dried
adhesive shall not emit nauseous, irritating, or toxic volatile matters or
aerosols when the adhesive is heated to any temperature up to 212 degrees F.
The dried adhesive shall be nonflammable and fire resistant. Flexible
Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179, Type II, Class I. Provide
product listed in FM APP GUIDE.
2.2.2 Caulking
ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use A.
2.2.3 Corner Angles
Nominal 0.016 inch aluminum 1 by 1 inch with factory applied kraft

backing. Aluminum shall be ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3105, or 5005.
2.2.4 Fittings
Fabricated Fittings are the prefabricated fittings for flexible elastomeric

pipe insulation systems in accordance with ASTM C1710. Together with the
flexible elastomeric tubes, they provide complete system integrity for
retarding heat gain and controlling condensation drip from chilled-water
and refrigeration systems. Flexible elastomeric, fabricated fittings
provide thermal protection (0.25 k) and condensation resistance (0.05 Water
Vapor Transmission factor). For satisfactory performance, properly
installed protective vapor retarder/barriers and vapor stops shall be used
on high relative humidity and below ambient temperature applications to
reduce movement of moisture through or around the insulation to the colder
interior surface.
2.2.5 Finishing Cement
ASTM C450: Mineral fiber hydraulic-setting thermal insulating and finishing

cement. All cements that may come in contact with Austenitic stainless
steel must comply with ASTM C795.
2.2.6 Fibrous Glass Cloth and Glass Tape
Fibrous glass cloth, with 20X20 maximum mesh size, and glass tape shall
have maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index
of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Tape shall be 4 inch wide
rolls. Class 3 tape shall be 4.5 ounces/square yard. Elastomeric Foam
Tape: Black vapor-retarder foam tape with acrylic adhesive containing an

anti-microbial additive.
2.2.7 Staples
Outward clinching type ASTM A167, Type 304 or 316 stainless steel.
2.2.8 Jackets
2.2.8.1 Aluminum Jackets
Aluminum jackets shall be corrugated, embossed or smooth sheet, 0.016 inch

nominal thickness; ASTM B209, Temper H14, Temper H16, Alloy 3003, 5005, or
3105. Corrugated aluminum jacket shall not be used outdoors. Aluminum
jacket securing bands shall be Type 304 stainless steel, 0.015 inch thick,
1/2 inch wide for pipe under 12 inch diameter and 3/4 inch wide for pipe
over 12 inch and larger diameter. Aluminum jacket circumferential seam
bands shall be 2 by 0.016 inch aluminum matching jacket material. Bands
for insulation below ground shall be 3/4 by 0.020 inch thick stainless
steel, or fiberglass reinforced tape. The jacket may, at the option of the
Contractor, be provided with a factory fabricated Pittsburgh or "Z" type
longitudinal joint. When the "Z" joint is used, the bands at the
circumferential joints shall be designed by the manufacturer to seal the
joints and hold the jacket in place.
2.2.8.2 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Jackets
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket and fitting covers shall have high impact
strength, ultraviolet (UV) resistant rating or treatment and moderate
chemical resistance with minimum thickness 0.030 inch.
2.2.8.3 Vapor Barrier/Vapor Retarder
Apply the following criteria to determine which system is required.
a. On ducts, piping and equipment operating below 95 degrees F or located

outside shall be equipped with a vapor barrier.
b. Ducts, pipes and equipment that are located inside and that always
operate above 95 degrees F shall be installed with a vapor retarder
where required as stated in paragraph VAPOR RETARDER REQUIRED.
2.2.9 Vapor Retarder Required
ASTM C921, Type I, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all

surfaces except concealed ductwork, where a minimum puncture resistance of
25 Beach units is acceptable. Minimum tensile strength, 35 pounds/inch
width. ASTM C921, Type II, minimum puncture resistance 25 Beach units,
tensile strength minimum 20 pounds/inch width. Jackets used on insulation
exposed in finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting
without sizing. Based on the application, insulation materials that
require manufacturer or fabricator applied pipe insulation jackets are
cellular glass, when all joints are sealed with a vapor barrier mastic, and
mineral fiber. All non-metallic jackets shall have a maximum flame
spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in
accordance with ASTM E84. Flexible elastomerics require (in addition to
vapor barrier skin) vapor retarder jacketing for high relative humidity and
below ambient temperature applications.
2.2.9.1 White Vapor Retarder All Service Jacket (ASJ)
ASJ is for use on hot/cold pipes, ducts, or equipment indoors or outdoors

if covered by a suitable protective jacket. The product shall meet all
physical property and performance requirements of ASTM C1136, Type I,
except the burst strength shall be a minimum of 85 psi. ASTM D2863 Limited
Oxygen Index (LOI) shall be a minimum of 31.
In addition, neither the outer exposed surface nor the inner-most surface
contacting the insulation shall be paper or other moisture-sensitive
material. The outer exposed surface shall be white and have an emittance
of not less than 0.80. The outer exposed surface shall be paintable.
2.2.9.2 Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier Mastic Coatings
a. The vapor barrier shall be self adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3

mils embossed) greater than 3 plies standard grade, silver, white,
black and embossed white jacket for use on hot/cold pipes.
Permeability shall be less than 0.02 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M. Products shall meet UL 723 or ASTM E84 flame and smoke
requirements and shall be UV resistant.
b. The vapor retarder coating shall be fire and water resistant and
appropriately selected for either outdoor or indoor service. Color
shall be white. The water vapor permeance of the compound shall be
0.013 perms or less at 43 mils dry film thickness as determined
according to procedure B of ASTM E96/E96M utilizing apparatus described
in ASTM E96/E96M. The coating shall be nonflammable, fire resistant
type. To resist mold/mildew, coating shall meet ASTM D5590 with 0
growth rating. Coating shall meet MIL-PRF-19565 Type II (if selected
for indoor service) and be Qualified Products Database listed. All
other application and service properties shall be in accordance with
ASTM C647.
2.2.9.3 Laminated Film Vapor Retarder
ASTM C1136, Type I, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms, minimum
puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except concealed
ductwork; where Type II, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms, a
minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable. Vapor
retarder shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke
developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Flexible
Elastomeric exterior foam with factory applied UV Jacket. Construction of
laminate designed to provide UV resistance, high puncture, tear resistance
and an excellent WVT rate.
2.2.9.4 Polyvinylidene Chloride (PVDC) Film Vapor Retarder
The PVDC film vapor retarder shall have a maximum moisture vapor
transmission of 0.02 perms, minimum puncture resistance of 150 Beach units,
a minimum tensile strength in any direction of 30 lb/inch when tested in
accordance with ASTM D882, and a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a
maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.2.9.5 Polyvinylidene Chloride Vapor Retarder Adhesive Tape
Requirements must meet the same as specified for Laminated Film Vapor
Retarder above.
2.2.9.6 Vapor Barrier/Weather Barrier
The vapor barrier shall be greater than 3 ply self adhesive laminate -white
vapor barrier jacket- superior performance (less than 0.0000 permeability
when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M). Vapor barrier shall meet
UL 723 or ASTM E84 25 flame and 50 smoke requirements; and UV resistant.
Minimum burst strength 185 psi in accordance with TAPPI T403 OM. Tensile
strength 68 lb/inch width (PSTC-1000). Tape shall be as specified for
laminated film vapor barrier above.
2.2.10 Vapor Retarder Not Required
ASTM C921, Type II, Class D, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on
all surfaces except ductwork, where Type IV, maximum moisture vapor
transmission 0.10, a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is
acceptable. Jacket shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a
maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.2.11 Wire
Soft annealed ASTM A580/A580M Type 302, 304 or 316 stainless steel, 16 or
18 gauge.
2.2.12 Insulation Bands
Insulation bands shall be 1/2 inch wide; 26 gauge stainless steel.
2.2.13 Sealants
Sealants shall be chosen from the butyl polymer type, the styrene-butadiene
rubber type, or the butyl type of sealants. Sealants shall have a maximum
permeance of 0.02 perms based on Procedure B for ASTM E96/E96M, and a
maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.3 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS
Insulation materials shall conform to Table 1. Insulation thickness shall

be as listed in Table 2 and meet or exceed the requirements of
ASHRAE 90.1 - IP. Insulation thickness shall be 1 inch. Comply with EPA
requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35
RECYCLED/RECOVERED/BIOBASED MATERIALS. Pipe insulation materials shall be
limited to those listed herein and shall meet the following requirements:
2.3.1 Aboveground Cold Pipeline (-30 to 60 deg. F)
Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications, shall be

as follows:
a. Cellular Glass: ASTM C552, Type II, and Type III. Supply the
insulation from the fabricator with (paragraph WHITE VAPOR RETARDER ALL
SERVICE JACKET (ASJ)) ASJ vapor retarder and installed with all
longitudinal overlaps sealed and all circumferential joints ASJ taped
or supply the insulation unfaced from the fabricator and install with
all longitudinal and circumferential joints sealed with vapor barrier
mastic.
2.3.2 Aboveground Hot Pipeline (Above 60 deg. F)
Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications shall

meet the following requirements. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's
recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.
a. Mineral Fiber: ASTM C547, Types I, II or III, supply the insulation

with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket.
2.3.3 Aboveground Dual Temperature Pipeline
Selection of insulation for use over a dual temperature pipeline system

(Outdoor, Indoor - Exposed or Concealed) shall be in accordance with the
most limiting/restrictive case. Find an allowable material from paragraph
PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS and determine the required thickness from the
most restrictive case. Use the thickness listed in paragraphs INSULATION
THICKNESS for cold & hot pipe applications.
2.3.4 Below-ground Pipeline Insulation
For below-ground pipeline insulation, use cellular glass, ASTM C552, type
II.
2.4 DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS
2.4.1 Factory Applied Insulation
2.4.1.1 Rigid Insulation
Rigid mineral fiber in accordance with ASTM C612, Class 2 (maximum surface
temperature 400 degrees F), 3 pcf average, 1-1/2 inch thick, Type IA, IB,
II, III, and IV. Alternately, minimum thickness may be calculated in
accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP.
2.4.1.2 Blanket Insulation
Blanket flexible mineral fiber insulation conforming to ASTM C585, Type 1,

2.0 inches thick or Type II up to 250 degrees F. Also ASTM C1290 Type III
may be used.
2.4.2 Duct Insulation Jackets
2.4.2.1 All-Purpose Jacket
Provide insulation with insulation manufacturer's standard reinforced

fire-retardant jacket with or without integral vapor barrier as required by
the service. In exposed locations, provide jacket with a white surface
suitable for field painting.
2.4.2.2 Metal Jackets
a. Aluminum Jackets: ASTM B209, Temper H14, minimum thickness of 27 gauge

( 0.016 inch), with factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper
moisture barrier on inside surface. Provide smooth surface jackets for
jacket outside dimension 8 inches and larger. Provide corrugated
surface jackets for jacket outside dimension 8 inches and larger.
Provide stainless steel bands, minimum width of 1/2 inch.
b. Stainless Steel Jackets: ASTM A167 or ASTM A240/A240M; Type 304,
minimum thickness of 33 gauge ( 0.010 inch), smooth surface with

factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper moisture barrier on inside
surface. Provide stainless steel bands, minimum width of 1/2 inch.
2.4.2.3 Vapor Barrier/Weatherproofing Jacket
Vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket shall be laminated self-adhesive

(minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability,
(greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or
greater than 8 ply (minimum 2.9 mils adhesive), heavy duty white or
natural).
2.4.3 Weatherproof Duct Insulation
Provide ASTM C552, cellular glass thermal insulation or ASTM C534/C534M

Grade 1, Type II, flexible elastomeric cellular insulation, and
weatherproofing as specified in manufacturer's instruction. Multi-ply,
Polymeric Blend Laminate Jacketing: Construction of laminate designed to
provide UV resistance, high puncture, tear resistance and an excellent WVT
rate.
2.5 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SYSTEMS
Insulate equipment and accessories as specified in Tables 5 and 6. In

outside locations, provide insulation 1/2 inch thicker than specified.
Increase the specified insulation thickness for equipment where necessary
to equal the thickness of angles or other structural members to make a
smooth, exterior surface. Submit a booklet containing manufacturer's
published installation instructions for the insulation systems. The
instructions must be copyrighted, have an identifying or publication
number, and shall have been published prior to the issuance date of this
solicitation. A booklet is also required by paragraphs titled: Pipe
Insulation Systems and Duct Insulation Systems.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION - GENERAL
Insulation shall only be applied to unheated and uncooled piping and

equipment. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be
compressed at joists, studs, columns, ducts, hangers, etc. The insulation
shall not pull apart after a one hour period; any insulation found to pull
apart after one hour, shall be replaced.
3.1.1 Display Samples
Submit and display, after approval of materials, actual sections of

installed systems, properly insulated in accordance with the specification
requirements. Such actual sections must remain accessible to inspection
throughout the job and will be reviewed from time to time for controlling
the quality of the work throughout the construction site. Each material
used shall be identified, by indicating on an attached sheet the
specification requirement for the material and the material by each
manufacturer intended to meet the requirement. The Contracting Officer
will inspect display sample sections at the jobsite. Approved display
sample sections shall remain on display at the jobsite during the
construction period. Upon completion of construction, the display sample
sections will be closed and sealed.
3.1.1.1 Pipe Insulation Display Sections
Display sample sections shall include as a minimum an elbow or tee, a

valve, dielectric waterways and flanges, a hanger with protection shield
and insulation insert, or dowel as required, at support point, method of
fastening and sealing insulation at longitudinal lap, circumferential lap,
butt joints at fittings and on pipe runs, and terminating points for each
type of pipe insulation used on the job, and for hot pipelines and cold
pipelines, both interior and exterior, even when the same type of
insulation is used for these services.
3.1.1.2 Duct Insulation Display Sections
Display sample sections for rigid and flexible duct insulation used on the
job. Use a temporary covering to enclose and protect display sections for
duct insulation exposed to weather
3.1.2 Installation
Except as otherwise specified, material shall be installed in accordance

with the manufacturer's written instructions. Insulation materials shall
not be applied until tests specified in other sections of this
specification are completed. Material such as rust, scale, dirt and
moisture shall be removed from surfaces to receive insulation. Insulation
shall be kept clean and dry. Insulation shall not be removed from its
shipping containers until the day it is ready to use and shall be returned
to like containers or equally protected from dirt and moisture at the end
of each workday. Insulation that becomes dirty shall be thoroughly cleaned
prior to use. If insulation becomes wet or if cleaning does not restore
the surfaces to like new condition, the insulation will be rejected, and
shall be immediately removed from the jobsite. Joints shall be staggered
on multi layer insulation. Mineral fiber thermal insulating cement shall
be mixed with demineralized water when used on stainless steel surfaces.
3.1.3 Firestopping
Where pipes and ducts pass through fire walls, fire partitions, above grade
floors, and fire rated chase walls, the penetration shall be sealed with
fire stopping materials as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING. The
protection of ducts at point of passage through firewalls must be in
accordance with NFPA 90A and/or NFPA 90B. All other penetrations, such as
piping, conduit, and wiring, through firewalls must be protected with a
material or system of the same hourly rating that is listed by UL, FM, or a
NRTL.
3.1.4 Painting and Finishing
Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.1.5 Installation of Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation
Install flexible elastomeric cellular insulation with seams and joints

sealed with rubberized contact adhesive. Flexible elastomeric cellular
insulation shall not be used on surfaces greater than 220 degrees F.
Stagger seams when applying multiple layers of insulation. Protect
insulation exposed to weather and not shown to have vapor barrier
weatherproof jacketing with two coats of UV resistant finish or PVC or
metal jacketing as recommended by the manufacturer after the adhesive is
dry and cured.
3.1.5.1 Adhesive Application
Apply a brush coating of adhesive to both butt ends to be joined and to

both slit surfaces to be sealed. Allow the adhesive to set until dry to
touch but tacky under slight pressure before joining the surfaces.
Insulation seals at seams and joints shall not be capable of being pulled
apart one hour after application. Insulation that can be pulled apart one
hour after installation shall be replaced.
3.1.5.2 Adhesive Safety Precautions
Use natural cross-ventilation, local (mechanical) pickup, and/or general

area (mechanical) ventilation to prevent an accumulation of solvent vapors,
keeping in mind the ventilation pattern must remove any heavier-than-air
solvent vapors from lower levels of the workspaces. Gloves and
spectacle-type safety glasses are recommended in accordance with safe
installation practices.
3.1.6 Welding
No welding shall be done on piping, duct or equipment without written

approval of the Contracting Officer. The capacitor discharge welding
process may be used for securing metal fasteners to duct.
3.1.7 Pipes/Ducts/Equipment That Require Insulation
Insulation is required on all pipes, ducts, or equipment, except for

omitted items as specified.
3.2 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
3.2.1 Pipe Insulation
3.2.1.1 General
Pipe insulation shall be installed on aboveground hot and cold pipeline

systems as specified below to form a continuous thermal retarder/barrier,
including straight runs, fittings and appurtenances unless specified
otherwise. Installation shall be with full length units of insulation and
using a single cut piece to complete a run. Cut pieces or scraps abutting
each other shall not be used. Pipe insulation shall be omitted on the
following:
a. Pipe used solely for fire protection.
b. Chromium plated pipe to plumbing fixtures. However, fixtures for use

by the physically handicapped shall have the hot water supply and
drain, including the trap, insulated where exposed.
c. Sanitary drain lines.
d. Air chambers.
e. Adjacent insulation.
f. ASME stamps.
g. Access plates of fan housings.
h. Cleanouts or handholes.
3.2.1.2 Pipes Passing Through Walls, Roofs, and Floors
a. Pipe insulation shall be continuous through the sleeve.
b. An aluminum jacket or vapor barrier/weatherproofing - self adhesive

jacket (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000
permeability, greater than 3 ply standard grade, silver, white, black
and embossed with factory applied moisture retarder shall be provided
over the insulation wherever penetrations require sealing.
c. Where pipes penetrate interior walls, the aluminum jacket or vapor

barrier/weatherproofing - self adhesive jacket (minimum 2 mils
adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability, greater than
3 plies standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed shall extend
2 inches beyond either side of the wall and shall be secured on each
end with a band.
d. Where penetrating floors, the aluminum jacket shall extend from a point
below the backup material to a point 10 inches above the floor with one
band at the floor and one not more than 1 inch from the end of the
aluminum jacket.
e. Where penetrating waterproofed floors, the aluminum jacket shall extend

from below the backup material to a point 2 inches above the flashing
with a band 1 inch from the end of the aluminum jacket.
f. Where penetrating exterior walls, the aluminum jacket required for pipe
exposed to weather shall continue through the sleeve to a point 2 inches
beyond the interior surface of the wall.
g. Where penetrating roofs, pipe shall be insulated as required for

interior service to a point flush with the top of the flashing and
sealed with flashing sealant. The insulation for exterior application
shall butt tightly to the top of flashing and interior insulation. The
exterior aluminum jacket shall extend 2 inches down beyond the end of
the insulation to form a counter flashing. The flashing and counter
flashing shall be sealed underneath with metal jacketing/flashing
sealant.
h. For hot water pipes supplying lavatories or other similar heated

service that requires insulation, the insulation shall be terminated on
the backside of the finished wall. The insulation termination shall be
protected with two coats of vapor barrier coating with a minimum total
thickness of 1/16 inch applied with glass tape embedded between coats
(if applicable). The coating shall extend out onto the insulation 2
inches and shall seal the end of the insulation. Glass tape seams
shall overlap 1 inch. The annular space between the pipe and wall
penetration shall be caulked with approved fire stop material. The
pipe and wall penetration shall be covered with a properly sized (well
fitting) escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall overlap the wall
penetration at least 3/8 inches.
i. For domestic cold water pipes supplying lavatories or other similar

cooling service that requires insulation, the insulation shall be
terminated on the finished side of the wall (i.e., insulation must
cover the pipe throughout the wall penetration). The insulation shall
be protected with two coats of weather barrier mastic (breather

emulsion type weatherproof mastic impermeable to water and permeable to
air) with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch. The mastic shall
extend out onto the insulation 2 inches and shall seal the end of the
insulation. The annular space between the outer surface of the pipe
insulation and the wall penetration shall be caulked with an approved
fire stop material having vapor retarder properties. The pipe and wall
penetration shall be covered with a properly sized (well fitting)
escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall overlap the wall
penetration by at least 3/8 inches.
3.2.1.3 Pipes Passing Through Hangers
a. Insulation, whether hot or cold application, shall be continuous

through hangers. All horizontal pipes 2 inches and smaller shall be
supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection shield
to protect the insulation in accordance with MSS SP-69. Whenever
insulation shows signs of being compressed, or when the insulation or
jacket shows visible signs of distortion at or near the support shield,
insulation inserts as specified below for piping larger than 2 inches
shall be installed, or factory insulated hangers (designed with a load
bearing core) can be used.
b. Horizontal pipes larger than 2 inches at 60 degrees F and above shall

be supported on hangers in accordance with MSS SP-69, and Section
22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.
c. Horizontal pipes larger than 2 inches and below 60 degrees F shall be

supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection shield
in accordance with MSS SP-69. An insulation insert of cellular glass,
prefabricated insulation pipe hangers, or perlite above 80 degrees F
shall be installed above each shield. The insert shall cover not less
than the bottom 180-degree arc of the pipe. Inserts shall be the same
thickness as the insulation, and shall extend 2 inches on each end
beyond the protection shield. When insulation inserts are required in
accordance with the above, and the insulation thickness is less than 1
inch, wooden or cork dowels or blocks may be installed between the pipe
and the shield to prevent the weight of the pipe from crushing the
insulation, as an option to installing insulation inserts. The
insulation jacket shall be continuous over the wooden dowel, wooden
block, or insulation insert.
d. Vertical pipes shall be supported with either Type 8 or Type 42 riser

clamps with the addition of two Type 40 protection shields in
accordance with MSS SP-69 covering the 360-degree arc of the
insulation. An insulation insert of cellular glass or calcium silicate
shall be installed between each shield and the pipe. The insert shall
cover the 360-degree arc of the pipe. Inserts shall be the same
thickness as the insulation, and shall extend 2 inches on each end
beyond the protection shield. When insulation inserts are required in
accordance with the above, and the insulation thickness is less than 1
inch, wooden or cork dowels or blocks may be installed between the pipe
and the shield to prevent the hanger from crushing the insulation, as
an option instead of installing insulation inserts. The insulation
jacket shall be continuous over the wooden dowel, wooden block, or
insulation insert. The vertical weight of the pipe shall be supported
with hangers located in a horizontal section of the pipe. When the
pipe riser is longer than 30 feet, the weight of the pipe shall be
additionally supported with hangers in the vertical run of the pipe
that are directly clamped to the pipe, penetrating the pipe

insulation. These hangers shall be insulated and the insulation jacket
sealed as indicated herein for anchors in a similar service.
e. Inserts shall be covered with a jacket material of the same appearance

and quality as the adjoining pipe insulation jacket, shall overlap the
adjoining pipe jacket 1-1/2 inches, and shall be sealed as required for
the pipe jacket. The jacket material used to cover inserts in flexible
elastomeric cellular insulation shall conform to ASTM C1136, Type 1,
and is allowed to be of a different material than the adjoining
insulation material.
3.2.1.4 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation
Flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be tubular form for

pipe sizes 6 inches and less. Grade 1, Type II sheet insulation used on
pipes larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around the pipe. On
pipes larger than 12 inches, the insulation shall be adhered directly to
the pipe on the lower 1/3 of the pipe. Seams shall be staggered when
applying multiple layers of insulation. Sweat fittings shall be insulated
with miter-cut pieces the same size as on adjacent piping. Screwed
fittings shall be insulated with sleeved fitting covers fabricated from
miter-cut pieces and shall be overlapped and sealed to the adjacent pipe
insulation. Type II requires an additional exterior vapor retarder/barrier
covering for high relative humidity and below ambient temperature
applications.
3.2.1.5 Pipes in high abuse areas.
In high abuse areas such as janitor closets and traffic areas in equipment
rooms, kitchens, and mechanical rooms, aluminum or flexible laminate
cladding (comprised of elastomeric, plastic or metal foil laminate)
laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor
barrier/weatherproofing jacket, - less than 0.0000 permeability; (greater
than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed) aluminum
jackets shall be utilized. Pipe insulation to the 6 foot level shall be
protected.
3.2.1.6 Pipe Insulation Material and Thickness
TABLE 1
Insulation Material for Piping
Service
Material Specification Type Class VR/VB Req'd
Cold Domestic Water Piping, Makeup Water & Drinking Fountain Drain Piping
Cellular Glass ASTM C552 Yes
Hot Domestic Water Supply & Recirculating Piping (Max 200 F)
Mineral Fiber ASTM C547 No
Refrigerant Suction Piping (35 degrees F nominal)

Flexible Elastomeric ASTM C534/C534M No
Cellular
Exposed Lavatory Drains, Exposed Domestic Water Piping & Drains to Areas
for Handicapped Personnel
TABLE 1
Insulation Material for Piping
Service
Material Specification Type Class VR/VB Req'd
Mineral Fiber ASTM C547 No
Condensate Drain Located Inside Building

Cellular Glass ASTM C552 Yes
Note: VR/VB = Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier
TABLE 2
Piping Insulation Thickness (inch)

Do not use integral wicking material in Chilled water applications
exposed to outdoor ambient conditions in climatic zones 1 through 4.
Service
Material Tube And Pipe Size (inch)
Cold Domestic Water Piping, Makeup Water & Drinking Fountain Drain Piping
Cellular Glass 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Hot Domestic Water Supply & Recirculating Piping (Max 200 F)
Mineral Fiber 1 1 1 1.5 1.5
Refrigerant Suction Piping (35 degrees F nominal)
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular 1 1 1 N/A N/A
Compressed Air Discharge
Mineral Fiber 1.5 1.5 2 2 2
Exposed Lavatory Drains, Exposed Domestic Water Piping & Drains to Areas
for Handicapped Personnel
Mineral Fiber 1 1 1 1.5 1.5
Condensate Drain Located Inside Building
Cellular Glass 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
3.2.2 Aboveground Cold Pipelines
The following cold pipelines for minus 30 to plus 60 degrees F, shall be

insulated in accordance with Table 2 except those piping listed in
subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted. This includes but
is not limited to the following:
a. Make-up water.
b. Refrigerant suction lines.
c. Dual temperature water, i.e. heat recovery glycol solution water.
d. Air conditioner condensate drains.
e. Exposed lavatory drains and domestic water lines serving plumbing

fixtures for handicap persons.
f. Domestic cold and chilled drinking water.
3.2.2.1 Insulation Material and Thickness
Insulation thickness for cold pipelines shall be determined using Table 2.
3.2.2.2 Factory or Field applied Jacket
Insulation shall be covered with a factory applied vapor retarder

jacket/vapor barrier or field applied seal welded PVC jacket or greater
than 3 ply laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils
embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000
permeability, standard grade, sliver, white, black and embossed for use
with Mineral Fiber, Cellular Glass, and Phenolic Foam Insulated Pipe.
Insulation inside the building, to be protected with an aluminum jacket or
greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive (minimum 2
mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) product, less than 0.0000 permeability,
standard grade, Embossed Silver, White & Black, shall have the insulation
and vapor retarder jacket installed as specified herein. The aluminum
jacket or greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive
(minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) product, less than 0.0000
permeability, standard grade, embossed silver, White & Black, shall be
installed as specified for piping exposed to weather, except sealing of the
laps of the aluminum jacket is not required. In high abuse areas such as
janitor closets and traffic areas in equipment rooms, kitchens, and
mechanical rooms, aluminum jackets or greater than 3ply vapor
barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils
embossed) product, less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, embossed
silver, white & black, shall be provided for pipe insulation to the 6 ft
level.
3.2.2.3 Installing Insulation for Straight Runs Hot and Cold Pipe
a. Insulation shall be applied to the pipe with joints tightly butted.

All butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant and
sealed with a vapor retarder coating, greater than 3 ply laminate
jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape or PVDC adhesive tape.
b. Longitudinal laps of the jacket material shall overlap not less than
1-1/2 inches. Butt strips 3 inches wide shall be provided for
circumferential joints.
c. Laps and butt strips shall be secured with adhesive and stapled on 4
inch centers if not factory self-sealing. If staples are used, they
shall be sealed in accordance with item "e." below. Note that staples
are not required with cellular glass systems.
d. Factory self-sealing lap systems may be used when the ambient
temperature is between 40 and 120 degrees F during installation. The

lap system shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Stapler shall be used only if specifically
recommended by the manufacturer. Where gaps occur, the section shall
be replaced or the gap repaired by applying adhesive under the lap and
then stapling.
e. All Staples, including those used to repair factory self-seal lap

systems, shall be coated with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive
tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm
adhesive tape. All seams, except those on factory self-seal systems
shall be coated with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or
greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive
tape.
f. Breaks and punctures in the jacket material shall be patched by

wrapping a strip of jacket material around the pipe and securing it
with adhesive, stapling, and coating with vapor retarder coating or
PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than
0.0000 perm adhesive tape. The patch shall extend not less than 1-1/2
inches past the break.
g. At penetrations such as thermometers, the voids in the insulation shall

be filled and sealed with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape
or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive
tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm
adhesive tape.
h. Installation of flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be

by slitting the tubular sections and applying them onto the piping or
tubing. Alternately, whenever possible slide un-slit sections over the
open ends of piping or tubing. All seams and butt joints shall be
secured and sealed with adhesive. When using self seal products only
the butt joints shall be secured with adhesive. Insulation shall be
pushed on the pipe, never pulled. Stretching of insulation may result
in open seams and joints. All edges shall be clean cut. Rough or
jagged edges of the insulation shall not be permitted. Proper tools
such as sharp knives shall be used. Grade 1, Type II sheet insulation
when used on pipe larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around
the pipe. On pipes larger than 12 inches, adhere sheet insulation
directly to the pipe on the lower 1/3 of the pipe.
3.2.2.4 Insulation for Fittings and Accessories
a. Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of the

fittings and accessories. The butted joints and ends shall be sealed
with joint sealant and sealed with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC
adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000
perm adhesive tape.
b. Precut or preformed insulation shall be placed around all fittings and

accessories except as modified herein: 5 for anchors; 10, 11, and 13
for fittings; 14 for valves; and 17 for flanges and unions. Insulation
shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation, including same
density, thickness, and thermal conductivity. Where precut/preformed
is unavailable, rigid preformed pipe insulation sections may be
segmented into the shape required. Insulation of the same thickness
and conductivity as the adjoining pipe insulation shall be used. If
nesting size insulation is used, the insulation shall be overlapped 2
inches or one pipe diameter.
c. Upon completion of insulation installation on flanges, unions, valves,

anchors, fittings and accessories, terminations, seams, joints and
insulation not protected by factory vapor retarder jackets or PVC
fitting covers shall be protected with PVDC or greater than 3 ply
laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape or two coats of
vapor retarder coating with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch,
applied with glass tape embedded between coats. Tape seams shall
overlap 1 inch. The coating shall extend out onto the adjoining pipe
insulation 2 inches. Fabricated insulation with a factory vapor
retarder jacket shall be protected with either greater than 3 ply
laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape, standard grade,
silver, white, black and embossed or PVDC adhesive tape or two coats of
vapor retarder coating with a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch and with a
2 inch wide glass tape embedded between coats. Where fitting
insulation butts to pipe insulation, the joints shall be sealed with a
vapor retarder coating and a 4 inch wide ASJ tape which matches the
jacket of the pipe insulation.
d. Anchors attached directly to the pipe shall be insulated for a

sufficient distance to prevent condensation but not less than 6 inches
from the insulation surface.
e. Insulation shall be marked showing the location of unions, strainers,

and check valves.
3.2.2.5 Optional PVC Fitting Covers
At the option of the Contractor, premolded, one or two piece PVC fitting
covers may be used in lieu of the vapor retarder and embedded glass tape.
Factory precut or premolded insulation segments shall be used under the
fitting covers for elbows. Insulation segments shall be the same
insulation as the pipe insulation including same density, thickness, and
thermal conductivity. The covers shall be secured by PVC vapor retarder
tape, adhesive, seal welding or with tacks made for securing PVC covers.
Seams in the cover, and tacks and laps to adjoining pipe insulation jacket,
shall be sealed with vapor retarder tape to ensure that the assembly has a
continuous vapor seal.
3.2.3 Aboveground Hot Pipelines
3.2.3.1 General Requirements
All hot pipe lines above 60 degrees F, except those piping listed in
subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted, shall be insulated
in accordance with Table 2. This includes but is not limited to the
following:
a. Domestic hot water supply & re-circulating system.
b. Compressed air discharge.
3.2.3.2 Insulation for Fittings and Accessories
a. General. Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of

the fittings and accessories. The butted joints and ends shall be
sealed with joint sealant. Insulation shall be marked showing the
location of unions, strainers, check valves and other components that
would otherwise be hidden from view by the insulation.
b. Precut or Preformed. Precut or preformed insulation shall be placed

around all fittings and accessories. Insulation shall be the same
insulation as the pipe insulation, including same density, thickness,
and thermal conductivity.
c. Rigid Preformed. Where precut/preformed is unavailable, rigid preformed

pipe insulation sections may be segmented into the shape required.
Insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe
insulation shall be used. If nesting size insulation is used, the
insulation shall be overlapped 2 inches or one pipe diameter.
3.2.4 Piping Exposed to Weather
Piping exposed to weather shall be insulated and jacketed as specified for

the applicable service inside the building. After this procedure, a
laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor
barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000 permeability (greater
than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed aluminum
jacket or PVC jacket shall be applied. PVC jacketing requires no
factory-applied jacket beneath it, however an all service jacket shall be
applied if factory applied jacketing is not furnished. Flexible
elastomeric cellular insulation exposed to weather shall be treated in
accordance with paragraph INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR
INSULATION in PART 3.
3.2.4.1 Aluminum Jacket
The jacket for hot piping may be factory applied. The jacket shall overlap
not less than 2 inches at longitudinal and circumferential joints and shall
be secured with bands at not more than 12 inch centers. Longitudinal
joints shall be overlapped down to shed water and located at 4 or 8 o'clock
positions. Joints on piping 60 degrees F and below shall be sealed with
metal jacketing/flashing sealant while overlapping to prevent moisture
penetration. Where jacketing on piping 60 degrees F and below abuts an
un-insulated surface, joints shall be caulked to prevent moisture
penetration. Joints on piping above 60 degrees F shall be sealed with a
moisture retarder.
3.2.4.2 Insulation for Fittings
Flanges, unions, valves, fittings, and accessories shall be insulated and

finished as specified for the applicable service. Two coats of breather
emulsion type weatherproof mastic (impermeable to water, permeable to air)
recommended by the insulation manufacturer shall be applied with glass tape
embedded between coats. Tape overlaps shall be not less than 1 inch and
the adjoining aluminum jacket not less than 2 inches. Factory preformed
aluminum jackets may be used in lieu of the above. Molded PVC fitting
covers shall be provided when PVC jackets are used for straight runs of
pipe. PVC fitting covers shall have adhesive welded joints and shall be
weatherproof laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils
embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000
permeability, (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and
embossed, and UV resistant.
3.2.4.3 PVC Jacket
PVC jacket shall be ultraviolet resistant and adhesive welded weather tight
with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Installation shall include

provision for thermal expansion.
3.3 DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
Corner angles shall be installed on external corners of insulation on

ductwork in exposed finished spaces before covering with jacket. Duct
insulation shall be omitted on exposed supply and return ducts in air
conditioned spaces where the difference between supply air temperature and
room air temperature is less than 15 degrees F unless otherwise shown. Air
conditioned spaces shall be defined as those spaces directly supplied with
cooled conditioned air (or provided with a cooling device such as a
fan-coil unit) and heated conditioned air (or provided with a heating
device such as a unit heater, radiator or convector).
3.3.1 Duct Insulation Thickness
Duct insulation thickness shall be in accordance with Table 4.
Table 4 - Minimum Duct Insulation (inches)
Cold Air Ducts 2.0
Relief Ducts 1.5
Fresh Air Intake Ducts 1.5
Warm Air Ducts 2.0

Relief Ducts 1.5
Fresh Air Intake Ducts 1.5
3.3.2 Insulation and Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier for Cold Air Duct
Insulation and vapor retarder/vapor barrier shall be provided for the

following cold air ducts and associated equipment.
a. Supply ducts.
b. Return air ducts.
c. Relief ducts.
d. Flexible run-outs (field-insulated).
e. Plenums.
f. Duct-mounted coil casings.
g. Coil headers and return bends.
h. Coil casings.
i. Fresh air intake ducts.
j. Filter boxes.
k. Mixing boxes (field-insulated).
l. Supply fans (field-insulated).
m. Site-erected air conditioner casings.
n. Ducts exposed to weather.
Insulation for rectangular ducts shall be flexible type where concealed,

minimum density 3/4 pcf, and rigid type where exposed, minimum density 3 pcf.
Insulation for both concealed or exposed round/oval ducts shall be flexible
type, minimum density 3/4 pcf or a semi rigid board, minimum density 3 pcf,
formed or fabricated to a tight fit, edges beveled and joints tightly
butted and staggered. Insulation for all exposed ducts shall be provided
with either a white, paint-able, factory-applied Type I jacket or a field
applied vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket coating finish as specified,
the total field applied dry film thickness shall be approximately 1/16 inch.
Insulation on all concealed duct shall be provided with a factory-applied
Type I or II vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket. Duct insulation shall be
continuous through sleeves and prepared openings except firewall
penetrations. Duct insulation terminating at fire dampers, shall be
continuous over the damper collar and retaining angle of fire dampers,
which are exposed to unconditioned air and which may be prone to condensate
formation. Duct insulation and vapor retarder/vapor barrier shall cover
the collar, neck, and any un-insulated surfaces of diffusers, registers and
grills. Vapor retarder/vapor barrier materials shall be applied to form a
complete unbroken vapor seal over the insulation. Sheet Metal Duct shall
be sealed in accordance with Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION,
VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEM.
3.3.2.1 Installation on Concealed Duct
a. For rectangular, oval or round ducts, flexible insulation shall be

attached by applying adhesive around the entire perimeter of the duct in
6 inch wide strips on 12 inch centers.
b. For rectangular and oval ducts, 24 inches and larger insulation shall
be additionally secured to bottom of ducts by the use of mechanical
fasteners. Fasteners shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and not more
than 16 inches from duct corners.
c. For rectangular, oval and round ducts, mechanical fasteners shall be

provided on sides of duct risers for all duct sizes. Fasteners shall
be spaced on 16 inch centers and not more than 16 inches from duct
corners.
d. Insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners (self stick

pins) where used and shall be pressed thoroughly into the adhesive.
Care shall be taken to ensure vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket
joints overlap 2 inches. The insulation shall not be compressed to a
thickness less than that specified. Insulation shall be carried over
standing seams and trapeze-type duct hangers.
e. Where mechanical fasteners are used, self-locking washers shall be

installed and the pin trimmed and bent over.
f. Jacket overlaps shall be secured with staples and tape as necessary to

ensure a secure seal. Staples, tape and seams shall be coated with a
brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater
than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) - less

than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.
g. Breaks in the jacket material shall be covered with patches of the same
material as the vapor retarder jacket. The patches shall extend not
less than 2 inches beyond the break or penetration in all directions
and shall be secured with tape and staples. Staples and tape joints
shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC
adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive,
3 mils embossed) - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.
h. At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper

operating rods, voids in the insulation shall be filled and the
penetration sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC
adhesive tape greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3
mils embossed) - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.
i. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and flashed

with a reinforced vapor retarder coating finish or tape with a brush
coat of vapor retarder coating.. The coating shall overlap the
adjoining insulation and un-insulated surface 2 inches. Pin puncture
coatings shall extend 2 inches from the puncture in all directions.
j. Where insulation standoff brackets occur, insulation shall be extended

under the bracket and the jacket terminated at the bracket.
3.3.2.2 Installation on Exposed Duct Work
a. For rectangular ducts, rigid insulation shall be secured to the duct by

mechanical fasteners on all four sides of the duct, spaced not more than
12 inches apart and not more than 3 inches from the edges of the
insulation joints. A minimum of two rows of fasteners shall be
provided for each side of duct 12 inches and larger. One row shall be
provided for each side of duct less than 12 inches. Mechanical
fasteners shall be as corrosion resistant as G60 coated galvanized
steel, and shall indefinitely sustain a 50 lb tensile dead load test
perpendicular to the duct wall.
b. Form duct insulation with minimum jacket seams. Fasten each piece of
rigid insulation to the duct using mechanical fasteners. When the
height of projections is less than the insulation thickness, insulation
shall be brought up to standing seams, reinforcing, and other vertical
projections and shall not be carried over. Vapor retarder/barrier
jacket shall be continuous across seams, reinforcing, and projections.
When height of projections is greater than the insulation thickness,
insulation and jacket shall be carried over. Apply insulation with
joints tightly butted. Neatly bevel insulation around name plates and
access plates and doors.
c. Impale insulation on the fasteners; self-locking washers shall be

installed and the pin trimmed and bent over.
d. Seal joints in the insulation jacket with a 4 inch wide strip of tape.
Seal taped seams with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.
e. Breaks and ribs or standing seam penetrations in the jacket material

shall be covered with a patch of the same material as the jacket.
Patches shall extend not less than 2 inches beyond the break or
penetration and shall be secured with tape and stapled. Staples and
joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.
f. At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper

operating rods, the voids in the insulation shall be filled and the
penetrations sealed with a flashing sealant.
g. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and flashed

with a reinforced vapor retarder coating finish. The coating shall
overlap the adjoining insulation and un-insulated surface 2 inches.
Pin puncture coatings shall extend 2 inches from the puncture in all
directions.
h. Oval and round ducts, flexible type, shall be insulated with factory
Type I jacket insulation with minimum density of 3/4 pcf.
3.3.3 Insulation for Warm Air Duct
Insulation and vapor barrier shall be provided for the following warm air
ducts and associated equipment:.
a. Supply ducts.
b. Return air ducts.
c. Relief air ducts
d. Flexible run-outs (field insulated).
e. Plenums.
f. Duct-mounted coil casings.
g. Coil-headers and return bends.
h. Coil casings.
i. Fresh air intake ducts.
j. Filter boxes.
k. Mixing boxes.
l. Supply fans.
m. Site-erected air conditioner casings.
n. Ducts exposed to weather.
Insulation for rectangular ducts shall be flexible type where concealed,

and rigid type where exposed. Insulation on exposed ducts shall be
provided with a white, paint-able, factory-applied Type II jacket, or
finished with adhesive finish. Flexible type insulation shall be used for
round ducts, with a factory-applied Type II jacket. Insulation on
concealed duct shall be provided with a factory-applied Type II jacket.
Adhesive finish where indicated to be used shall be accomplished by
applying two coats of adhesive with a layer of glass cloth embedded between
the coats. The total dry film thickness shall be approximately 1/16 inch.
Duct insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and prepared openings.
Duct insulation shall terminate at fire dampers and flexible connections.
3.3.3.1 Installation on Concealed Duct
a. For rectangular, oval and round ducts, insulation shall be attached by

applying adhesive around the entire perimeter of the duct in 6 inch
wide strips on 12 inch centers.
b. For rectangular and oval ducts 24 inches and larger, insulation shall
be secured to the bottom of ducts by the use of mechanical fasteners.
Fasteners shall be spaced on 18 inch centers and not more than 18 inches
from duct corner.
c. For rectangular, oval and round ducts, mechanical fasteners shall be

provided on sides of duct risers for all duct sizes. Fasteners shall
be spaced on 18 inch centers and not more than 18 inches from duct
corners.
d. The insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners where

used. The insulation shall not be compressed to a thickness less than
that specified. Insulation shall be carried over standing seams and
trapeze-type hangers.
e. Self-locking washers shall be installed where mechanical fasteners are

used and the pin trimmed and bent over.
f. Insulation jacket shall overlap not less than 2 inches at joints and
the lap shall be secured and stapled on 4 inch centers.
3.3.3.2 Installation on Exposed Duct
a. For rectangular ducts, the rigid insulation shall be secured to the

duct by the use of mechanical fasteners on all four sides of the duct,
spaced not more than 16 inches apart and not more than 6 inches from
the edges of the insulation joints. A minimum of two rows of fasteners
shall be provided for each side of duct 12 inches and larger and a
minimum of one row for each side of duct less than 12 inches.
b. Duct insulation with factory-applied jacket shall be formed with

minimum jacket seams, and each piece of rigid insulation shall be
fastened to the duct using mechanical fasteners. When the height of
projection is less than the insulation thickness, insulation shall be
brought up to standing seams, reinforcing, and other vertical
projections and shall not be carried over the projection. Jacket shall
be continuous across seams, reinforcing, and projections. Where the
height of projections is greater than the insulation thickness,
insulation and jacket shall be carried over the projection.
c. Insulation shall be impaled on the fasteners; self-locking washers

shall be installed and pin trimmed and bent over.
d. Joints on jacketed insulation shall be sealed with a 4 inch wide strip

of tape and brushed with vapor retarder coating.
e. Breaks and penetrations in the jacket material shall be covered with a

patch of the same material as the jacket. Patches shall extend not
less than 2 inches beyond the break or penetration and shall be secured
with adhesive and stapled.
f. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed with tape and
brushed with vapor retarder coating.
g. Oval and round ducts, flexible type, shall be insulated with factory
Type I jacket insulation, minimum density of 3/4 pcf attached by
staples spaced not more than 16 inches and not more than 6 inches from
the degrees of joints. Joints shall be sealed in accordance with item
"d." above.
3.3.4 Ducts Handling Air for Dual Purpose
For air handling ducts for dual purpose below and above 60 degrees F, ducts
shall be insulated as specified for cold air duct.
3.3.5 Duct Test Holes
After duct systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced, breaks in the
insulation and jacket shall be repaired in accordance with the applicable
section of this specification for the type of duct insulation to be
repaired.
3.3.6 Duct Exposed to Weather
3.3.6.1 Installation
Ducts exposed to weather shall be insulated and finished as specified for

the applicable service for exposed duct inside the building. After the
above is accomplished, the insulation shall then be further finished as
detailed in the following subparagraphs.
3.3.6.2 Round Duct
Laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor

barrier/weatherproofing jacket - Less than 0.0000 permeability, (greater
than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or greater
than 8 ply, heavy duty, white and natural) membrane shall be applied
overlapping material by 3 inches no bands or caulking needed - see
manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. Aluminum jacket with
factory applied moisture retarder shall be applied with the joints lapped
not less than 3 inches and secured with bands located at circumferential
laps and at not more than 12 inch intervals throughout. Horizontal joints
shall lap down to shed water and located at 4 or 8 o'clock position.
Joints shall be sealed with metal jacketing sealant to prevent moisture
penetration. Where jacketing abuts an un-insulated surface, joints shall
be sealed with metal jacketing sealant.
3.3.6.3 Fittings
Fittings and other irregular shapes shall be finished as specified for

rectangular ducts.
3.3.6.4 Rectangular Ducts
Two coats of weather barrier mastic reinforced with fabric or mesh for
outdoor application shall be applied to the entire surface. Each coat of
weatherproof mastic shall be 1/16 inch minimum thickness. The exterior
shall be a metal jacketing applied for mechanical abuse and weather
protection, and secured with screws or vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket
less than 0.0000 permeability greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver,
white, black, and embossed or greater than 8 ply, heavy duty white and
natural. Membrane shall be applied overlapping material by 3 inches. No

bands or caulking needed-see manufacturing recommend installation
instructions.
3.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
3.4.1 General
Removable insulation sections shall be provided to cover parts of equipment

that must be opened periodically for maintenance including vessel covers,
fasteners, flanges and accessories. Equipment insulation shall be omitted
on the following:
a. Hand-holes.
b. Boiler manholes.
c. Cleanouts.
d. ASME stamps.
e. Manufacturer's nameplates.
f. Duct Test/Balance Test Holes.
3.4.2 Insulation for Cold Equipment
Cold equipment below 60 degrees F: Insulation shall be furnished on

equipment handling media below 60 degrees F including the following:
a. Pumps.
b. Refrigeration equipment parts that are not factory insulated.
c. Drip pans under chilled equipment.
d. Water softeners.
e. Duct mounted coils.
f. Pneumatic water tanks.
g. Roof drain bodies.
h. Air handling equipment parts that are not factory insulated.
i. Expansion and air separation tanks.
3.4.2.1 Insulation Type
Insulation shall be suitable for the temperature encountered. Material and

thicknesses shall be as shown in Table 5:
TABLE 5
Insulation Thickness for Cold Equipment (inches)
Equipment handling media at indicated temperature
Material Thickness
(inches)
35 to 60 degrees F
Cellular Glass 1.5
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular 1
1 to 34 degrees F
Cellular Glass 3
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular 1.5
Minus 30 to 0 degrees F
Cellular Glass 3.5
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular 1.75
3.4.2.2 Pump Insulation
a. Insulate pumps by forming a box around the pump housing. The box shall
be constructed by forming the bottom and sides using joints that do not
leave raw ends of insulation exposed. Joints between sides and between
sides and bottom shall be joined by adhesive with lap strips for rigid
mineral fiber and contact adhesive for flexible elastomeric cellular
insulation. Joints between top cover and sides shall fit tightly
forming a female shiplap joint on the side pieces and a male joint on
the top cover, thus making the top cover removable.
b. Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.
c. Upon completion of installation of the insulation, including removable

sections, two coats of vapor retarder coating shall be applied with a
layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats. The total dry
thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch. A parting line shall be
provided between the box and the removable sections allowing the
removable sections to be removed without disturbing the insulation
coating. Flashing sealant shall be applied to parting line, between
equipment and removable section insulation, and at all penetrations.
3.4.2.3 Other Equipment
a. Insulation shall be formed or fabricated to fit the equipment. To

ensure a tight fit on round equipment, edges shall be beveled and
joints shall be tightly butted and staggered.
b. Insulation shall be secured in place with bands or wires at intervals

as recommended by the manufacturer but not more than 12 inch centers
except flexible elastomeric cellular which shall be adhered with
contact adhesive. Insulation corners shall be protected under wires

and bands with suitable corner angles.
c. Cellular glass shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. Joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant, and
sealed with a vapor retarder coating.
d. Insulation on heads of heat exchangers shall be removable. Removable

section joints shall be fabricated using a male-female shiplap type
joint. The entire surface of the removable section shall be finished
by applying two coats of vapor retarder coating with a layer of glass
cloth embedded between the coats. The total dry thickness of the
finish shall be 1/16 inch.
e. Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.
f. Insulation on equipment with ribs shall be applied over 6 by 6 inches

by 12 gauge welded wire fabric which has been cinched in place, or if
approved by the Contracting Officer, spot welded to the equipment over
the ribs. Insulation shall be secured to the fabric with J-hooks and 2
by 2 inches washers or shall be securely banded or wired in place on 12
inch centers.
3.4.2.4 Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier
Upon completion of installation of insulation, penetrations shall be

caulked. Two coats of vapor retarder coating or vapor barrier jacket shall
be applied over insulation, including removable sections, with a layer of
open mesh synthetic fabric embedded between the coats. The total dry
thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch. Flashing sealant or vapor
barrier tape shall be applied to parting line between equipment and
removable section insulation.
3.4.3 Insulation for Hot Equipment
Insulation shall be furnished on equipment handling media above 60 degrees F

including the following:
a. Converters.
b. Heat exchangers.
c. Hot water generators.
d. Water heaters.
e. Pumps handling media above 130 degrees F.
f. Hot water storage tanks.
g. Air separation tanks.
h. Surge tanks.
3.4.3.1 Insulation
Insulation shall be suitable for the temperature encountered. Shell and

tube-type heat exchangers shall be insulated for the temperature of the
shell medium.
Insulation thickness for hot equipment shall be determined using Table 6:
TABLE 6
Insulation Thickness for Hot Equipment (inches)
Equipment handling steam a at indicated pressure or temperature limit
Material Thickness
(inches)
15 psig or 250 degrees F
Rigid Mineral Fiber 2

Flexible Mineral Fiber 2
Calcium Silicate/Perlite 4
Cellular Glass 3
Faced Phenolic Foam 1.5
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular (<200 F) 1
3.4.3.2 Insulation of Pumps
Insulate pumps by forming a box around the pump housing. The box shall be
constructed by forming the bottom and sides using joints that do not leave
raw ends of insulation exposed. Bottom and sides shall be banded to form a
rigid housing that does not rest on the pump. Joints between top cover and
sides shall fit tightly. The top cover shall have a joint forming a female
shiplap joint on the side pieces and a male joint on the top cover, making
the top cover removable. Two coats of Class I adhesive shall be applied
over insulation, including removable sections, with a layer of glass cloth
embedded between the coats. A parting line shall be provided between the
box and the removable sections allowing the removable sections to be
removed without disturbing the insulation coating. The total dry thickness
of the finish shall be 1/16 inch. Caulking shall be applied to parting
line of the removable sections and penetrations.
3.4.3.3 Other Equipment
a. Insulation shall be formed or fabricated to fit the equipment. To

ensure a tight fit on round equipment, edges shall be beveled and
joints shall be tightly butted and staggered.
b. Insulation shall be secured in place with bands or wires at intervals

as recommended by the manufacturer but not greater than 12 inch centers
except flexible elastomeric cellular which shall be adhered.
Insulation corners shall be protected under wires and bands with
suitable corner angles.
c. On high vibration equipment, cellular glass insulation shall be set in

a coating of bedding compound as recommended by the manufacturer, and
joints shall be sealed with bedding compound. Mineral fiber joints
shall be filled with finishing cement.
d. Insulation on heads of heat exchangers shall be removable. The

removable section joint shall be fabricated using a male-female shiplap
type joint. Entire surface of the removable section shall be finished
as specified.
e. Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.
f. On equipment with ribs, such as boiler flue gas connection, draft fans,
and fly ash or soot collectors, insulation shall be applied over 6 by 6
inch by 12 gauge welded wire fabric which has been cinched in place, or
if approved by the Contracting Officer, spot welded to the equipment
over the ribs. Insulation shall be secured to the fabric with J-hooks
and 2 by 2 inch washers or shall be securely banded or wired in place on
12 inch (maximum) centers.
g. On equipment handling media above 600 degrees F, insulation shall be

applied in two or more layers with joints staggered.
h. Upon completion of installation of insulation, penetrations shall be

caulked. Two coats of adhesive shall be applied over insulation,
including removable sections, with a layer of glass cloth embedded
between the coats. The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16
inch. Caulking shall be applied to parting line between equipment and
removable section insulation.
3.4.4 Equipment Handling Dual Temperature Media
Below and above 60 degrees F: equipment handling dual temperature media

shall be insulated as specified for cold equipment.
3.4.5 Equipment Exposed to Weather
3.4.5.1 Installation
Equipment exposed to weather shall be insulated and finished in accordance

with the requirements for ducts exposed to weather in paragraph DUCT
INSULATION INSTALLATION.
3.4.5.2 Optional Panels
At the option of the Contractor, prefabricated metal insulation panels may

be used in lieu of the insulation and finish previously specified. Thermal
performance shall be equal to or better than that specified for field
applied insulation. Panels shall be the standard catalog product of a
manufacturer of metal insulation panels. Fastenings, flashing, and support
system shall conform to published recommendations of the manufacturer for
weatherproof installation and shall prevent moisture from entering the
insulation. Panels shall be designed to accommodate thermal expansion and
to support a 250 pound walking load without permanent deformation or
permanent damage to the insulation. Exterior metal cover sheet shall be
aluminum and exposed fastenings shall be stainless steel or aluminum.
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS

01/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL (AABC)
ACG Commissioning Guideline (2005) Commissioning Guideline
NEBB Commissioning Standard (2009) Procedural Standards for Whole

Building Systems Commissioning of New
Construction; 3rd Edition

(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1429 (1994) HVAC Systems Commissioning Manual,

1st Edition
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)
LEED NC (2009) Leadership in Energy and

Environmental Design(tm) New Construction
Rating System
1.2 DEFINITIONS
In some instances, terminology differs between the Contract and the

Commissioning Standard primarily because the intent of this Section is to
use the industry standards specified, along with additional requirements
listed herein to produce optimal results. The following table of similar
terms is provided for clarification only. Contract requirements take
precedent over the corresponding ACG, NEBB, or TABB requirements where
differences exist.
SIMILAR TERMS
Contract Term ACG NEBB TABB
Commissioning ACG Commissioning Procedural SMACNA HVAC

Standard Guideline Standards for Commissioning
Building Systems Guidelines
Commissioning
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 1

SIMILAR TERMS
Contract Term ACG NEBB TABB
Commissioning ACG Certified NEBB Qualified TABB Certified

Specialist Commissioning Commissioning Commissioning
Agent Administrator Supervisor
1.3.1 General
Perform Commissioning in accordance with the requirements of the standard

under which the Commissioning Firm's qualifications are approved, i.e.,
ACG Commissioning Guideline, NEBB Commissioning Standard, or SMACNA 1429
unless otherwise stated herein. Consider mandatory all recommendations and
suggested practices contained in the Commissioning Standard. Use the
Commissioning Standard for all aspects of Commissioning, including
qualifications for the Commissioning Firm and Specialist and calibration of
Commissioning instruments. Where the instrument manufacturer calibration
recommendations are more stringent than those listed in the Commissioning
Standard, the manufacturer's recommendations shall be adhered to. All
quality assurance provisions of the Commissioning Standard such as
performance guarantees shall be part of this contract. For systems or
system components not covered in the Commissioning Standard, Commissioning
procedures shall be developed by the Commissioning Specialist. Where new
procedures, requirements, etc., applicable to the Contract requirements
have been published or adopted by the body responsible for the
Commissioning Standard used (ACG, NEBB, or TABB), the requirements and
recommendations contained in these procedures and requirements shall be
considered mandatory.
1.3.2 Energy
Formal LEED NC certification is not required.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Commissioning Plan; G,
SD-03 Product Data
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklists; G,

Functional Performance Tests; G,
SD-06 Test Reports
Commissioning Report; G
SD-07 Certificates
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 2

Commissioning Firm; G
Commissioning Specialist; G
1.5.1 Commissioning Firm
Submit certification of the proposed Commissioning Firm's qualifications to

perform the duties specified herein and in other related Sections, no later
than 21 days after the Notice to Proceed. Include in the documentation the
date that the Certification was initially granted and the date when the
current Certification expires. The firm is either a member of ACG or
certified by the NEBB or the TABB and certified in all categories and
functions where measurements or performance are specified on the plans and
specifications. Any lapses in Certification of the proposed Commissioning
Firm or disciplinary action taken by ACG, NEBB, or TABB against the
proposed Commissioning Firm shall be described in detail. The
certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of duties
specified herein. If, for any reason, the firm loses subject certification
during this period, immediately notify the Contracting Officer and submit
another Commissioning Firm for approval. Any firm that has been the
subject of disciplinary action by the ACG, the NEBB, or the TABB within the
five years preceding Contract Award is not eligible to perform any duties
related to the HVAC systems, including Commissioning. All work specified
in this Section and in other related Sections to be performed by the
Commissioning Firm shall be considered invalid if the Commissioning Firm
loses its certification prior to Contract completion and must be performed
by an approved successor. These Commissioning services are to assist the
prime Contractor in performing the quality oversight for which it is
responsible. The Commissioning Firm shall be a subcontractor of the prime
Contractor and shall be financially and corporately independent of all
other subcontractors. The Commissioning Firm shall report to and be paid
by the Government.
1.5.2 Commissioning Specialist
1.5.2.1 General
Submit certification of the proposed Commissioning Specialist's

qualifications to perform the duties specified herein and in other related
Sections, no later than 21 days after the Notice to Proceed. The
documentation shall include the date that the Certification was initially
granted and the date when the current Certification expires. The
Commissioning Specialist shall be an ACG Certified Commissioning Agent, a
NEBB Qualified Commissioning Administrator, or a TABB Certified
Commissioning Supervisor and shall be an employee of the approved
Commissioning Firm. Any lapses in Certification of the proposed
Commissioning Specialist or disciplinary action taken by ACG, NEBB, or TABB
against the proposed Commissioning Specialist shall be described in
detail. The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of
duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the Commissioning Specialist
loses subject certification during this period, immediately notify the
Contracting Officer and submit another Commissioning Specialist for
approval. Any individual that has been the subject of disciplinary action
by the ACG, the NEBB, or the TABB within the five years preceding Contract
Award is not eligible to perform any duties related to the HVAC systems,
including Commissioning. All work specified in this Section and in other
related Sections performed by the Commissioning Specialist shall be
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 3

considered invalid if the Commissioning Specialist loses certification

prior to Contract completion and must be performed by the approved
successor.
1.5.2.2 Responsibilities
Perform all Commissioning work specified herein and in related sections

under the direct guidance of the Commissioning Specialist. The
Commissioning Specialist shall prepare, no later than 28 days after the
approval of the Commissioning Specialist, the Commissioning Plan which will
be a comprehensive schedule and will include all submittal requirements for
procedures, notifications, reports and the Commissioning Report. After
approval of the Commissioning Plan, revise the Contract NAS schedule to
reflect the schedule requirements in the Commissioning Plan.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
Begin the work described in this Section only after all work required in
related Sections has been successfully completed, and all test and
inspection reports and operation and maintenance manuals required in these
Sections have been submitted and approved. Pre-Functional Performance Test
Checklists shall be performed at appropriate times during the construction
phase of the Contract.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COMMISSIONING TEAM AND TEST FORMS AND CHECKLISTS
Designate Contractor team members to participate in the Pre- Functional

Performance Test Checklists and the Functional Performance Tests specified
herein. In addition, the Government team members will include a
representative of the Contracting Officer, the Design Agent's
Representative, and the Using Agency's Representative. The team members
shall be as follows:
Designation Function
A Contractor's Commissioning Specialist
M Contractor's Mechanical Representative
E Contractor's Electrical Representative
T Contractor's Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

(TAB) Specialist
C Contractor's Controls Representative
D Design Agency Representative
O Contracting Officer's Representative
U Using Agency's Representative
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 4

Appendices A and B shall be completed by the commissioning team.

Acceptance by each commissioning team member of each Pre- Functional
Performance Test Checklist item shall be indicated by initials and date
unless an "X" is shown indicating that participation by that individual is
not required. Acceptance by each commissioning team member of each
functional performance test item shall be indicated by signature and date.
3.2 TESTS
Perform the pre-functional performance test checklists and functional

performance tests in a manner that essentially duplicates the checking,
testing, and inspection methods established in the related Sections. Where
checking, testing, and inspection methods are not specified in other
Sections, establish methods which will provide the information required.
Testing and verification required by this section shall be performed during
the Commissioning phase. Requirements in related Sections are independent
from the requirements of this Section and shall not be used to satisfy any
of the requirements specified in this Section. Provide all materials,
services, and labor required to perform the pre- functional performance
tests checks and functional performance tests. A functional performance
test shall be aborted if any system deficiency prevents the successful
completion of the test or if any participating non-Government commissioning
team member of which participation is specified is not present for the test.
3.2.1 Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklists
Perform Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklists, for the items indicated

in Appendix A, at least 28 days prior to the start of Pre-Functional
Performance Test Checks.. Correct and re-inspect deficiencies discovered
during these checks in accordance with the applicable contract
requirements. Submit the schedule for the test checks at least 14 days
prior to the start of Pre-Functional Performance Test Checks.
3.2.2 Functional Performance Tests
Submit test procedures at least 28 days prior to the start of Functional

Performance Tests. Submit the schedule for the tests at least 14 days
prior to the start of Functional Performance Tests. Perform Functional
Performance Tests for the items indicated in Appendix B. Begin Functional
Performance Tests only after all Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklists
have been successfully completed. Tests shall prove all modes of the
sequences of operation, and shall verify all other relevant contract
requirements. Begin Tests with equipment or components and progress
through subsystems to complete systems. Upon failure of any Functional
Performance Test item, correct all deficiencies in accordance with the
applicable contract requirements. The item shall then be retested until it
has been completed with no errors.
3.3 COMMISSIONING REPORT
Submit the Commissioning Report, no later than 14 days after completion of

Functional Performance Tests, consisting of completed Pre- Functional
Performance Test Checklists and completed Functional Performance Tests
organized by system and by subsystem and submitted as one package. The
Commissioning Report shall also include all HVAC systems test reports,
inspection reports (Preparatory, Initial and Follow-up inspections),
start-up reports, TAB report, TAB verification report, Controls start-up
test reports and Controls Performance Verification Test (PVT) report. The
results of failed tests shall be included along with a description of the
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 5

corrective action taken.
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 6

APPENDIX A
PRE-FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST CHECKLISTS
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Rooftop Air Handling Unit
For Rooftop Air Handling Unit: _____
Checklist Item A M E T C O
Installation
a. Inspection and access doors are operable

and sealed. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
b. Condensate drainage is unobstructed.

(Visually verify pan drains completely by
pouring a cup of water into drain pan.) ___ ___ X X X ___
c. Fan belt adjusted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
Electrical A M E T C O
a. Power available to unit disconnect. ___ X ___ X X ___
b. Power available to unit control panel. ___ X ___ X X ___
c. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ X ___ ___ X ___
d. Verify that power disconnect is located

within sight of the unit it controls. ___ X ___ X X ___
Coils A M E T C O
a. Propane gas piping properly connected. ___ ___ X X X ___
b. Refrigerant piping properly connected. ___ ___ X X X ___
Controls A M E T C O
a. Control valves/actuators properly

installed. ___ X X X ___ ___
b. Control valves/actuators operable. ___ X X X ___ ___
c. O/A dampers/actuators properly installed. ___ X X X ___ ___
d. O/A dampers/actuators operable. ___ X X X ___ ___
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Rooftop Air Handling Unit

(cont)
A M E T C O
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 7

e. Dampers/actuators properly
installed & dampers leak checked. ___ X X X ___ ___
f. Dampers/actuators operable. ___ X X X ___ ___
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) A M E T C O
a. Construction filters removed and

replaced. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
b. TAB report approved. ___ X X ___ X
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 8

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - DX Air Cooled Condensing Unit

(including Rooftop Unit ACCU)
For Condensing Unit: _____
Installation
a. Check condenser fans for proper rotation. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
b. Power available to unit control panel. ___ X ___ X ___ ___
c. Verify that power disconnect is located

within sight of the unit it controls ___ X ___ X ___ ___
a. Unit safety/protection devices tested. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
b. Control system and interlocks installed. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
c. Control system and interlocks

operational. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 9

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Pumps
For Pump: _____
Installation
a. Piping system installed. ___ ___ X X X ___
a. Power available to pump disconnect. ___ X ___ X X ___
b. Pump rotation verified. ___ X ___ X X ___
c. Control system interlocks functional. ___ X ___ X ___ ___
a. Pressure/temperature gauges installed. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
b. TAB Report approved. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 10

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - VRF Fan Coil Unit
For Fan Coil Unit: _____
Checklist Item
Installation A M E T C O
a. Access doors/removable panels are operable

and sealed. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
b. Condensate drainage is unobstructed. ___ ___ X X X ___
a. Power available to unit disconnect. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
b. Power available to unit control panel. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
c. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ ___ ___ ___ X ___

within sight of the unit it controls. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
Coils A M E T C O
a. Refrigerant piping properly

connected. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___

installed. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
b. Control valves/actuators operable. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
c. Verify proper location and installation

of thermostat. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
a. TAB Report approved. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 11

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - DS- & DHP-Ductless Split System
For Unit: _____
Checklist Item
a. Access doors/removable panels

are operable and sealed. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
b. Condensate drainage is obstructed. ___ ___ X X X ___
d. Verify that power disconnect is

located within sight of the unit it controls. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
Coils A M E T C O
a. Refrigerant piping properly connected. ___ __ X ___ ___ ___
a. Verify proper location and installation

of thermostat ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 12

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Unit Heater
For Unit Heater: _____
Checklist Item
b. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ ___ ___ X X ___

d. Power available to electric heating coil. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
a. Verify proper location and installation of

thermostat. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 13

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Exhaust Fan
For Exhaust Fan: _____
Checklist Item
a. Fan belt adjusted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
a. Power available to fan disconnect. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
b. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ ___ ___ ___ X ___

a. Control interlocks properly installed. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
b. Control interlocks operable. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
c. Dampers/actuators properly installed. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
d. Dampers/actuators operable. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
e. Verify proper location and installation of

thermostat. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 14

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - HVAC System Controls
For HVAC System: _____
Checklist Item
a. Layout of control panel matches drawings. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
b. Framed instructions mounted in or near

control panel. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
c. Components properly labeled (on inside and

outside of panel). ___ ___ X X ___ ___
d. Control components piped and/or wired to

each labeled terminal strip. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
e. EMCS connection made to each labeled

terminal strip as shown. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
f. Control wiring and tubing labeled at all

terminations, splices, and junctions. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
Main Power and Control Air
a. 120 volt AC power available to panel. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
b. 20 psig
compressed air available to panel. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
a. TAB Report submitted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 15

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Single Zone Air Handling Unit
For Air Handling Unit: _____
Checklist Item

and sealed. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
b. Condensate drainage is unobstructed. ___ ___ X X X ___
a. Power available to unit disconnect. ___ ___ ___ X X ___

e. Power available to electric heating coil. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
Coils A M E T C O
a. Refrigerant piping properly connected. ___ ___ X X X ___
a. Dampers/actuators properly installed. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
b. Dampers/actuators operable. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
c. Verify proper location and installation

of thermostat. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 16

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Make-Up Air Handling Unit
For Make-Up Air Handling Unit: _____
Checklist Item

and sealed. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
b. Condensate drainage is obstructed.

(Visually verify pan drains completely by
pouring a cup of water into drain pan.) ___ ___ X X X ___
b. Power available to unit control panel. ___ X ___ X X ___
c. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ X ___ ___ X ___
d. Verify that power disconnect is

located within sight of the unit it controls. ___ X ___ X X ___
e. Power available to electric heating coil ___ X ___ X X ___
Coils A M E T C O
a. Refrigerant piping properly connected. ___ __ X X X ___

installed. ___ X X X ___ ___
b. Control valves/actuators operable. ___ X X X ___ ___
c. O/A dampers/actuators properly installed. ___ X X X ___ ___
d. O/A dampers/actuators operable. ___ X X X ___ ___
e. Zone dampers/actuators properly

installed & dampers leak checked. ___ X X X ___ ___
f. Zone dampers/actuators operable. ___ X X X ___ ___
a. Construction filters removed and

replaced. X X
b. TAB Report approved. ___ ___ X X __ X ___
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 17

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Energy Recovery System
For Energy Recovery System: _____
Checklist Item
a. Recovery system piping installed. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
Startup A M E T C O
a. Startup and checkout complete. ___ ___ X X X ___

installed. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
b. Control valves/actuators operable. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
- End of Appendix A -
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 18

APPENDIX B
FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS CHECKLISTS
Functional Performance Test - Pump P-
NOTE: Prior to performing this test, for closed loop systems ensure that
the system is pressurized and the make-up water system is operational.
1. Activate pump start using control system commands.
a. Verify correct operation in:
HAND__________ OFF__________ AUTO__________
b. Verify pressure drop across strainer:
Strainer inlet pressure __________ psig
Strainer outlet pressure _________ psig
c. Verify pump inlet/outlet pressure reading, compare to Testing,

Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Report and pump design conditions.
DESIGN TAB ACTUAL
Pump inlet pressure psig _________ __________ __________
Pump outlet pressure psig _________ __________ __________
d. Operate pump at shutoff and at 100 percent of designed flow when all
components are in full flow. Plot test readings on pump curve and
compare results against readings taken from flow measuring devices.
SHUTOFF 100 percent
Pump inlet pressure psig __________ __________
Pump outlet pressure psig __________ __________
Pump flow rate gpm __________ __________
SETPOINT
Differential Pressure Transmitter ________
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 19

Functional Performance Test (cont) - Pump P-
e. For variable speed pumps, operate pump at shutoff (shutoff to be done in

manual on variable speed drive at the minimum rpm that the system is being
controlled at) and at minimum flow or when all components are in full
by-pass. Plot test readings on pump curve and compare results against
readings taken from flow measuring devices.
SHUTOFF 100 percent

Pump inlet pressure psig __________ __________
Pump outlet pressure psig __________ __________
Pump flow rate gpm __________ __________
SETPOINT
Differential Pressure Transmitter ________
2. Measure motor amperage each phase and voltage phase to phase and phase
to ground for both the full flow and the minimum flow conditions. Compare
amperage to nameplate FLA.
a. Full flow:
Nameplate FLA __________
Amperage Phase 1 __________ Phase 2__________ Phase 3__________
Voltage Ph1-Ph2 __________ Ph1-Ph3__________ Ph2-Ph3__________
Voltage Ph1-gnd __________ Ph2-gnd__________ Ph3-gnd__________
b. Minimum flow:
Amperage Phase 1 __________ Phase 2__________ Phase 3__________
Voltage Ph1-Ph2 __________ Ph1-Ph3__________ Ph2-Ph3__________
Voltage Ph1-gnd __________ Ph2-gnd__________ Ph3-gnd__________
3. Note unusual vibration, noise, etc.
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 20

Functional Performance Test (cont) - Pump P-
4. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the above functional

performance tests and certify that the item tested has met the performance
requirements in this section of the specifications.
Signature and Date
Contractor's Commissioning Specialist _____________________________
Contractor's Mechanical Representative _____________________________
Contractor's Electrical Representative _____________________________
Contractor's TAB Representative _____________________________
Contractor's Controls Representative _____________________________
Contracting Officer's Representative _____________________________
Design Agency Representative _____________________________
Using Agency's Representative _____________________________
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 21

Functional Performance Test Checklist - Single Zone Air Handling Unit
For Air Handling Unit: _____
1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall verify operation of air

handling unit in accordance with specification including the following:
a. Ensure that a slight negative pressure exists on inboard side of the

outside air dampers throughout the operation of the dampers. Modulate OA,
RA, and EA dampers from fully open to fully closed positions.
a. The following shall be verified when the supply fan operating

mode is initiated:
(1) All dampers in normal position prior to fan start___________.
(2) All valves in normal position prior to fan start____________.
(3) System safeties allow start if safety conditions are met. ___
b. Occupied mode of operation - economizer de-energized.
(1) Outside air damper at minimum position.______________________
(2) Return air damper open.______________________________________
(3) Relief air damper at minimum position.____________
c. Occupied mode of operation - economizer energized.
(1) Outside air damper modulated to maintain mixed air

temperature set point. Setpoint _______deg F Actual _____deg F O/A damper
position ___________ percent Return Air Temperature_____deg F Outside Air
Temperature _______ deg F
(2) Relief air damper modulates with outside air damper according
to sequence of operation. Relief air damper position ________ percent
(3) Chilled water control valve modulating to maintain space

cooling temperature set point. Setpoint _______deg F Actual _____deg F
Return sensor overrides to normal operation.
d. Unoccupied mode of operation.

(1) Observe fan starts when space temperature calls for
heating/cooling ____.
(2) All dampers in normal position. _________________________
(3) Verify low limit space temperature is maintained as
specified in sequence of operation. ______________________________________
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 22

Functional Performance Test Checklist (cont) - Single Zone Air Handling Unit
e. The following shall be verified when the supply fan off mode is
initiated:
(1) All dampers in normal position.______________________________
(2) All valves in normal position._______________________________
(3) Fan de-energizes. ___________________________________________
f. Verify DX coil operation by varying thermostat set point from

cooling set point to heating set point and returning to cooling set
point________.
g. Verify safety shut down initiated by low temperature protection

thermostat________.
h. Verify occupancy schedule is programmed into time

clock/UMCS________.
2. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the above

functional performance tests and certify that the item tested has met the
performance requirements in this section of the specifications.
Signature and Date
Contractor's Commissioning Specialist ____________________________
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 23

Functional Performance Test Checklist - Rooftop Air Handling Unit
For Rooftop Air Handling Unit: _____
1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall verify operation of air

handling unit in accordance with specification including the following:
a. Ensure that a slight negative pressure exists on inboard side

of the outside air dampers throughout the operation of the dampers.
Modulate OA, RA, and EA dampers from fully open to fully closed positions.
b. The following shall be verified when the supply and return fans
operating mode is initiated:
(1) All dampers in normal position. _____________________________
(2) All valves in normal position. ______________________________
(3) System safeties allow start if safety conditions are met. ___
b. Occupied mode of operation - economizer de-energized.
(1) Outside air damper at minimum position. _____________________
c. Occupied mode of operation. Note outside air temperature sensors

may need to be simulated.
(1) Outside air damper modulates to maintain mixed air

temperature set point. Setpoint _______deg F Actual _____deg F Return Air
Temperature _______deg F Outside Air Temperature _______deg F
___________________________________________
(2)DX solenoid valve modulating to maintain cold deck supply air

temperature set point. Setpoint ______deg F Actual _____deg F
(3)Propane Gas control valve modulating to maintain hot deck

supply air temperature set point input from outside air temperature
controller. Setpoint _______deg F Actual _____deg F O/A ______ deg F
Return temperature sensors to normal operation.
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 24

Functional Performance Test Checklist (cont) - Rooftop Air Handling Unit
d. Unoccupied mode of operation note time clock and space

temperature sensor may require simulation.
(4) Observe fan starts when space temperature calls for heating/cooling.
(5) All dampers in normal position. ___________________________
(6) Verify low limit space temperature is maintained as specified in
sequence of operation. _____________________________________
e. The following shall be verified when the supply and return fans
off mode is initiated:
(1) All dampers in normal position. ____________________________
(2) All valves in normal position. _____________________________
(3) Fan de-energizes. __________________________________________

Note: return time clock and space temperature sensors to normal operation.
f. Verify zone damper operation by varying zone thermostat set

points from cooling set point to heating set point and returning to cooling
set point. ________________________________________________________________
g. Verify safety shut down initiated by low temperature protection

thermostat. _____________________________________________________________
h. Index room thermostats to full cooling then to full heating.

Measure and record cold deck, hot deck, and supply air temperatures and
determine damper leakage.
Cold supply air temperature __________ degrees F

Hot supply air temperature __________ degrees F
Zone _______
Zone ____ Supply Air Temperature at Max Cooling _______deg F
Zone ____ Supply Air Temperature at Max Heating _______deg F
Zone ____Hot Deck Damper leakage at Max cooling _______CFM
Zone ____Cold Deck Damper leakage at Max heating _______CFM
Zone _______
Zone ____ Supply Air Temperature at Max Cooling _______deg F
Zone ____ Supply Air Temperature at Max Heating _______deg F
Zone ____Hot Deck Damper leakage at Max cooling _______CFM
Zone ____Cold Deck Damper leakage at Max heating _______CFM
i. Verify occupancy schedule is programmed into time

clock/UMCS________.
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 25

Functional Performance Test Checklist (cont) - Rooftop Air Handling Unit

Signature and Date
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 26

Functional Performance Test Checklist - Air Cooled Condensing Unit

(including Rooftop Unit ACCU)
For Condensing Unit: _____
1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation

of refrigeration system in accordance with specifications including the
following: Start building air handler to provide load for condensing
unit. Activate controls system start sequence as follows.
a. Start air handling unit. Verify control system energizes

condensing unit start sequence. __________________________________________
b. Verify and record data in 2 and 3 below.

c. Shut off air handling equipment to verify condensing unit
de-energizes. ___________________________________________________________
d. Restart air handling equipment one minute after condensing unit

shut down. Verify condensing unit restart sequence. _____________________
2. Verify condensing unit amperage each phase and voltage phase to phase
and phase to ground.
Motor Full-Load Amps __________
Amperage Phase 1 __________ Phase 2__________ Phase 3_______
Voltage Ph1-Ph2 __________ Ph1-Ph3__________ Ph2-Ph3_______
Voltage Ph1-gnd __________ Ph2-gnd__________ Ph3-gnd_______
3. Record the following information:

Ambient dry bulb temperature __________ degrees F
Suction pressure __________ psig
Discharge pressure __________ psig
4. Unusual vibration, noise, etc.
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________

Signature and Date
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 27

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 28

Functional Performance Test Checklist - VRF Fan Coil Units
The Contracting Officer will select fan coil units to be spot-checked

during the functional performance test. The number of terminals shall not
exceed 10 percent. DX systems must be in operation providing design
refrigerant temperatures.

of selected fan coils in accordance with specifications including the
following:
a. Cooling/heating fan coils:
(1) Verify fan coil unit response to room temp set point
adjustment.
1. Check blower fan airflow. _____ cfm
2. Check cooling mode inlet air temperature. _____deg F

3. Check cooling mode outlet air temperature. _____deg F
4. Calculate cooling coil sensible capacity and compare to
design:
5. Calculated _________BTU/hr Design_____BTU/hr
6. Check heating mode inlet air temperature. _____ deg F

7. Check heating mode outlet air temperature. _____deg F
8. Calculate heating coil capacity and compare to design:
Calculated______BTU/hr design_______BTU/hr

Signature and Date
Contractor's Electrical Representative ______________________________
Contractor's TAB Representative ______________________________
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 29

Functional Performance Test Checklist - Ductless Split System Units
The Contracting Officer will select fan coil units to be spot-checked

exceed 10 percent. DX systems must be in operation providing design
refrigerant temperatures.
1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of

selected fan coils in accordance with specifications including the following:
a. Cooling/heating fan coils:
(1) Verify fan coil unit response to room temp set point
adjustment.
1. Check blower fan airflow. _____ cfm
2. Check cooling mode inlet air temperature. _____deg F
3. Check cooling mode outlet air temperature. _____deg F
4. Calculate cooling coil sensible capacity and compare to design:
5. Calculated _________BTU/hr Design_____BTU/hr
6. Check heating mode inlet air temperature. _____ deg F
7. Check heating mode outlet air temperature. _____deg F
8. Calculate heating coil capacity and compare to design:
Calculated______BTU/hr design_______BTU/hr
2. Record the following information:
Ambient dry bulb temperature. deg F
3. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the above functional

performance tests and certify that the item tested has met the performance
Signature and Date
Contractor's Electrical Representative ______________________________
Contractor's TAB Representative ______________________________
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 30

Functional Performance Test Checklist - Unit Heaters
The Contracting Officer will select unit heaters to be spot-checked

exceed 10 percent.

of selected unit heaters:
a. Verify unit heater response to room temperature set point

adjustment.___________________________________
b. Check heating mode inlet air temperature. _____ deg F
c. Check heating mode outlet air temperature. _____ deg F
d. Record manufacturer's submitted fan capacity _____cfm
e. Calculate unit heater capacity using manufacturer's fan capacity
and recorded temperatures and compare to design.
f. Calculated_____BTU/hr Design______BTU/hr

Signature and Date
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 31

Functional Performance Test Checklist - HVAC Controls
For HVAC System: _____
The Contracting Officer will select HVAC control systems to undergo

functional performance testing. The number of systems shall not exceed 10
percent. Perform this test simultaneously with FPT for AHU or other
controlled equipment.
1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall verify operation of

HVAC controls by performing the Performance Verification Test (PVT) test
for that system. Contractor to provide blank PVT test procedures previously
done by the controls Contractor.
2. Verify interlock with UMCS system______.
3. Verify all required I/O points function from the UMCS system_____.
4. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the Performance

Verification Test and certify that the item tested has met the performance
Signature and Date
Contractor's Commissioning Specialist _________________________
Contractor's Mechanical Representative ___________________________
Contractor's Electrical Representative ___________________________
Contractor's TAB Representative ___________________________
Contractor's Controls Representative ___________________________
Design Agency Representative ___________________________
Contractor's Officer's Representative ___________________________
Using Agency's Representative ___________________________
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 32

Functional Performance Test Checklist - Energy Recovery System
For Energy Recovery System: _____

of energy recovery system in accordance with specifications including the
following: Start equipment to provide energy source for recovery system.
a. Verify energy source is providing recoverable energy.____________
b. Verify recovery system senses available energy and activates.____
2. Verify recovery system inlet/outlet readings, compare to design

conditions and manufacturer's performance data.
Design Actual
Primary loop inlet temp (degrees F) __________ __________
Primary loop outlet temp (degrees F) __________ __________
Primary loop flow rate gpm __________ __________
Primary loop energy BTU/hr __________ __________
Secondary loop energy BTU/hr __________ __________
3. Verify that recovery system deactivates when recoverable energy is no

longer available. __________________________________________________
4. Check and report unusual vibration, noise, etc.

___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________

Signature and Date
Contractor's Commissioning Specialist __________________________
Contractor's Mechanical Representative ___________________________
Contractor's Electrical Representative ___________________________
Contractor's TAB Representative ___________________________
Contractor's Controls Representative ___________________________
Design Agency Representative __________________________
Contractor's Officer's Representative ___________________________
Using Agency's Representative ___________________________
- End of Appendix B -
-End of document
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 33

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 34

***************************************************************************
This specification section applies to MCB Camp Lejeune and MCAS New River
projects only.
***************************************************************************
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22
BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC

05/13
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
AMCA 500-D (2012) Laboratory Methods of Testing

Dampers for Rating

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 135 (2010; INT 1-3 2011; Addenda AD & AE 2011;

Errata 2012; Addenda AK, AO and I 2012;
Errata 2012; INT 4-8 2012) BACnet—A Data
Communication Protocol for Building
Automation and Control Networks

ASME B31.1 (2012; INT 2-6, 8-10, 13, 15, 17-25, 27-31
and 42-46) Power Piping

Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges,
and Pipe Fittings

INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE C62.41.1 (2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges

Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and
Less) AC Power Circuits
IEEE C62.41.2 (2002) Recommended Practice on

Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage
(1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 1

IEEE C62.45 (2002; R 2008) Recommended Practice on

Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to
Low-Voltage (1000v and less)AC Power
Circuits
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)
ISO 8802-3 (2000) Information Technology -

Telecommunications and Information
Exchange Between Systems - Local and
Metropolitan Area Networks - Specific
Requirements - Part 3: Carrier Sense
Multiple Access with Collision Detection
(CSMA/CD)Access Method and Physical Layer
Specifications
NFPA 70 (2011; Errata 2 2012) National Electrical

Code
NFPA 72 (2013) National Fire Alarm and Signaling

Code


(SMACNA)

UL 1449 (2006; Reprint Jul 2012) Surge Protective

Devices
UL 506 (2008; Reprint Oct 2012) Specialty

Transformers
UL 508A (2001; Reprint Feb 2010) Industrial

Control Panels
UL 916 (2007; Reprint Mar 2012) Standard for

Energy Management Equipment
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135: BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol for

Building Automation and Control Networks, referred to as "BACnet". ASHRAE
developed BACnet to provide a method for diverse building automation
devices to communicate and share data over a network.
1.2.2 BACnet
Building Automation and Control Network; the common name for the
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 2

communication standard ASHRAE 135. The standard defines methods and

protocol for cooperating building automation devices to communicate over a
variety of LAN technologies.
1.2.3 BACnet/IP
An extension of BACnet, Annex J, defines this mechanism using a reserved

UDP socket to transmit BACnet messages over IP networks. A BACnet/IP
network is a collection of one or more IP subnetworks that share the same
BACnet network number. See also "BACnet Broadcast Management Device".
1.2.4 BACnet Internetwork
Two or more BACnet networks, possibly using different LAN technologies,

connected with routers. In a BACnet internetwork, there exists only one
message path between devices.
1.2.5 BACnet Network
One or more BACnet segments that have the same network address and are
interconnected by bridges at the physical and data link layers.
1.2.6 BACnet Segment
One or more physical segments of BACnet devices on a BACnet network,

connected at the physical layer by repeaters.
1.2.7 BBMD
BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD). A communications device,

typically combined with a BACnet router. A BBMD forwards BACnet broadcast
messages to BACnet/IP devices and other BBMDs connected to the same
BACnet/IP network. Every IP subnetwork that is part of a BACnet/IP network
must have only one BBMD. See also "BACnet/IP".
1.2.8 BAS
Building Automation Systems, including DDC (Direct Digital Controls) used

for facility automation and energy management.
1.2.9 BIBBs
BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks. A collection of BACnet services

used to describe supported tasks. BIBBs are often described in terms of
"A" (client) and "B" (server) devices. The “A” device uses data provided
by the "B" device, or requests an action from the “B” device.
1.2.10 BI
BACnet International, formerly two organizations: the BACnet Manufacturers

Association (BMA) and the BACnet Interest Group - North America (BIG-NA).
1.2.11 BI/BTL
BACnet International/BACnet Testing Laboratories (Formerly BMA/BTL). The

organization responsible for testing products for compliance with the
BACnet standard, operated under the direction of BACnet International.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 3

1.2.12 Bridge
Network hardware that connects two or more network (or BACnet internetwork)
segments at the physical and data link layers. A bridge may also filter
messages.
1.2.13 Broadcast
A message sent to all devices on a network segment.
1.2.14 DADMS
DON Application and Database Management System, (DADMS) is a listing of

digital applications approved for purchase and use.
1.2.15 Device
Any control system component, usually a digital controller, that contains a

BACnet Device Object and uses BACnet to communicate with other devices.
See also "Digital Controller".
1.2.16 Device Object
Every BACnet device requires one Device Object, whose properties represent
the network visible properties of that device. Every Device Object
requires a unique Object Identifier number on the BACnet internetwork.
This number is often referred to as the device instance.
1.2.17 Device Profile
A collection of BIBBs determining minimum BACnet capabilities of a device,

defined in ASHRAE 135, Annex L. Standard device profiles include BACnet
Operator Workstations (B-OWS), BACnet Building Controllers (B-BC), BACnet
Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC), BACnet Application Specific
Controllers (B-ASC), BACnet Smart Actuator (B-SA), and
BACnet Smart Sensor (B-SS). Each device used in new construction is
required to have a PICS statement listing BIBBs supported and must be
tested and listed by BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL).
1.2.18 Digital Controller
An electronic controller, usually with internal programming logic and

digital and analog input/output capability, which performs control
functions. In most cases, synonymous with a BACnet device described in
this specification. See also "Device". There are different levels of
controllers, with varying levels or complexity and flexibility.
1.2.18.1 Terminal Device Controllers
Terminal device controllers typically are controllers with less control

features, may have integrated actuators, and may be mounted directly on
equipment (with enclosures).
1.2.18.2 Field Controllers
Field controllers typically have a greater capability for input/output and

customization, do not have integral actuators, are mounted in an enclosure
not on the equipment and are used for equipment such as VAV air handlers.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 4

1.2.18.3 Plant Controllers
Plant Controllers are typically used to control various equipment in

mechanical rooms such as pumps, heat exchangers, and chillers.
1.2.18.4 Supervisory Controllers
Supervisory Controller is used to coordinate all equipment in a building,

input scheduling, and is often used as a connection point for transferring
configuration files to the other controllers.
1.2.18.5 Supervisory Building Controller (SBC)
Supervisory Building Controller (SBC) is used to connect the building's DDC

system (MS/TP) to Camp Lejeune's EMCS (TC/IP). Depending on approvals and
capabilities, the SBC and supervisory controller may be combined into the
same piece of hardware.
1.2.19 Direct Digital Control (DDC)
Digital controllers performing control logic. Usually the controller

directly senses physical values, makes control decisions with internal
programs, and outputs control signals to directly operate switches, valves,
dampers, and motor controllers.
1.2.20 DDC System
A distribution network of digital controllers, communication architecture,

and user interfaces. A DDC system may include programming, sensors,
actuators, switches, relays, factory controls, operator workstations, and
various other devices, components, and attributes.
1.2.21 DITSCAP
Department of Defense Information Technology Security Certification and

Accreditation Process (DITSCAP). DISCAP and DIACAP are processes that
approve IP base equipment that is connected and communicates on the base
Ethernet network. All devices using TCP/IP or Ethernet connectivity
require prior approval to be listed in the DITSCAP and SSA document.
1.2.22 EMCS
Energy Management & Control System. The EMCS at Camp Lejeune is an

enterprise system that actively receives energy and building condition
information from multiple sources and provides load shedding, electric
metering, alarming, trending, scheduling, set point adjustment and device
status of all supervisory building controllers for maintenance personnel.
The EMCS receives real time electrical utility pricing data and
automatically manages to Camp Lejeune's energy target. The existing Camp
Lejeune EMCS is manufactured by Johnson Controls and incorporates the
Metasys extended architecture system that communicates over the MRAN.
1.2.23 EMCS Owner
The regional or local user responsible for managing all aspects of the BAS
operation, including: network connections, workstation management, submittal
review, technical support, control parameters, and daily operation. The BAS
Owner for this project is Utility Monitoring & Control (UMAC) Director
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 5

1.2.24 Ethernet
A family of local-area-network technologies providing high-speed networking

features over various media. Base Telephone manages all Ethernet
connections to the IP networks.
1.2.25 Firmware
Software programmed into read only memory (ROM), flash memory, electrically
erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM), or erasable programmable
read only memory (EPROM) chips.
1.2.26 Gateway
Communication hardware connecting two or more different protocols, similar

to human language translators. The Gateway translates one protocol into
equivalent concepts for the other protocol. In BACnet applications, a
gateway has BACnet on one side and non-BACnet (usually proprietary)
protocols on the other side.
1.2.27 Half Router
A device that participates as one partner in a BACnet point-to-point (PTP)

connection. Two half-routers in an active PTP connection combine to form a
single router.
1.2.28 Hub
A common connection point for devices on a network.
1.2.29 Internet Protocol (IP, TCP/IP, UDP/IP)
A communication method, the most common use is the World Wide Web. At the
lowest level, it is based on Internet Protocol (IP), a method for conveying
and routing packets of information over various LAN media. Two common
protocols using IP are User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and Transmission
Control Protocol (TCP). UDP conveys information to well-known "sockets"
without confirmation of receipt. TCP establishes "sessions", which have
end-to-end confirmation and guaranteed sequence of delivery.
1.2.30 Input/Output (I/O)
Physical inputs and outputs to and from a device, although the term
sometimes describes software, or "virtual" I/O. See also "Points".
1.2.31 I/O Expansion Unit
An I/O expansion unit provides additional point capacity to a digital

controller.
1.2.32 IP subnet
Internet protocol (IP) identifies individual devices with a 32-bit number

divided into four groups from 0 to 255. Devices are often grouped and
share some portion of this number. For example, one device has IP address
209.185.47.68 and another device has IP address 209.185.47.82. These two
devices share Class C subnet 209.185.47.00
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 6

1.2.33 Local-Area Network (LAN)
A communication network that spans a limited geographic area and uses the
same basic communication technology throughout.
1.2.34 MAC Address
Media Access Control address. The physical node address that identifies a
device on a Local Area Network.
1.2.35 Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP)
ISO 8802-3. The standard LAN for BACnet. MSTP uses twisted-pair wiring
for relatively low speed and low cost communication (up to 4,000 ft at
76.8K bps).
1.2.36 Native BACnet Device
A device that uses BACnet as its primary, if not only, method of

communication with other BACnet devices without intermediary gateways. A
system that uses native BACnet devices at all levels is a native BACnet
system.
1.2.37 Network
Communication technology for building network data communications. BACnet

approved network types are Point to Point (PTP) Ethernet, and MS/TP.
BACnet over Internet Protocol is not an approved method for building level
controls.
1.2.38 Network Number
A site-specific number assigned to each network segment to identify for

routing. This network number must be unique throughout the BACnet
internetwork.
1.2.39 Object
The concept of organizing BACnet information into standard components with

various associated properties. Examples include analog input objects and
binary output objects.
1.2.40 Object Identifier
An object property used to identify the object, including object type and
instance. Object Identifiers must be unique within a device.
1.2.41 Object Properties
Attributes of an object. Examples include present value and high limit

properties of an analog input object. Properties are defined in ASHRAE 135;
some are optional and some are required. Objects are controlled by reading
from and writing to object properties.
1.2.42 Peer-to-Peer
Peer-to-peer refers to devices where any device can initiate and respond to
communication with other devices.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 7

1.2.43 Performance Verification Test (PVT)
The procedure for determining if the installed BAS meets design criteria
prior to final acceptance. The PVT is performed after installation,
testing, and balancing of mechanical systems. Typically the PVT is
performed by the Contractor in the presence of the Government.
1.2.44 PID
Proportional, integral, and derivative control; three parameters used to

control modulating equipment to maintain a setpoint. Derivative control is
often not required for HVAC systems (leaving "PI" control).
1.2.45 PICS
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS), describing the BACnet

capabilities of a device. See BACnet, Annex A for the standard format and
content of a PICS statement.
1.2.46 Points
Physical and virtual inputs and outputs. See also "Input/Output".
1.2.47 PTP
Point-to-Point protocol connects individual BACnet devices or networks

using serial connections.
1.2.48 Repeater
A network component that connects two or more physical segments at the

physical layer.
1.2.49 Router
A BACnet router is a component that joins together two or more networks

using different LAN technologies. Examples include joining a BACnet
Ethernet LAN to a BACnet MS/TP LAN.
1.2.50 Stand-Alone Control
Refers to devices performing equipment-specific and small system control

without communication to other devices or computers for physical I/O,
excluding outside air and other common shared conditions. Devices are
located near controlled equipment, with physical input and output points
limited to 64 or less per device, except for complex individual equipment
or systems. Failure of any single device will not cause other network
devices to fail. BACnet "Smart" actuators (B-SA profile) and sensors (B-SS
profile) communicating on a network with a parent device are exempt from
stand-alone requirements.
1.2.51 SSAA
System Security Authorization Agreement. The SSAA is a local document

authorizing the use of the IP networks on Camp Lejeune.
1.2.52 Supervisory Controller
Supervisory Controller is the upper level controller on the building's
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 8

MS/TP bus. It provides building wide points, scheduling, and interface

with programming tools.
1.2.53 Supervisory Building Controller (SBC)
The Supervisory Building Controller is the point of connection between the

Camp Lejeune EMCS network (IP) and the building level control network
(MS/TP). The hardware at this location, that provides the connection is
referred to as the SBC. Since the EMCS network uses the Marine Air-Ground
Task Force Regional Area Network (MRAM) Ethernet network using TCP/IP, any
equipment connecting to the Camp Lejeune EMCS must be listed in the
approved DITSCAP or DIACAP equipment list and must be Marine Corps DADMS
listed and approved.
1.3 SUBCONTRACTOR SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
Perform all work in this section in accordance with the paragraph entitled
"Subcontractor Special Requirements" in Section 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE
REQUIREMENTS. The paragraph specifies that all contract requirements of
this section shall be accomplished directly by a first tier subcontractor.
No work required shall be accomplished by a second tier subcontractor.
a. The controls sub-contractor for this project shall be regularly

engaged in the design and installation of BACnet DDC systems (for
building HVAC systems) similar to the size and scope of this
project, shall have been a representative of the proposed control
system manufacturer for a minimum of two years, have a staffed
office within a 50-mile radius of the project location, and shall
have performed design and installation of DDC systems for a
minimum of 5 years.
b. The controls sub-contractor shall ensure that their installing

electricians have a copy of, read, and understand the mechanical sheets
of the contract's design construction drawings, in addition to the
control drawings prepared by the sub-contractor. Provide the DDC
programming and graphics using Standard English units of measure, not
metric.
1.4 BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC DESCRIPTION
a. Provide new BACnet DDC systems including associated equipment and

accessories. The existing basewide DDC system is manufactured by JCI.
b. Provide a networked DDC system for stand alone control in compliance

with the latest revision of the ASHRAE 135 BACnet standard. Include
all programming, objects, and service required to meet the sequence of
control. Provide BACnet communication between the DDC system and the
native BACnet devices furnished with HVAC equipment, and plant
equipment including boilers, chillers, and variable frequency drives.
Devices provided shall be BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) product
listing certified. Interface the new DDC system with Camp Lejeune's
existing EMCS. Provide a Supervisory Building Controller (SBC) that
shall communicate with the field DDC controllers via the MS/TP bus
using BACnet, and with the EMCS via the Marine Air-Ground Task Force
Regional Area Network (MRAM) Ethernet network using TCP/IP. Provide
interface with the existing EMCS including graphic creation,
scheduling, alarming, load management scheduling and trending.
c. Authority to Operate/Authority to Connect: Prior approval to
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 9

communicate on the base MRAN is a requirement on this project.

Supervisory Building Controllers (SBC) and any other device
communicating on the MRAN without being DADMS listed and approved and
approval from the Designated Approving Authority based on DITSCAP or
DIACAP efforts will not be permitted.
d. Only technicians authorized by the Camp Lejeune utilities department

and factory trained on Metasys extended architecture are approved to
add, manage or revise data in the EMCS. Authorization shall require a
unique username and password managed by the Utilities Department. All
equipment listed as being part of the DDC system shall have a defined
energy load value and be entered into the base load rolling program.
Graphics, naming, trending and overall user views shall be added to the
EMCS. All points added shall be consistent with previously installed
buildings.
1.4.1 Design Requirements
1.4.1.1 Control System Drawings Title Sheet
Provide a title sheet for the control system drawing set. Include the
project title, project location, contract number, the controls contractor
preparing the drawings, an index of the control drawings in the set, and a
legend of the symbols and abbreviations used throughout the control system
drawings.
1.4.1.2 List of I/O Points
Also known as a Point Schedule, provide for each input and output point
physically connected to a digital controller: point name, point
description, point type (Analog Output (AO), Analog Input (AI), Binary
Output (BO), Binary Input (BI)), point sensor range, point actuator range,
point address, BACnet object, associated BIBBS (where applicable), and
point connection terminal number. Typical schedules for multiple identical
equipment are allowed unless otherwise requested in design or contract
criteria. All points shall adhere to the Camp Lejeune standard naming
conventions.
1.4.1.3 Control System Components List
Provide a complete list of control system components installed on this

project. Include for each controller and device: control system schematic
name, control system schematic designation, device description,
manufacturer, and manufacturer part number. For sensors, include point
name, sensor range, and operating limits. For valves, include body style,
Cv, design flow rate, pressure drop, valve characteristic (linear or equal
percentage), and pipe connection size. For actuators, include point name,
spring or non-spring return, modulating or two-position action, normal
(power fail) position, nominal control signal operating range (0-10 volts
DC or 4-20 milliamps), and operating limits.
1.4.1.4 Control System Schematics
Provide control system schematics. Typical schematics for multiple

identical equipment are allowed unless otherwise requested in design or
contract criteria. Include the following:
a. Location of each input and output device
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 10

b. Flow diagram for each piece of HVAC equipment
c. Name or symbol for each control system component, such as V-1 for a
valve
d. Setpoints, with differential or proportional band values
e. Written sequence of operation for the HVAC equipment
f. Valve and Damper Schedules, with normal (power fail) position
1.4.1.5 HVAC Equipment Electrical Ladder Diagrams
Provide HVAC equipment electrical ladder diagrams. Indicate required

electrical interlocks.
1.4.1.6 Component Wiring Diagrams
Provide a wiring diagram for each type of input device and output device.
Indicate how each device is wired and powered; showing typical connections
at the digital controller and power supply. Show for all field connected
devices such as control relays, motor starters, actuators, sensors, and
transmitters.
1.4.1.7 Terminal Strip Diagrams
Provide a diagram of each terminal strip. Indicate the terminal strip

location, termination numbers, and associated point names.
1.4.1.8 BACnet Communication Architecture Schematic
Provide a schematic showing the project's entire BACnet communication

network, including addressing used for LANs, LAN devices including routers
and bridges, gateways, controllers, workstations, and field interface
devices. If applicable, show connection to existing networks.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
Submit detailed and annotated manufacturer's data, drawings, and

specification sheets for each item listed, that clearly show compliance
with the project specifications.

Approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Include the following in the project's control system drawing set:
Control system drawings title sheet; G
List of I/O Points; G
Control System Components List; G
Control system schematics; G
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 11

HVAC Equipment Electrical Ladder diagrams; G
Component wiring diagrams; G
Terminal strip diagrams; G
BACnet communication architecture schematic; G
SD-03 Product Data
Direct Digital Controllers; G
Include BACnet PICS for each controller/device type, including

smart sensors (B-SS) and smart actuators (B-SA).
BACnet Gateways; G
Include BACnet and workstation display information;

bi-directional communication ability; compliance with
interoperability schedule; expansion capacity; handling of alarms,
events, scheduling and trend data; and single device capability
(not depending on multiple devices for exchanging information from
either side of the gateway).
Notebook Computer; G
Sensors and Input Hardware; G
Output Hardware; G
Surge and transient protection; G
Duct smoke detectors; G
SD-05 Design Data
Performance Verification Testing Plan; G
Pre-Performance Verification Testing Checklist; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Performance Verification Testing Report; G
SD-07 Certificates
Contractor's Qualifications; G
SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports
Pre-PVT Checklist; G
Comply with requirements for data packages in Section 01 78 23

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and 01 78 24.00 20 FACILITY
ELECTRONIC OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT INFORMATION (eOMSI),
except as supplemented and modified in this specification.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 12

BACnet Direct Digital Control Systems, Data Package 4; G
Controls System Operators Manuals, Data Package 4; G
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
DDC Software; G
Training documentation; G
1.6.1 Standard Products
Provide material and equipment that are standard manufacturer's products

currently in production and supported by a local service organization.
1.6.2 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
and during installation according to manufacturer's recommendations, and as
approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace damaged or defective items.
1.6.3 Operating Environment
Protect components from humidity and temperature variation, dust, and

contaminants. If components are stored before installation, keep them
within the manufacturer's limits.
1.6.4 Finish of New Equipment
New equipment finishing shall be factory provided. Manufacturer's standard

factory finishing shall be proven to withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray
fog test. Equipment located outdoors shall be proven to withstand 3000
hours in a salt-spray fog test.
Salt-spray fog test shall be according to ASTM B117, with acceptance

criteria as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the finish
shall show no signs of degradation or loss of adhesion beyond 0.125 inch on
either side of the scratch mark.
1.6.5 Verification of Dimensions
The contractor shall verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the
Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing work.
1.6.6 Contractor's Qualifications
Submit documentation certifying the controls Contractor performing the work

has completed at least three DDC systems installations of a similar design
to this project, and programmed similar sequences of operation for at least
two years. Submit the name of the technician proposed to make
additions/alterations to the EMCS servers. Submit supporting documentation
demonstrating their qualifications.
The advisory provisions in ASME B31.1 and NFPA 70 are mandatory.

Substitute "shall" for "should" wherever it appears and interpret all
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 13

references to the "authority having jurisdiction" and "owner" to mean the

1.6.8 Project Sequence
The control system work for this project shall proceed in the following
order:
a. Submit and receive approval on the Shop Drawings, Product Data, and
Certificates specified under the paragraph entitled "SUBMITTALS."
b. Perform the control system installation work, including all field

check-outs and tuning.
c. Provide support to TAB personnel as specified under the paragraph "TEST

AND BALANCE SUPPORT."
d. Submit and receive approval of the Controls System Operators Manual

specified under the paragraph "CONTROLS SYSTEM OPERATORS MANUALS."
e. Submit and receive approval of the Performance Verification Testing

Plan and the Pre-PVT Checklist specified under the paragraph
"PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION TESTING."
f. Perform the Performance Verification Testing.
g. Submit and receive approval on the PVT Report.
h. Submit and receive approval on the Training Documentation specified

under the paragraph "INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL". Submit at
least 30 days before training.
i. Deliver the final Controls System Operators Manuals.
j. Conduct the Phase I Training.
k. Conduct the Phase II Training.
l. Submit and receive approval of Closeout Submittals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DDC SYSTEM
Provide a networked DDC system for stand-alone control in compliance with

the latest revision of the ASHRAE 135 BACnet standard. Include all
programming, objects, and services required to meet the sequence of
control. Provide BACnet MSTP communications between the DDC system and
native BACnet devices furnished with HVAC equipment, and plant equipment
such as boilers, and chillers when provided with BACnet MSTP
communications. DDC controllers provided shall be certified in the BACnet
Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing. BACnet over IP is not
permitted.
2.1.1 Supervisory Building Controller (SBC)
Provide an SBC that communicates between the DDC system and the Camp
Lejeune EMCS server. Provide all necessary hardware, drivers, software,
material and equipment which shall allow communication and control between
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 14

the SBC and the field DDC controllers using BACnet on the MS/TP bus. The
SBC shall be capable of upload/download to and from the EMCS server. All
SBC information shall transfer back to the EMCS system via the Ethernet
TCP/IP level 1 network. All IP addresses and network drops shall be
furnished by base telephone. Supervisory Building Controllers (SBC) must
be listed and approved on the Marine Corps DADMS and listed in the sites
DITSCAP SSAA documents. When the SBC is disconnected from the enterprise
system for maintenance, access to the SBC shall be via a laptop computer
with Internet Explorer and not require any proprietary licensed software or
license key.
2.1.2 Direct Digital Controllers
Direct digital controllers shall be UL 916 rated.
2.1.2.1 I/O Point Limitation
The total number of I/O hardware points used by a single stand-alone

digital controller, including I/O expansion units, shall not exceed 64.
Place I/O expansion units in the same cabinet as the digital controller.
2.1.2.2 Environmental Limits
Controllers shall be suitable for, or placed in protective enclosures

suitable for the environment (temperature, humidity, dust, and vibration)
where they are located.
2.1.2.3 Stand-Alone Control
Provide stand-alone digital controllers capable of meeting the complete

sequence of operation with and without network connectivity (being
connected to the EMCS).
2.1.2.4 Internal Clock
Provide internal clocks for all BACnet Building Controllers (B-BC) and
BACnet Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC) using BACnet time
synchronization services. Automatically synchronize system clocks daily
from an operator-designated controller. The system shall automatically
adjust for daylight saving time.
2.1.2.5 Memory
Provide sufficient memory for each controller to support the required

control, communication, trends, alarms, and messages. Protect programs
residing in memory with EEPROM, flash memory, or by an uninterruptible
power source (battery or uninterruptible power supply). The backup power
source shall have capacity to maintain the memory during a 72-hour
continuous power outage. Rechargeable power sources shall be constantly
charged while the controller is operating under normal line power.
Batteries shall be replaceable without soldering. Trend and alarm history
collected during normal operation shall not be lost during power outages
less than 72 hours long.
2.1.2.6 Immunity to Power Fluctuations
Controllers shall operate at 90 percent to 110 percent nominal voltage

rating.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 15

2.1.2.7 Transformer
The controller power supply shall be fused or current limiting and rated at
125 percent power consumption.
2.1.2.8 Wiring Terminations
Use screw terminal wiring terminations for all field-installed

controllers. Provide field-removable modular terminal strip or a
termination card connected by a ribbon cable for all controllers other than
terminal units.
2.1.2.9 Input and Output Interface
Provide hard-wired input and output interface for all controllers as

follows:
a. Protection: Shorting an input or output point to itself, to another

point, or to ground shall cause no controller damage. Input or output
point contact with sources up to 24 volts AC or DC for any duration
shall cause no controller damage.
b. Binary Inputs: Binary inputs shall monitor two state devices.
c. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Pulse accumulation inputs shall conform to

binary input requirements and accumulate pulses at a resolution
suitable to the application.
d. Analog Inputs: Analog inputs shall monitor low-voltage (0-10 VDC),

current (4-20 mA), or resistance (thermistor or RTD) signals.
e. Binary Outputs: Binary outputs shall have a toggle switch and send a
pulsed 24 VDC low-voltage signal for modulation control, or provide a
maintained open-closed position for on-off control. For HVAC equipment
and plant controllers, provide for manual overrides, either with
three-position (on-off-auto) override switches and status lights, or
with an adjacent operator display and interface. Where appropriate,
provide a method to select normally open or normally closed operation.
f. Analog Outputs: Analog outputs shall send modulating 0-10 VDC or 4-20
mA signals to control output devices.
g. Tri-State Outputs: Tri-State outputs shall provide three-point

floating control of terminal unit electronic actuators.
2.1.2.10 Digital Controller Cabinet
Provide each digital controller as factory mounted or in a factory

fabricated cabinet enclosure. Cabinets located indoors shall protect
against dust and have a minimum NEMA 1 rating, except where indicated
otherwise. Cabinets located outdoors or in damp environments shall protect
against all outdoor conditions and have a minimum NEMA 4 rating. Mechanical
rooms that contain steam service or equipment are considered damp
environments. Outdoor control panels and controllers must be able to
withstand extreme ambient conditions, without malfunction or failure,
whether or not the controlled equipment is running. If necessary, provide
a thermostatically controlled panel heater in freezing locations, and an
internal ventilating fan in locations exposed to direct sunlight. Cabinets
shall have a hinged lockable door and an offset removable metal back plate,
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 16

except controllers integral with terminal units, like those mounted on VAV
boxes. Provide like-keyed locks for all hinged panels provided and a set
of two keys at each panel, with one key inserted in the lock.
2.1.2.11 Main Power Switch and Receptacle
Provide each control cabinet with a main external power on/off switch
located inside the cabinet. Also provide each cabinet with a separate 120
VAC duplex receptacle.
2.1.2.12 DSL Modems
DSL modems and Rate Adaptive Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (RADSL)
modems are provided by the government. Telephone modems are not permitted
for any other communication with the DDC system.
2.1.2.13 BACnet Gateways
Provide gateways to connect BACnet to legacy systems, existing non-BACnet

devices, and existing non-BACnet DDC controlled plant equipment, only when
specifically requested and approved by the Government, and shown on the
Government approved BACnet Communication Architecture Schematic.
Communication shall be MS/TP. Communication using IP is not permitted.
Provide with each gateway an interoperability schedule, showing each point
or event on the legacy side that the BACnet "client" will read, and each
parameter that the BACnet network will write to. Describe this
interoperability in terms of BACnet services, or Interoperability Building
Blocks (BIBBS), defined in ASHRAE 135 Annex K. Provide two-year minimum
warranty for each gateway, including parts and labor.
The following minimum capabilities are required:
a. Gateways shall be able to read and view all readable object properties
listed in the interoperability schedule on the non-BACnet network to
the BACnet network and vice versa where applicable.
b. Gateways shall be able to write to all writeable object properties

listed in the interoperability schedule on the non-BACnet network from
the BACnet network and vice versa where applicable.
c. Gateways shall provide single-pass (only one protocol to BACnet without

intermediary protocols) translation from the non-BACnet protocol to
BACnet and vice versa.
d. Gateways shall meet the requirements of Data Sharing Read Property

(DS-RP-B), Data Sharing Write Property (DS-WP-B), Device Management
Dynamic Device Binding-B (DM-DDB-B), and Device Management
Communication Control (DM-DCC-B) BIBBs, in accordance with ASHRAE 135.
e. Gateways shall include all hardware, software, software licenses, and

configuration tools for operator-to-gateway communications. Provide
backup programming and parameters on CD media and the ability to
modify, download, backup, and restore gateway configuration.
2.1.3 Notebook Computer
Provide a notebook computer, complete with the project's installed DDC

software, configuration files and, applications database, to fully
troubleshoot and program the project's devices. Provide the notebook
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 17

computer with ballistic nylon carrying case with shoulder strap with all
necessary cables and interface hardware needed for setup and communication
with the controllers and control system components.
At a minimum the notebook computer shall include: Common Access Card

reader, a Microsoft XP Professional operating system, processor with
capability and speed required by application software, 40 giga-byte hard
drive, 512 mega-byte RAM, 2 USB 2.0 ports, 10/100 network interface card,
internal V.92 modem, 15-inch display, keyboard, 3-hour battery with
charger, 52X internal CD-RW drive with CD creator software, and Microsoft
Office bundled software. Provide all original licenses, installation
media, documentation, and recovery CDs capable of restoring the original
configuration. Provide the manufacturer's 3-year next business day on-site
warranty with the Government listed as the warranty owner. Provide a CAC
card access port.
2.1.4 DDC Software
2.1.4.1 Programming
Provide programming to execute the sequence of operation indicated.

Provide all programming, programming software tools, and programming
hardware tools to configure and program all controllers. If the laptop
computer provided elsewhere is used as a programming tool, provide all
necessary accessories for full functionality. All software shall be
licensed to Marine Corps Base, Camp Lejeune Complex for unrestricted use on
Camp Lejeune Complex and reproduction for use on Camp Lejeune Complex.
Software keys and "dongles" are not permitted. Provide sequence of
operation routines in simple, easy-to-follow logic with detailed text
comments describing what the logic does and how it corresponds to the
project's written sequence of operation.
a. Graphic-based programming shall use a library of function blocks made

from pre-programmed code designed for BAS control. Function blocks
shall be assembled with interconnecting lines, depicting the control
sequence in a flowchart. If providing a computer with device
programming tools as part of the project, graphic programs shall be
viewable in real time showing present values and logical results from
each function block.
b. Menu-based programming shall be done by entering parameters,

definitions, conditions, requirements, and constraints.
c. For line-by-line and text-based programming, declare variable types

(local, global, real, integer, etc.) at the beginning of the program.
Use descriptive comments frequently to describe the programming.
d. If providing a computer with device programming tools as part of the

project, provide a means for detecting program errors and testing
software strategies with a simulation tool. Simulation may be inherent
within the programming software suite, or provided by physical
controllers mounted in a NEMA 1 test enclosure. The test enclosure
shall contain one dedicated controller of each type provided under this
contract, complete with power supply and relevant accessories.
2.1.4.2 Parameter Modification
All writeable object properties, and all other programming parameters

needed to comply with the project specification shall be adjustable for
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 18

devices at any network level, including those accessible with web-browser

communication, and regardless of programming methods used to create the
applications.
2.1.4.3 Short Cycling Prevention
Provide setpoint differentials and minimum on/off times to prevent

equipment short cycling.
2.1.4.4 Equipment Status Delay
Provide an adjustable delay from when equipment is commanded on or off and

when the control program looks to the status input for confirmation.
2.1.4.5 Run Time Accumulation
Use the Elapsed Time Property to provide re-settable run time accumulation
for each Binary Output Object connected to mechanical loads greater than 1
HP, electrical loads greater than 10 KW, or wherever else specified.
2.1.4.6 Timed Local Override
Provide a non-cumulative adjustable override time for the push of a local

override button.
2.1.4.7 Time Synchronization
Provide time synchronization, including adjustments for leap years,

daylight saving time, and operator time adjustments.
2.1.4.8 Scheduling
Provide operating schedules as indicated, with equipment assigned to

groups. Changing the schedule of a group shall change the operating
schedule of all equipment in the group. Groups shall be capable of
operator creation, modification, and deletion. Provide capability to view
and modify schedules in a seven-day week format. Provide capability to
enter holiday and override schedules one full year at a time.
2.1.4.9 Object Property Override
Allow writeable object property values to accept overrides to any valid

value. Where specified or required for the sequence of control, the Out
Of Service property of Objects shall be modifiable using BACnet's write
property service. When documented, exceptions to these requirement are
allowed for life, machine, and process safeties.
2.1.4.10 Alarms and Events
Alarms and events shall be capable of having programmed time delays and
high-low limits. All alarms/events shall report to the EMCS server.
Alarms/events shall be stored within the Site Building Controller (SBC).
Provide alarms/events in agreement with the point schedule, sequence of
operation, and the BAS Owner. At a minimum, provide programming to
initiate alarms/events any time a piece of equipment fails to operate, a
control point is outside normal range or condition shown on schedules,
communication to a device is lost, a device has failed, or a controller has
lost its memory.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 19

2.1.4.11 Trending
Provide BACnet trend services capable of trending all object present values
set points, and other parameters indicated for trending on project
schedules. Trends may be associated into groups, and a trend report may be
set up for each group. Trends are stored within a device on the BACnet
network, with operator selectable trend intervals from 10 seconds up to 60
minutes. The minimum number of consecutive trend values stored at one time
shall be 100 per variable. When trend memory is full, the most recent data
shall overwrite the oldest data.
The SBC shall upload trends automatically upon reaching 3/4 of the device
buffer limit (via Notification_Threshold property), by operator request, or
by time schedule for archiving. Archived and real-time trend data shall be
available for viewing numerically and graphically for at the workstation
and connected notebook computers.
2.1.4.12 Device Diagnostics
Each controller shall have diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and
device fault condition. The DDC system shall recognize and report a
non-responsive controller.
2.1.4.13 Power Loss
Upon restoration of power, the DDC system shall perform an orderly restart
and restoration of control.
2.1.4.14 Access Control
Provide at least five levels of password protection for operator

interfaces. The lowest level only allowing viewing of graphics. The
second level allows viewing graphics and changing space temperature
setpoints. The third level allows the previous level's capability, plus
changing operating schedules. The fourth level allows access to all
functions except passwords. The highest level provides all administrator
rights and allows full access to all programming, including setting new
passwords and access levels. Provide the BAS Owner with the highest level
password access. Provide automatic log out if no keyboard or mouse
activity is detected after a user-defined time delay.
2.1.4.15 Configuration Tool
Provide the software with the manufacturer's installation CDs and

licenses. Licenses shall allow unrestricted use and reproduction for use
at the Camp Lejeune Complex. Software shall not require the use of
software keys or "dongles" Configure the software according to the DDC
system manufacturer's specifications and in agreement with BACnet standards
found in ASHRAE 135, Annex L.
The software shall permit complete monitoring, modification, and

troubleshooting interface with the DDC system. The operator interface with
the software shall be menu-driven with appropriate displays and menu
commands to manipulate the DDC system's objects, point data, operating
schedules, control routines, system configuration, trends, alarms,
messages, graphics, and reports. Trends shall be capable of graphic
display in real time, with variables plotted as functions of time. Each
alarmed point shall be capable of displaying its alarm history, showing
when it went into alarm, if and when it was acknowledged, and when it went
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 20

out of alarm. The modification of DDC system parameters and object

properties shall be accomplished with "fill in the blank" and/or "point and
drag" methods. Modifications shall download to the appropriate controllers
at the operator's request.
2.1.4.16 Graphics Software
Provide web-based system graphics viewable on browsers compatible with MS

Internet Explorer 6.X or greater using an industry-standard file format
such as HTML, BMP, JPEG, or GIF. Graphics for new projects must be
consistent with base standards including layout and device naming.
Contractor shall install this graphics package on the EMCS Server, bind all
points, and demonstrate operability.
Graphic displays shall have full-screen resolution when viewed on the

workstation and notebook computers. Dynamic data on graphics pages shall
refresh within 10 seconds using an Internet connection, or 30 seconds using
a dial-up modem connection. Graphics viewing shall not require additional
"plug-in" software like Java, Shockwave and Flash applications unless the
software is readily available for free over the Internet, and certified for
use with Government provided personal computers.
The graphics shall show the present value and object name for each of the
project's I/O points on at least one graphic page. Arrange point values
and names on the graphic displays in their appropriate physical locations
with respect to the floor plan or equipment graphic displayed. Graphics
shall allow the operator to monitor current status, view zone and equipment
summaries, use point-and-click navigation between graphic pages, and edit
setpoints and parameters directly from the screens. Items in alarm shall
be displayed using a different color or other obvious visual indicator.
Provide graphics with the following:
a. Graphic Types: Provide at least one graphic display for each piece of
HVAC equipment, building floor, and controlled zone. Indicate dynamic
point values, operating statuses, alarm conditions, and control
setpoints on each display. Provide summary pages where appropriate.
(1) Building Floor Plans: Provide a floor plan graphic for each of
the building's floors and roof with dynamic display of space
temperature and other important data. If used, indicate and
provide links to sub-plan areas. If possible, use the project's
electronic drawing files for the graphic backgrounds. Provide
clear names for important areas, such as "Main Conference Room."
Include room names and numbers where applicable. Include features
such as stairwells, elevators, and main entrances. Where
applicable, include the mechanical room, HVAC equipment, and
control component locations, with corresponding links to the
equipment graphics.
(2) Sub-plan Areas: Where a building's floor plan is too large to

adequately display on the screen, sub-divide the plan into
distinct areas, and provide a separate graphic display for each
area. Provide same level of detail requested in building floor
plan section above.
(3) HVAC Equipment: Provide a graphic display for each piece of HVAC
equipment, such as a fan coil unit, VAV terminal, or air handling
unit. Equipment shall be represented by a two or
three-dimensional drawing. Where multiple pieces of equipment
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 21

combine to form a system, such as a central chiller plant or

central heating plant, provide one graphic to depict the entire
plant. Indicate the equipment, piping, ductwork, dampers, and
control valves in the installed location. Include labels for
equipment, piping, ductwork, dampers, and control valves. Show
the direction of air and water flow. Include dynamic display of
applicable object data with clear names in appropriate locations.
(4) Sequence of Operation: Provide a graphic screen displaying the

written out full sequence of operation for each piece of HVAC
equipment. Provide a link to the sequence of operation displays
on their respective equipment graphics.
b. Graphic Title: Provide a prominent, descriptive title on each graphic

page.
c. Dynamic Update: When the workstation is on-line, all graphic I/O

object values shall update with change-of-value services, or by
operator selected discrete intervals.
d. Graphic Linking: Provide forward and backward linking between floor

plans, sub-plans, and equipment.
e. Graphic Editing: Provide installed software to create, modify, and

delete the DDC graphics. Include the ability to store graphic symbols
in a symbol directory and import these symbols into the graphics.
f. Dynamic Point Editing: Provide full editing capability for deleting,

adding, and modifying dynamic points on the graphics.
2.2 SENSORS AND INPUT HARDWARE
Coordinate sensor types with the BAS Owner to keep them consistent with
existing installations.
2.2.1 Field-Installed Temperature Sensors
Where feasible, provide the same sensor type throughout the project. Avoid
using transmitters unless absolutely necessary.
2.2.1.1 Thermistors
Precision thermistors may be used in applications below 200 degrees F.

Sensor accuracy over the application range shall be 0.36 degree F or less
between 32 to 150 degrees F. Stability error of the thermistor over five
years shall not exceed 0.25 degrees F cumulative. A/D conversion
resolution error shall be kept to 0.1 degrees F. Total error for a
thermistor circuit shall not exceed 0.5 degrees F.
2.2.1.2 Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs)
Provide RTD sensors with platinum elements compatible with the digital
controllers. Encapsulate sensors in epoxy, series 300 stainless steel,
anodized aluminum, or copper. Temperature sensor accuracy shall be 0.1
percent (1 ohm) of expected ohms (1000 ohms) at 32 degrees F. Temperature
sensor stability error over five years shall not exceed 0.25 degrees F
cumulative. Direct connection of RTDs to digital controllers without
transmitters is preferred. When RTDs are connected directly, lead
resistance error shall be less than 0.25 degrees F. The total error for a
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 22

RTD circuit shall not exceed 0.5 degrees F. Allow an additional 0.5
percent accuracy for averaging sensors.
2.2.1.3 Temperature Sensor Details
a. Room Type: Provide the sensing element components within a decorative

protective cover suitable for surrounding decor. Provide room
temperature sensors with timed override button, setpoint adjustment
lever, digital temperature display. Provide a communication port for a
portable operator interface like a notebook computer or PDA.
b. Duct Probe Type: Ensure the probe is long enough to properly sense the
air stream temperature.
c. Duct Averaging Type: Continuous averaging sensors shall be one foot in

length for each 4 square feet of duct cross-sectional area, and a
minimum length of 6 feet.
d. Pipe Immersion Type: Provide minimum three-inch immersion. Provide

each sensor with a corresponding pipe-mounted sensor well, unless
indicated otherwise. Sensor wells shall be stainless steel when used
in steel piping, and brass when used in copper piping. Provide the
sensor well with a heat-sensitive transfer agent between the sensor and
the well interior.
e. Outside Air Type: Provide the sensing element on the building's north
side with a protective weather shade that positions the sensor
approximately 3 inches off the wall surface, does not inhibit free air
flow across the sensing element, and protects the sensor from snow,
ice, and rain.
2.2.2 Transmitters
Provide transmitters with 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC linear output scaled to

the sensed input. Transmitters shall be matched to the respective sensor,
factory calibrated, and sealed. Size transmitters for an output near 50
percent of its full-scale range at normal operating conditions. The total
transmitter error shall not exceed 0.1 percent at any point across the
measured span. Supply voltage shall be 12 to 24 volts AC or DC.
Transmitters shall have non-interactive offset and span adjustments. For
temperature sensing, transmitter drift shall not exceed 0.03 degrees F a
year.
2.2.2.1 Relative Humidity Transmitters
Provide transmitters with an accuracy equal to plus or minus 5 percent from

0 to 90 percent scale, and less than one percent drift per year. Sensing
elements shall be the polymer type.
2.2.2.2 Pressure Transmitters
Provide transmitters integral with the pressure transducer.
2.2.3 Current Transducers
Provide current transducers to monitor motor amperage. Current switches

may be used to indicate on/off status.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 23

2.2.4 Air Quality Sensors
Provide power supply for each sensor.
2.2.4.1 CO2 Sensors
Provide photo-acoustic type CO2 sensors with integral transducers and

linear output. The devices shall read CO2 concentrations between 0 and 2000
ppm with full scale accuracy of at least plus or minus 100 ppm.
2.2.4.2 Air Quality Sensors
Provide full spectrum air quality sensors using a hot wire element based on
the Taguchi principle. The sensor shall monitor a wide range of gaseous
volatile organic components common in indoor air contaminants like paint
fumes, solvents, cigarette smoke, and vehicle exhaust. The sensor shall
automatically compensate for temperature and humidity, have span and
calibration potentiometers, operate on 24 VDC power with output of 0-10
VDC, and have a service rating of 32 to 140 degrees F and 5 to 95 percent
relative humidity.
2.2.5 Input Switches
2.2.5.1 Timed Local Overrides
Provide buttons or switches to override the DDC occupancy schedule

programming for each major building zone during unoccupied periods, and to
return HVAC equipment to the occupied mode. This requirement is waived for
zones clearly intended for 24 hour continuous operation.
2.2.6 Freeze Protection Thermostats
Provide special purpose thermostats with flexible capillary elements 20

feet in length for coil face areas up to 40 square feet. Provide
additional thermostats for larger coils. Provide switch contacts rated for
the respective motor starter's control circuit voltage. Include auxiliary
contacts for the switch's status condition. A freezing condition at any
18-inch increment along the sensing element's length shall activate the
switch. The thermostat shall be equipped with a manual push-button reset
switch so that when tripped, the thermostat requires manual resetting
before the HVAC equipment can restart.
2.2.7 Air Flow Measurement Stations
Air flow measurement stations shall have an array of velocity sensing

elements and straightening vanes inside a flanged sheet metal casing. The
velocity sensing elements shall be the RTD or thermistor type, traversing
the ducted air in at least two directions. The air flow pressure drop
across the station shall not exceed 0.1 inch water gage at a velocity of
2,000 fpm. The station shall be suitable for air flows up to 2500 fpm, and
a temperature range of 0 to 140 degrees F. The station's measurement
accuracy over the range of 125 to 2,500 fpm shall be plus or minus 3
percent of the measured velocity. Station transmitters shall provide a
linear, temperature-compensated 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC output. The
output shall be capable of being accurately converted to a corresponding
air flow rate in cubic feet per minute. Transmitters shall be a 2-wire,
loop powered device. The output error of the transmitter shall not exceed
0.5 percent of the measurement.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 24

2.2.8 Energy Metering
Provide energy meters to collect steam and water consumption, and hot water
solar collector generation for the facility and report to the EMCS database.
2.2.8.1 Water meters
Water meters 1" and smaller shall be positive displacement nutating disk.
Water meters larger than 1" shall be compound type. Output signal shall be
4-10 ma, pulse, or BACnet(MS/TP).
2.3 OUTPUT HARDWARE
2.3.1 Control Dampers
Provide factory manufactured aluminum blade/galvanized steel frame dampers

where indicated. Control dampers shall comply with SMACNA 1966 except as
modified or supplemented by this specification. Published damper leakage
rates and respective pressure drops shall have been verified by tests in
compliance with AMCA 500-D requirements.
Provide damper assembly frames constructed of 13 gauge minimum

thickness galvanized steel channels with mitered and welded corners. Damper
axles shall be 0.5 inches minimum diameter plated steel rods supported in
the damper frame by stainless steel or bronze bearings. Blades mounted
vertically shall be supported by thrust bearings.
Dampers shall be rated for not less than 2000 fpm air velocity. The
pressure drop through each damper when full-open shall not exceed 0.04
inches water gage at 1000 fpm face velocity. Damper assemblies in ductwork
subject to above 3-inch water gauge static air pressure shall be
constructed to meet SMACNA Seal Class "A" construction requirements.
Provide the damper operating linkages outside of the air stream, including
crank arms, connecting rods, and other hardware that transmits motion from
the damper actuators to the dampers, shall be adjustable. Additionally,
operating linkages shall be designed and constructed to have a 2 to 1
safety factor when loaded with the maximum required damper operating force.
Linkages shall be brass, bronze, galvanized steel, or stainless steel.
Provide access doors or panels in hard ceilings and walls for access to all
concealed damper operators and damper locking setscrews.
For field-installed control dampers, a single damper section shall have

blades no longer than 48 inches and no higher than 72 inches. The maximum
damper blade width shall be 12 inches. Larger sized dampers shall be built
using a combination of sections.
Frames shall be at least 2 inches wide. Flat blades shall have edges folded
for rigidity. Blades shall be provided with compressible gasket seals along
the full length of the blades to prevent air leakage when closed.
The damper frames shall be provided with jamb seals to minimize air
leakage. Seals shall be suitable for an operating temperature range of
minus 40 degrees F to 200 degrees F.
The leakage rate of each damper when full-closed shall be no more

than 2 cfm per sq. foot of damper face area at
1.0 inches water gage static pressure.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 25

2.3.2 Control Valves
2.3.2.1 Valve Assembly
Valve bodies shall be designed for 125 psig minimum working pressure or 150
percent of the operating pressure, whichever is greater. Valve stems shall
be Type 300 series stainless steel. Valve leakage ratings shall be 0.01
percent of rated Cv value. Class 125 copper alloy valve bodies and Class
150 steel or stainless steel valves shall meet the requirements of
ASME B16.5. Cast iron valve components shall meet the requirements of
ASTM A126 Class B or C.
2.3.2.2 Butterfly Valves
Butterfly valves shall be the threaded lug type suitable for dead-end
service and for modulation to the fully-closed position, with stainless
steel shafts supported by bearings, non-corrosive discs geometrically
interlocked with or bolted to the shaft (no pins), and EPDM seats suitable
for temperatures from minus 20 degrees F to plus 250 degrees F. Valves
shall have a means of manual operation independent of the actuator.
2.3.2.3 Two-Way Valves
Two-way modulating valves shall have an equal percentage characteristic.
2.3.2.4 Valves for Glycol Fluid Service
a. Bodies for valves 1-1/2 inches and smaller shall be brass or bronze,
with threaded or union ends. Bodies for valves from 2 inches to 3
inches inclusive shall be of brass, bronze, or iron. Bodies for 2 inch
valves shall have threaded connections. Bodies for valves from 2-1/2
to 3 inches shall have flanged connections.
b. Internal valve trim shall be brass or bronze, except that valve stems
shall be stainless steel.
c. Unless indicated otherwise, provide modulating valves sized for 2 psi

minimum and 4 psi maximum differential across the valve at the design
flow rate.
d. Valves 4 inches and larger shall be butterfly valves, unless indicated

otherwise.
2.3.3 Actuators
Provide direct-drive electric actuators for all control applications,

except where indicated otherwise.
2.3.3.1 Electric Actuators
Each actuator shall deliver the torque required for continuous uniform
motion and shall have internal end switches to limit the travel, or be
capable of withstanding continuous stalling without damage. Actuators
shall function properly within 85 to 110 percent of rated line voltage.
Provide actuators with hardened steel running shafts and gears of steel or
copper alloy. Fiber or reinforced nylon gears may be used for torques less
than 16 inch-pounds. Provide two-position actuators of single direction,
spring return, or reversing type. Provide modulating actuators capable of
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 26

stopping at any point in the cycle, and starting in either direction from
any point. Actuators shall be equipped with a switch for reversing
direction, and a button to disengage the clutch to allow manual
adjustments. Provide the actuator with a hand crank for manual
adjustments, as applicable. Actuators without spring-return may only be
used on terminal fan coil units, terminal VAV units, convectors, and unit
heaters. Spring return actuators shall be provided on all control dampers
and all control valves except terminal fan coil units, terminal VAV units,
convectors, and unit heaters; unless indicated otherwise. Each actuator
shall have distinct markings indicating the full-open and full-closed
position, and the points in-between.
2.3.4 Output Switches
2.3.4.1 Control Relays
Field installed and DDC panel relays shall be double pole, double throw, UL
listed, with contacts rated for the intended application, indicator light,
and dust proof enclosure. The indicator light shall be lit when the coil
is energized and off when coil is not energized. Relays shall be the
socket type, plug into a fixed base, and replaceable without tools or
removing wiring. Encapsulated "PAM" type relays may be used for terminal
control applications.
2.4 ELECTRICAL POWER AND DISTRIBUTION
2.4.1 Transformers
Transformers shall conform to UL 506. For control power other than

terminal level equipment, provide a fuse or circuit breaker on the
secondary side of each transformer.
2.4.2 Surge and Transient Protection
Provide each digital controller with surge and transient power protection.
Surge and transient protection shall consist of the following devices,
installed externally to the controllers.
2.4.2.1 Power Line Surge Protection
Provide surge suppressors on the incoming power at each controller or

grouped terminal controllers. Surge suppressors shall be rated in
accordance with UL 1449, have a fault indicating light, and conform to the
following:
a. The device shall be a transient voltage surge suppressor, hard-wire

type individual equipment protector for 120 VAC/1 phase/2 wire plus
ground.
b. The device shall react within 5 nanoseconds and automatically reset.
c. The voltage protection threshold, line to neutral, shall be no more

than 211 volts.
d. The device shall have an independent secondary stage equal to or

greater than the primary stage joule rating.
e. The primary suppression system components shall be pure silicon

avalanche diodes.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 27

f. The secondary suppression system components shall be silicon avalanche

diodes or metal oxide varistors.
g. The device shall have an indication light to indicate the protection

components are functioning.
h. All system functions of the transient suppression system shall be

individually fused and not short circuit the AC power line at any time.
i. The device shall have an EMI/RFI noise filter with a minimum

attenuation of 13 dB at 10 kHz to 300 MHz.
j. The device shall comply with IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Class "B"
requirements and be tested according to IEEE C62.45.
k. The device shall be capable of operating between minus 20 degrees F

and plus 122 degrees F.
2.4.3 Wiring
Provide complete electrical wiring for the DDC System, including wiring to
transformer primaries. Unless indicated otherwise, provide all normally
visible or otherwise exposed wiring in conduit. Where conduit is required,
control circuit wiring shall not run in the same conduit as power wiring
over 100 volts. Circuits operating at more than 100 volts shall be in
accordance with Section 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Run all
circuits over 100 volts in conduit, metallic tubing, covered metal
raceways, or armored cable. Use plenum-rated cable for circuits under 100
volts in concealed accessible spaces. Examples of these spaces include
HVAC plenums, within walls, above suspended ceilings, in attics, and within
ductwork. All wiring in mechanical rooms and mezzanines shall be run in
conduit.
2.4.3.1 Power Wiring
The following requirements are for field-installed wiring:
a. Wiring for 24 V circuits shall be insulated copper 18 AWG minimum and

rated for 300 VAC service.
b. Wiring for 120 V circuits shall be insulated copper 14 AWG minimum and
rated for 600 VAC service.
2.4.3.2 Analog Signal Wiring
Field-installed analog signal wiring shall be in accordance with

manufacturer's installation instructions. Each cable shall be 100 percent
shielded and have a 20 AWG drain wire. Each wire shall have insulation
rated for 300 VAC service. Cables shall have an overall aluminum-polyester
or tinned-copper cable-shield tape.
2.5 FIRE PROTECTION DEVICES
2.5.1 Duct Smoke Detectors
Provide duct smoke detectors in HVAC ducts in accordance with NFPA 72 and
NFPA 90A, except as indicated otherwise. Provide UL listed or FM approved
detectors, designed specifically for duct installation.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 28

Furnish detectors under Section 28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS

NOTIFICATION SYSTEM and install under this section. Connect new detectors
to the building fire alarm panel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Perform the installation under the supervision of competent technicians

regularly employed in the installation of DDC systems.
3.1.1 BACnet Naming and Addressing
Coordinate with the EMCS Owner and provide naming and addressing consistent
with existing buildings already loaded on the EMCS server. All DDC
controllers shall have a Camp Lejeune unique instance number and all Site
Building Controllers shall have a Camp Lejeune unique name.
a. MAC Address
Every BACnet device shall have an assigned and documented MAC Address
unique to its network. For Ethernet networks, document the MAC Address
assigned at its creation. For ARCNET or MS/TP, assign from 4 to 128.
b. Network Numbering
Assign unique numbers to each new network installed on the BACnet

internetwork. Provide ability for changing the network number; either
by device switches, network computer, or field operator interface. The
BACnet internetwork (all possible connected networks) can contain up to
65,534 possible unique networks.
c. Device Object Identifier Property Number
Assign unique Device "Object_Identifier" property numbers or device

instances for each device on the BACnet internetwork. Provide for
future modification of the device instance number; either by device
switches, network computer, or field interface. BACnet allows up to
4,194,302 possible unique devices per internetwork.
d. Device Object Name Property Text
The Device Object Name property field shall support 32 minimum

printable characters. Assign unique Device "Object_Name" property
names with plain-English descriptive names for each device
For example, the Device Object Name for the device controlling the
first floor air handler unit at Building AS4035 would be:
Name=Air Station.AS4035.First Floor.Air Handling Unit.AHU-1-A
e. Object Name Property Text (Other than Device Objects)
The Object Name property field shall support 32 minimum printable

characters. Assign Object Name properties with plain-English names
descriptive of the application. Examples include "Zone 1 Temperature"
and "Fan Start/Stop".
f. Object Identifier Property Number (Other than Device Objects)
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 29

Assign Object Identifier property numbers according to design drawings

or tables if provided. If not provided, Object Identifier property
numbers may be assigned at the Contractor's discretion but must be
approved by the Government. In this case they must be documented and
unique for like object types within the device.
3.1.2 Minimum BACnet Object Requirements
a. Use of Standard BACnet Objects in accordance with existing

Camp Lejeune standards
For the following points and parameters, use standard BACnet objects,
where all relevant object properties can be read using BACnet's Read
Property Service, and all relevant object properties can be modified
using BACnet's Write Property Service:
all device physical inputs and outputs, all set points, all PID tuning
parameters, all calculated pressures, flow rates, and consumption
values, all alarms, all trends, all schedules, and all equipment and
lighting circuit operating status.
b. BACnet Object Description Property
The Object Description property shall support 32 minimum printable

characters. For each object, complete the description property field
using a brief, narrative, plain English description specific to the
object and project application. For example: "HW Pump 1 Proof."
Document compliance, length restrictions, and whether the description
is writeable in the device PICS.
c. Analog Input, Output, and Value Objects
Support and provide Description and/or Device_Type text strings

matching signal type and engineering units shown on the points list.
d. Binary Input, Output, and Value Objects
Support and provide Inactive_Text and Active_Text property descriptions

matching conditions shown on the points list.
e. Calendar Object
For devices with scheduling capability, provide at least one Calendar

Object with ten-entry capacity. All operators may view Calendar
Objects; authorized operators may make modifications from a
workstation. Enable the writeable Date List property and support all
calendar entry data types.
f. Schedule Object
Use Schedule Objects for all building system scheduling. All operators
may view schedule entries; authorized operators may modify schedules
from a workstation.
g. Loop Object or Equal
Use Loop Objects or equivalent BACnet objects in each applicable field

device for PID control. Regardless of program method or object used,
allow authorized operators to adjust the Update Interval, Setpoint,
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 30

Proportional Constant, Integral Constant, and Derivative Constant using

BACnet read/write services.
3.1.3 Minimum BACnet Service Requirements
a. Command Priorities
Use commandable BACnet objects to control machinery and systems,

providing the priority levels listed below. If the sequence of
operation requires a different priority, obtain approval from the
Priority Level Application
1 Manual-Life Safety
2 Automatic-Life Safety
3 (User Defined)
4 (User Defined)
5 Critical Equipment Control
6 Minimum On/Off
7 (User Defined)
8 Manual Operator
9 (User Defined)
10 (User Defined)
11 Load Shedding
12 (User Defined)
13 (User Defined)
14 (User Defined)
15 (User Defined)
16 (User Defined)
b. Alarming
(1) Alarm Priorities - Coordinate alarm and event notification with

the BAS Owner.
(2) Notification Class - Enable writeable Priority, Ack Required, and

Recipient List properties of Notification Class objects.
(3) Event Notification Message Texts - Use condition specific

narrative text and numerical references for alarm and event
notification.
c. Updating Displayed Property Values
Allow workstations to display property values at discrete polled

intervals, or based on receipt of confirmed and unconfirmed Change of
Value notifications. The COV increment shall be adjustable by an
operator using BACnet services, and polled intervals shall be
adjustable at the operator workstation.
3.1.4 Local Area Networks
Obtain Government approval before connecting new networks with existing

networks. Network numbers and device instance numbers shall remain unique
when joining networks. Do not change existing network addressing without
Government approval. See also "BACnet Naming and Addressing".
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 31

3.1.5 BACnet Routers, Bridges, and Switches
Provide the quantity of BACnet routers, bridges, and switches necessary for
communications shown on the BACnet Communication Architecture schematic.
Provide BACnet routers with BACnet Broadcast Message Device (BBMD)
capability on each BACnet internetwork communicating across an MS/TP
network. Configure each BACnet device and bridge, router, or switch to
communicate on its network segment. All switches provided by the
contractor shall be approved by base telephone.
3.1.6 Wiring Criteria
a. Run circuits operating at more than 100 volts in rigid or flexible

conduit, metallic tubing, covered metal raceways, or armored cable.
b. Do not run binary control circuit wiring in the same conduit as power
wiring over 100 volts. Where analog signal wiring requires conduit, do
not run in the same conduit with AC power circuits or control circuits
operating at more than 100 volts.
c. Provide circuit and wiring protection required by NFPA 70.
d. Run all wiring located inside mechanical rooms in conduit.
e. Do not bury aluminum-sheathed cable or aluminum conduit in concrete.
f. Input/output identification: Permanently label each field-installed

wire, cable, and pneumatic tube at each end with descriptive text using
a commercial wire marking system that fully encircles the wire, cable,
or tube. Locate the markers within 2 inches of each termination.
Match the names and I/O number to the project's point list. Similarly
label all power wiring serving control devices, including the word
"power" in the label. Number each pneumatic tube every six feet.
Label all terminal blocks with alpha/numeric labels. All wiring and
the wiring methods shall be in accordance with UL 508A.
g. For controller power, provide new 120 VAC circuits, with ground, if not
defined on the electrical drawings. Provide each circuit with a
dedicated breaker, and run wiring in its own conduit, separate from any
control wiring. Connect the controller's ground wire to the electrical
panel ground; conduit grounds are not acceptable.
h. Surge Protection: Install surge protection according to manufacturer's

instructions. Multiple controllers fed from a common power supply may
be protected by a common surge protector, properly sized for the total
connected devices.
i. Grounding: Ground controllers and cabinets to a good earth ground as

specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Conduit
grounding is not acceptable; all grounding shall have a direct path to
the building earth ground. Ground sensor drain wire shields at the
controller end.
j. The Contractor shall be responsible for correcting all associated

ground loop problems.
k. Run wiring in panel enclosures in covered wire track.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 32

3.1.7 Accessibility
Install all equipment so that parts requiring periodic inspection,

operation, maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install digital
controllers, data ports, and concealed actuators, valves, dampers, and like
equipment in locations freely accessible through access doors.
3.1.8 Digital Controllers
a. Install as stand alone control devices (see definitions).
b. Locate control cabinets at the locations shown on the drawings. If not

shown on the drawings, install in the most accessible space, close to
the controlled equipment.
3.1.9 Hand-Off-Auto Switches
Wire safety controls such as smoke detectors and freeze protection

thermostats to protect the equipment during both hand and auto operation.
3.1.10 Temperature Sensors
Install temperature sensors in locations that are accessible and provide a

good representation of sensed media. Installations in dead spaces are not
acceptable. Calibrate sensors according to manufacturer's instructions.
Do not use sensors designed for one application in a different application.
3.1.10.1 Room Temperature Sensors
Mount the sensors on interior walls to sense the average room temperature
at the locations indicated. Avoid locations near heat sources such as copy
machines or locations by supply air outlet drafts. Mount the center of the
sensor 54 inches above the floor to meet ADA requirements.
3.1.10.2 Duct Temperature Sensors
a. Probe Type: Provide a gasket between the sensor housing and the duct
wall. Seal the duct penetration air tight. Seal the duct insulation
penetration vapor tight.
b. Averaging Type (and coil freeze protection thermostats): Weave the

capillary tube sensing element in a serpentine fashion perpendicular to
the flow, across the duct or air handler cross-section, using durable
non-metal supports. Prevent contact between the capillary and the duct
or air handler internals. Provide a duct access door at the sensor
location. The access door shall be hinged on the side, factory
insulated, have cam type locks, and be as large as the duct will
permit, maximum 18 by 18 inches. For sensors inside air handlers, the
sensors shall be fully accessible through the air handler's access
doors without removing any of the air handler's internals.
3.1.10.3 Immersion Temperature Sensors
Provide thermowells for sensors measuring piping, tank, or pressure vessel

temperatures. Locate wells to sense continuous flow conditions. Do not
install wells using extension couplings. Where piping diameters are
smaller than the length of the wells, provide wells in piping at elbows to
sense flow across entire area of well. Wells shall not restrict flow area
to less than 70 percent of pipe area. Increase piping size as required to
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 33

avoid restriction. Provide thermal conductivity material within the well

to fully coat the inserted sensor.
3.1.10.4 Outside Air Temperature Sensors
Provide outside air temperature sensors in weatherproof enclosures on the

north side of the building, away from exhaust hoods and other areas that
may affect the reading. Provide a shield to shade the sensor from direct
sunlight.
3.1.11 Energy Meters
Locate energy meters as indicated. Connect each meter output to the DDC
system, to measure both instantaneous and accumulated energy usage.
3.1.12 Damper Actuators
Where possible, mount actuators outside the air stream in accessible areas.
3.1.13 Thermometers and Gages
Mount devices to allow reading while standing on the floor or ground, as

applicable.
3.1.14 Pressure Sensors
Locate pressure sensors as indicated.
3.1.15 Component Identification Labeling
Using an electronic hand-held label maker with white tape and bold black
block lettering, provide an identification label on the exterior of each
new control panel, control device, actuator, and sensor. Also provide
labels on the exterior of each new control actuator indicating the (full)
open and (full) closed positions. For labels located outdoors, use
exterior grade label tape, and provide labels on both the inside and
outside of the panel door or device cover. Acceptable alternatives are
white plastic labels with engraved bold black block lettering permanently
attached to the control panel, control device, actuator, and sensor. Have
the labels and wording approved by the BAS Owner prior to installation.
3.1.16 Network and Telephone Communication Lines
When telephone lines or network connections by the Government are required,

provide the Contracting Officer at least 60 days advance notice of need.
Provide 1 inch conduit and Cat 5 cable from the Supervisory Building
controller (SBC) to the network connection (most likely in the telephone
equipment room).
3.2 INTERFACE WITH EXISTING EMCS
Interface the new DDC system with Camp Lejeune's existing EMCS. Obtain
Government approval before connecting new DDC system to the EMCS. Any
device connected directly to the EMCS must be approved by the Designated
Approving Authority by following procedures listed in the DIACAP
instruction. Complete installation and programming includes graphic
creation, scheduling, alarming, lard management scheduling and trending.
The server is located in Building 24: workstations are located at Buildings
1005, 1023, and 1202. Only Johnson Controls factory trained technicians,
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 34

approved by the EMCS Engineer will be allowed to program the EMCS.
3.3 TEST AND BALANCE SUPPORT
The controls contractor shall coordinate with and provide on-site support
to the test and balance (TAB) personnel specified under Section 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC. This support shall include:
a. On-site operation and manipulation of control systems during the

testing and balancing.
b. Control setpoint adjustments for balancing all relevant mechanical

systems.
c. Tuning control loops with setpoints and adjustments determined by TAB

personnel.
3.4 CONTROLS SYSTEM OPERATORS MANUALS
Provide five electronic and three printed copies of a Controls System

Operators Manual. The manual shall be specific to the project, written to
actual project conditions, and provide a complete and concise depiction of
the installed work. Provide information in detail to clearly explain all
operation requirements for the control system.
Provide with each manual: CDs of the project's control system drawings,
control programs, data bases, graphics, and all items listed below.
Include gateway back-up data and configuration tools where applicable.
Provide CDs in jewel case with printed and dated project-specific labels on
both the CD and the case. For text and drawings, use Adobe Acrobat or MS
Office file types. When approved by the Government, AutoCAD and Visio
files are allowed. Give files descriptive English names and organize in
folders.
Provide printed manuals in sturdy 3-ring binders with a title sheet on the
outside of each binder indicating the project title, project location,
contract number, and the controls contractor name, address, and telephone
number. Each binder shall include a table of contents and tabbed dividers,
with all material neatly organized. Manuals shall include the following:
a. A copy of the as-built control system (shop) drawings set, with all
items specified under the paragraph "Submittals." Indicate all field
changes and modifications.
b. A copy of the project's mechanical design drawings, including any

official modifications and revisions.
c. A copy of the project's approved Product Data submittals provided under

the paragraph "Submittals."
d. A copy of the project's approved Performance Verification Testing Plan

and Report. Test report shall be a 48 hour trend report verifying all
temperature setpoints listed in the sequence of operation. The trend
report should be printed from the EMCS server. All systems (AHU's,
ERV's, CHWS, HWS) should be part of this section.
e. A copy of the project's approved final TAB Report. (Added by the

Mechanical Contractor (Division 23)).
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 35

f. Printouts of all control system programs, including controller setup

pages if used. Include plain-English narratives of application
programs, flowcharts, and source code.
g. Printouts of all physical input and output object properties, including

tuning values, alarm limits, calibration factors, and set points.
h. A table entitled "AC Power Table" listing the electrical power source
for each controller. Include the building electrical panel number,
panel location, and circuit breaker number.
i. The DDC manufacturer's hardware and software manuals in both print and
CD format with printed project-specific labels. Include installation
and technical manuals for all controller hardware, operator manuals for
all controllers, programming manuals for all controllers, operator
manuals for all workstation software, installation and technical
manuals for the workstation and notebook, and programming manuals for
the workstation and notebook software.
j. A list of qualified control system service organizations for the work

provided under this contract. Include their addresses and telephone
numbers.
k. A written statement entitled "Technical Support" stating the control

system manufacturer or authorized representative will provide toll-free
telephone technical support at no additional cost to the Government for
a minimum of two years from project acceptance, will be furnished by
experienced service technicians, and will be available during normal
weekday working hours. Include the toll-free technical support
telephone number.
l. A written statement entitled "Software Upgrades" stating software and

firmware patches and updates will be provided upon request at no
additional cost to the Government for a minimum of two years from
contract acceptance. Include a table of all DDC system software and
firmware provided under this contract, listing the original release
dates, version numbers, part numbers, and serial numbers.
3.4.1 Storage Cabinets
In one project mechanical room, provide a wall-mounted metal storage

cabinet with hinged doors. Provide cabinets large enough to hold the
entire set of Controls System Operators Manuals, and the HVAC operation and
maintenance manuals provided under Division 23 HVAC. Locate cabinets
adjacent to DDC control panels where applicable. Have each cabinet's
proposed installation site approved in advance by the Contracting Officer
and the BAS Owner. Prominently label each cabinet with the wording
"OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS." Place one of the three hard copies of
the Operators Manual in this cabinet. Prominently label each binder with
the wording "MECHANICAL ROOM COPY - DO NOT REMOVE."
3.5 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION TESTING (PVT)
3.5.1 General
The PVT shall demonstrate compliance of the control system work with the
contract requirements. The PVT shall be performed by the Contractor and
witnessed and approved by the Government. If the project is phased,
provide separate testing for each phase. A Pre-PVT meeting to review the
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 36

Pre-PVT Checklist is required to coordinate all aspects of the PVT and

shall include the Contractor's QA representative, the Contractor's PVT
administrator, the Contracting Officer's representative, and the EMCS Owner.
3.5.2 Performance Verification Testing Plan
Submit a detailed PVT Plan of the proposed testing for Government

approval. Develop the PVT Plan specifically for the control system in this
contract. The PVT Plan shall be a clear list of test items arranged in a
logical sequence. Include the intended test procedure, the expected
response, and the pass/fail criteria for every component tested.
The plan shall clearly describe how each item is tested, indicate where
assisting personnel are required (like the mechanical contractor), and
include what procedures are used to simulate conditions. Include a
separate column for each checked item and extra space for comments. Where
sequences of operations are checked, insert each corresponding routine from
the project’s sequence of operation. For each test area, include signature
and date lines for the Contractor's PVT administrator, the Contractor's QA
representative, the Contracting Officer's representative, and the EMCS
Owner to acknowledge successful completion.
3.5.3 PVT Sample Size
Test all central plant equipment, primary air handling unit controllers,
and fan coil unit controllers unless otherwise directed. Use the DDC
system to verify all VAV boxes are controlling as specified. The
Government may require testing of like controllers beyond a statistical
sample if sample controllers require retesting or do not have consistent
results.
The Government may witness all testing, or random samples of PVT items.
When only random samples are witnessed, the Government may choose which
ones.
3.5.4 Pre-Performance Verification Testing Checklist
Submit the following as a list with items checked off once verified.
Provide a detailed explanation for any items that are not completed or
verified.
a. Verify all required mechanical installation work is successfully

completed, and all HVAC equipment is working correctly (or will be by
the time the PVT is conducted).
b. Verify HVAC motors operate below full-load amperage ratings.
c. Verify all required control system components, wiring, and accessories

are installed.
d. Verify the installed control system architecture matches approved

drawings.
e. Verify all control circuits operate at the proper voltage and are free
from grounds or faults.
f. Verify all required surge protection is installed.
g. Verify the A/C Power Table specified in "CONTROLS SYSTEM OPERATORS
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 37

MANUALS" is accurate.
h. Verify all DDC network communications with the EMCS function properly,
including commanding set points, and load shedding.
i. Verify air handling unit and VAV box coil performance by commanding all
valves 100 percent open in both heating and cooling. Record the
entering and leaving air temperatures. Record the entering water
temperature. This data shall be printed, stored, and saved for future
reference.
j. Verify each digital controller’s programming is backed up.
k. Verify all wiring, components, and panels are properly labeled.
l. Verify all required points are programmed into devices.
m. Verify all TAB work affecting controls is complete.
n. Verify all valve and actuator zero and span adjustments are set
properly.
o. Verify all sensor readings are accurate and calibrated.
p. Verify each control valve and actuator goes to normal position upon
loss of power.
q. Provide 48 hours of trend data to verify all systems are functioning as

specified. Trend reports will verify control set point adjustment per
the temperature re-set schedules (as required by sequence of operation).
Provide the following Trends:
(1) Air Handling Unit: discharge air temperature set point, return
air temperature set point, discharge air temperature (actual),
return air temperature (actual), valve command position.
(2) Make Up Air Unit: Unit discharge air temperature set point, unit
discharge air temperature (actual).
(3) VRF Fan Coil Unit: valve command position, room temperature set
point, room temperature (actual).
r. Verify each controller works properly in stand-alone mode.
s. Verify all safety controls and devices function properly, including

freeze protection and interfaces with building fire alarm systems.
t. Verify all electrical interlocks work properly.
u. Verify all workstations, notebooks and maintenance personnel interface

tools are delivered, all system and database software is installed, and
graphic pages are created for each device controlled by the DDC system.
v. Verify the as-built (shop) control drawings are completed.
w. Verify all required alarms are identified at the EMCS server and proper
notification is setup for each alarm condition.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 38

3.5.5 Conducting Performance Verification Testing
a. Provide trend report for each HVAC system that is part of the buildings
DDC system. The trend report shall include a value for each set point
listed in the sequence of operation.
b. Identify any values that do not meet the sequence of operation

requirements, make repairs (re-program) and run a new trend for the
system. Document each deficiency and corrective action taken.
c. If re-testing is required, follow the procedures for the initial PVT.

The Government may require re-testing of any control system components
affected by the original failed test.
3.5.6 Controller Capability and Labeling
Test the following for each controller:
a. Memory: Demonstrate that programmed data, parameters, and trend/ alarm

history collected during normal operation is not lost during power
failure.
b. Direct Connect Interface: Demonstrate the ability to connect directly

to each type of digital controller with a portable electronic device
like a notebook computer or PDA. Show that maintenance personnel
interface tools perform as specified in the manufacturer's technical
literature.
c. Stand Alone Ability: Demonstrate controllers provide stable and

reliable stand-alone operation using default values or other method for
values normally read over the network. Building DDC system shall
function to the project's specifications if connection to the EMCS
server is lost.
d. Wiring and AC Power: Demonstrate the ability to disconnect any

controller safely from its power source using the AC Power Table.
Demonstrate the ability to match wiring labels easily with the control
drawings. Demonstrate the ability to locate a controller's location
using the BACnet Communication Architecture Schematic and floor plans.
e. Nameplates and Tags: Show the nameplates and tags are accurate and
permanently attached to control panel doors, devices, sensors, and
actuators.
3.5.7 EMCS Server Operation
a. Show points lists agree with naming conventions.
b. Show that graphics are complete.
c. Show the UPS operates as specified.
3.5.8 BACnet Communications and Interoperability at the EMCS Server
Demonstrate proper interoperability of data sharing, alarm and event

management, trending, scheduling, and device and network management. If
available or required in this specification, use a BACnet protocol analyzer
to assist with identifying devices, viewing network traffic, and verifying
interoperability. These requirements must be met even if there is only one
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 39

manufacturer of equipment installed. Testing includes the following:
a. Data Presentation: On each BACnet Operator Workstation, demonstrate

graphic display capabilities.
b. Reading of Any Property: Demonstrate the ability to read and display

any used readable object property of any device on the network.
c. Setpoint and Parameter Modifications: Show the ability to modify all

setpoints and tuning parameters in the sequence of control or listed on
project schedules. Modifications are made with BACnet messages and
write services initiated by an operator using workstation graphics, or
by completing a field in a menu with instructional text.
d. Peer-to-Peer Data Exchange: Show all BACnet devices are installed and
configured to perform BACnet read/write services directly (without the
need for operator or workstation intervention), to implement the
project sequence of operation, and to share global data.
e. Alarm and Event Management: Show that alarms/events are installed and
prioritized according to the BAS Owner. Demonstrate time delays and
other logic is set up to avoid nuisance tripping, e.g., no status
alarms during unoccupied times or high supply air during cold morning
start-up. Show that operators with sufficient privilege can read and
write alarm/event parameters for all standard BACnet event types. Show
that operators with sufficient privilege can change routing (BACnet
notification classes) for each alarm/event including the destination,
priority, day of week, time of day, and the type of transition involved
(TO-OFF NORMAL, TO-NORMAL, etc.).
f. Schedule Lists: Show that schedules are configured for start/stop,

mode change, occupant overrides, and night setback as defined in the
sequence of operations.
g. Schedule Display and Modification: Show the ability to display any

schedule with start and stop times for the calendar year. Show that
all calendar entries and schedules are modifiable from any connected
workstation by an operator with sufficient privilege.
h. Archival Storage of Data: Show that data archiving is handled by the

operator workstation/server, and local trend archiving and display is
accomplished with BACnet Trend Log objects.
i. Modification of Trend Log Object Parameters: Show that an operator

with sufficient privilege can change the logged data points, sampling
rate, and trend duration.
j. Device and Network Management: Show the following capabilities:
(1) Display of Device Status Information
(2) Display of BACnet Object Information
(3) Silencing Devices that are Transmitting Erroneous Data
(4) Time Synchronization
(5) Remote Device Reinitialization
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 40

(6) Backup and Restore Device Programming and Master Database(s)
(7) Configuration Management of Half-Routers, Routers and BBMDs
(8) Demonstrate load shed operations if commanded by the EMCS.
3.5.9 Execution of Sequence of Operation
Demonstrate that the HVAC system operates properly through the complete
sequence of operation. Use read/write property services to globally read
and modify parameters over the internetwork.
3.5.10 Control Loop Stability and Accuracy
For all control loops tested, give the Government trend graphs of the
control variable over time, demonstrating that the control loop responds to
a 20 percent sudden change of the control variable set point without
excessive overshoot and undershoot. If the process does not allow a 20
percent set point change, use the largest change possible. Show that once
the new set point is reached, it is stable and maintained. Control loop
trend data shall be in real-time with the time between data points 30
seconds or less.
3.5.11 Performance Verification Testing Report
Upon successful completion of the PVT, submit a PVT Report to the

Government and prior to the Government taking use and possession of the
facility. Do not submit the report until all problems are corrected and
successfully re-tested. The report shall include the annotated PVT Plan
used during the PVT. Where problems were identified, explain each problem
and the corrective action taken. Include a written certification that the
installation and testing of the control system is complete and meets all of
the contract's requirements.
3.6 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
Provide a qualified instructor (or instructors) with two years minimum

field experience with the installation and programming of similar BACnet
DDC systems. Orient training to the specific systems installed.
Coordinate training times with the Contracting Officer and BAS Owner after
receiving approval of the training course documentation. Training shall
take place at the job site and/or a nearby Government-furnished location.
A training day shall occur during normal working hours, last no longer than
8 hours and include a one-hour break for lunch and two additional 15-minute
breaks. The project's approved Controls System Operators Manual shall be
used as the training text. The Contractor shall ensure the manuals are
submitted, approved, and available to hand out to the trainees before the
start of training.
3.6.1 Training Documentation
Submit training documentation for review 30 days minimum before training.

Documentation shall include an agenda for each training day, objectives, a
synopses of each lesson, and the instructor's background and
qualifications. The training documentation can be submitted at the same
time as the project's Controls System Operators Manual.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 41

3.6.2 Phase I Training - Fundamentals
The Phase I training session shall last one day and be conducted in a
classroom environment with complete audio-visual aids provided by the
contractor. Provide each trainee a printed 8.5 by 11 inch hard-copy of all
visual aids used. Upon completion of the Phase I Training, each trainee
should fully understand the project's DDC system fundamentals. The
training session shall include the following:
a. Review of O&M Manual
1. Network Drawing
2. Equipment
3. Flow Diagram
4. Sequence of Operation
5. Wiring
6. Valve Schedule
7. Damper Schedule
8. Bill of Material
b. Network
1. Communication Equipment
2. Configuration Setup of Program
3. Backup Procedures
c. Mechanical Equipment
1. Flow Diagram
2. Wiring & Terminations
3. Hardware Interlocks
4. Sequence of Operation
5. Program Decisions and Illustrations of How Program Meets
the Sequence of Operation
6. Global Programming Affecting Each Piece of Equipment
d. Building Data Base
1. Alarm Management
2. Trend Management
3. Building Global Interlocks
4. System Load Shedding & Demand Limiting
5. Utility Data (Water, Steam, Solar)
e. System Tools
1. Network Equipment
2. Supervisory Controllers
3. Equipment Controllers
4. Archives
3.6.3 Phase II Training - Operation
Provide Phase II Training shortly after completing Phase I Training. The

Phase II training session shall last one day and be conducted at the DDC
system workstation, at a notebook computer connected to the DDC system in
the field, and at other site locations as necessary. Upon completion of
the Phase II Training, each trainee should fully understand the project's
DDC system operation. The training session shall include the following:
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 42

a. A walk-through tour of the mechanical system and the installed DDC

components (controllers, valves, dampers, surge protection, switches,
thermostats, sensors, etc.)
b. Adding and removing network devices
SECTION 23 09 23.13 22 Page 43

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EMCS Equipment and Points Nomenclature for Camp Lejeune
No. Nomenclature Description

EQUIPMENT
1 AHU Air Handling Unit
2 B Heating Water Boiler
3 B Steam Boiler
4 C Chiller
5 CCC Closed Circuit Cooler
6 CCT Closed Circuit Tower
7 COM RM Communication Room
8 CP Condenser Water Pump
9 CRAC Computer Room Air Conditioner
10 CT Cooling Tower
11 CTP Cooling Tower Pump
12 CTRL PNL Control Panel
13 CU Air Cooled Condensing Unit
14 CWP Chilled Water Supply Pump
15 DECAHP Defense Commissary Agency HP
16 DHW Domestic Hot Water
17 DPR Damper
18 DTS Dual Temperature System
19 DWP Domestic Hot Water Pump
20 ECT Evaporative Cooling Tower
21 EF Exhaust Fan
22 EST Elevated Storage Tank
23 FCU Fan Coil Unit
24 FLTR Filter
25 GLBT Ground Level Booster Tank
26 HP Heat Pump (On Ground)
27 HWP Hot Water Pump
28 HWT Hot Water Tank
29 HV Heating and Ventilating Unit
30 HX Steam to Hot Water Converter
31 LS Lift Station
32 LP-PMP Loop Pump
33 MAD Mixed Air Damper
34 MAU Make-up Air Unit
35 MZ Multizone Unit
36 OA Outside Air
37 OAT Outside Air Temperature
38 PACU Package Unit
39 PHP Packaged Heat Pump (On Ground)
40 PX Plate Exchanger
41 RA Return Air
42 RAF Return Air Fan
43 RTHP (RTU) Packaged Rooftop Heat Pump Unit
44 RTMZ Rooftop Multizone Unit
45 RTU Rooftop Unit (Packaged DX)
46 RVS-VLV Reversing Valve
47 SA Supply Air

EQUIPMENT
48 STP Secondary Treatment Plant
49 SV Solenoid Valve/Steam Valve
50 TS Temperature Sensor
51 TWAC Thru-Wall Air Conditioner
52 TWHP Thru-Wall Heat Pump
53 UH Unit Heater
54 VAV Variable Air Volume
55 WAC Window Air Conditioner
56 WS Work Station
57 WSHP Water Source Heat Pump
58 WTP Water Treatment Plant
59 WP Well Pump
60 ZD Zone Mixing Damper

POINTS
61 AHU-DHUM Air Handling Unit Dehumidifier
62 AHU-OVRRD Air Handling Unit Override
63 ALM-CMD Alarm Command
64 ALM-HORN Alarm Horn
65 ALM-RST Alarm Reset
66 ALM-SIL Alarm Silence
67 BLR-A Boiler Alarm
68 BLR-C Boiler Command
69 BLR-S Boiler Start
70 BOILER-EN Boiler Enable
71 BYPD-C Bypass Damper Command
72 C-? Chiller Status
73 CD-T Cold Deck Temperature
74 CH-CMD Chiller Command
75 CH-OVR Chiller Override
76 CH-ALM Chiller Alarm
77 CH-DP Chiller Differential Pressure
78 CH-FLO-S Chiller Flow Switch
79 CHILLER-EN Chiller Enable
80 CHS-T Chiller Supply Temperature
81 CHW-DP Chilled Water Differential Pressure
82 CHW-FLOW Chilled Water Flow
83 CHW-SYS ENABLE Chilled Water System Enable
84 CLG-C Cooling Command
85 CLGMAX Cooling Maximum
86 CLG-NITE Cooling Night Set Point
87 CLG-SP Cooling Set Point
88 CLG-VLV Chilled Water Valve Status
89 CLG-VLV Chilled Water Valve Operation
90 COND1-S Condenser 1 Status
91 COND2-S Condenser 2 Status
92 COOL1-C Cooling Stage 1 Command
93 COOL2-C Cooling Stage 2 Command
94 CTFAN-C Cooling Tower Fan Command
95 CTFAN-S Cooling Tower Fan Status
96 CWR-T Chilled Water Return Temperature
97 CWS-GPM Chilled Water Supply GPM
98 CWS-T Chilled Water Supply Temperature
99 DHW-SET Domestic Hot Water Set Point
100 DHWS-T Domestic Hot Water Supply Temperature
101 DHW-TANK Domestic Hot Water Tank Temperature
102 DHW-VLV Domestic Hot Water Steam Valve
103 ELEC-HEAT Electric Heat
104 FLTR-DP Filter Differential Pressure
105 FLTR-S Air Filter Differential
106 HD-T Hot Deck Temperature
107 HTG1-C Heating Stage 1 Command

POINTS
108 HTG2-C Heating Stage 2 Command
109 HTGMAX Heating Maximum Set Point
110 HTG-NITE Heating Night Set Point
111 HTG-SP Heating Set Point
112 HTGV-CMD Heating Command
113 HTG-VLV Heating Valve
114 HUM-SPT Humidity Set Point
115 HW-ENA Hot Water Enable
116 HWP-1-C Hot Water Pump 1 Command
117 HWP-SPT Hot Water Pump Set Point
118 HWP-SS Hot Water Pump Status
119 HWR-T Hot Water Return Temperature
120 HW-SET Hot Water Reset Set Point
121 HWS-FL Hot Water Supply Flow
122 HWS-P Hot Water Supply Pressure
123 HWS-SPT Hot Water Supply Set Point
124 HWS-T Hot Water Supply Temperature
125 HW-SYS ENABLE Hot Water System Enable
126 HWVLV-C Hot Water Valve Command
127 HX-VLV Heat Exchanger Valve
128 IA-H Indoor Humidity Sensor
129 INST-DMD Instantaneous Demand
130 INTV-DMD Interval Demand
131 LOOPR-T Loop Return Temperature
132 LOOPS-T Loop Supply Temperature
133 LPMP-1-C Loop Pump 1 Command
134 MAD-CMD Mixed Air Damper Command
135 MA-T Mixed Air Temperature
136 MAX-CLG Maximum Cooling Set Point
137 MAX-HTG Maximum Heating Set Point
138 MIN-HTG Minimum Heating Set Point
139 MIN-OAD Minimum Outside Air Damper
140 OA-CFM Outside Air Cubic Feet Per Minute
141 OAD-C Outside Air Damper Position
142 OAD-SET Outside Air Damper Set Point
143 OAF-C Outside Air Fan Command
144 OAF-S Outside Air Fan Status
145 OA-H Outside Humidity Sensor
146 OA-RH Outside Air Relative Humidity
147 OA-T Outside Air Temperature
148 OCC-CLG Occupied Cooling
149 OCC-HTG Occupied Heating
150 OCCTIME Occupied Time (Schedule)
151 OCCTIMER Occupied Timer (Schedule)
152 OCLG-SP Occupied Cooling Set Point
153 OHTG-SP] Occupied Heating Set Point
154 OHWP-SPT Occupied Hot Water Sump Set Point

POINTS
155 PH-LEV PH Level
156 PH-SET PH Set Point
157 PWR-FAIL Power Fail
158 PWR-MTR Power Meter
159 RAD-C Return Air Damper Position
160 RAF-C Return Air Fan Command
161 RAF-S Return Air Fan Status
162 RA-T Return Air Temperature
163 REV-VLV Reversing Valve
164 RM-T Room Temperature
165 SA-SMKD-C Smoke Detector Command
166 SA-SMK-S Smoke Detector Status
167 SA-SP Supply Air Set Point
168 SA-T Supply Air Temperature
169 SETPNT1 Set Point 1
170 SETPNT2 Set Point 2
171 SF-C Supply Fan Command
172 SF-S Supply Fan Status
173 SF-VFD Supply Fan Variable Frequency Drive
174 SHDN-CMD Shutdown Command
175 SMK-S Duct Smoke Detector
176 STM-C Steam Command
177 STM-S Steam Pressure
178 STM-T Steam Temperature
179 STM-VLV Steam Valve Operation
180 STM-VLV Steam Valve Status
181 SUMMER Summer Mode
182 SUMWIN-C Summer/Winter Command
183 TANK-L-A Tank Level
184 TOTAL-KW Total Kilowatt (kW)
185 TOTLFLOW Total Flow
186 TRIPLOCK Trip Lock Out
187 TWR-CMD Tower Command
188 UH-ENA Unit Heater Enable
189 UH-SPT Unit Heater Set Point
190 UNOCC-CLG Unoccupied Cooling
191 UNOCC-HTG Unoccupied Heating
192 VFD-S Variable Frequency Drive Status
193 WINDO-AC Window Air Conditioner
194 WINTER Winter Mode
195 WSHP-SPT Water Source Heat Pump Set Point
196 ZNHTG-SP Zone Heating Set Point
197 ZN-T Space/Zone Temperature
THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SECTION 23 11 25
FACILITY GAS PIPING

11/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This specification section applies to incidental underground piping under

building, above ground steel piping and corrugated stainless steel tubing
(CSST) both outside (up to 5 feet beyond exterior walls) and within
buildings in compliance with NFPA 54/AGA Z223.1, "Fuel Gas Piping".
1.2 REFERENCES

AMERICAN GAS ASSOCIATION (AGA)
AGA XR0603 (2006; 8th Ed) AGA Plastic Pipe Manual for
Gas Service
AGA Z223.1 (2012) National Fuel Gas Code
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI Z21.1 (2010; Addenda A 2011; Addenda B 2012)

Household Cooking Gas Appliances
ANSI Z21.15/CSA 9.1 (2009; Addenda A 2012) Manually Operated

Gas Valves for Appliances, Appliance
Connector Valves and Hose End Valves
ANSI Z21.18/CSA 6.3 (2007; Addenda A 2010) Gas Appliance

Pressure Regulators
ANSI Z21.21/CSA 6.5 (2005; Addenda A 2010; Addenda B 2011)

Automatic Valves for Gas Appliances
ANSI Z21.78/CSA 6.20 (2010) Standard Specification for

Combination Gas Controls for Gas Appliances
ANSI Z21.80/CSA 6.22 (2011) Line Pressure Regulators
AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API)
API RP 2009 (2002; R 2007; 7th Ed) Safe Welding,

Cutting, and Hot Work Practices in
Refineries, Gasoline Plants, and
Petrochemical Plants
API Spec 6D (2008; Errata 1 2008; Errata 2 2008;

Errata 3 2009; Addendum 1 2009; Errata 4
2010; Errata 5 2010; Errata 6 2011;
Addendum 2 2011; Addendum 3 2012 )

Specification for Pipeline Valves
API Std 598 (2009) Valve Inspecting and Testing
API Std 607 (2010) Testing of Valves: Fire Test for

Soft-Seated Quarter-Turn Valves
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)
ASCE 25-06 (2008) Earthquake-Activated Automatic Gas

Shutoff Devices
ASME A13.1 (2007; R 2013) Scheme for the

Identification of Piping Systems
ASME B1.1 (2003; R 2008) Unified Inch Screw Threads

(UN and UNR Thread Form)
ASME B1.20.1 (1983; R 2006) Pipe Threads, General

Purpose (Inch)
ASME B16.11 (2011) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and

Threaded
ASME B16.21 (2011) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe

Flanges
ASME B16.3 (2011) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings,

Classes 150 and 300
ASME B16.33 (2012) Manually Operated Metallic Gas

Valves for Use in Gas Piping Systems Up to
125 psi, Sizes NPS 1/2 - NPS 2
ASME B16.39 (2009) Standard for Malleable Iron

Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250,
and 300

ASME B16.9 (2012) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought

Steel Buttwelding Fittings
ASME B18.2.1 (2012) Square and Hex Bolts and Screws

(Inch Series)
ASME B18.2.2 (2010) Standard for Square and Hex Nuts
ASME B31.9 (2011) Building Services Piping
ASME BPVC SEC IX (2010) BPVC Section IX-Welding and Brazing

Qualifications
ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 (2010) BPVC Section VIII-Rules for

Construction of Pressure Vessels Division 1
ASTM 01.01 (2013) Steel - Piping, Tubing, Fittings

Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting
Materials for High-Temperature Service and
Other Special Purpose Applications
ASTM A194/A194M (2012a) Standard Specification for Carbon

and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for
High-Pressure or High-Temperature Service,
or Both
ASTM A513/A513M (2012) Standard Specification for

Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and
Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing

Welded and Seamless
ASTM F2015 (2000; R 2006) Standard Specification for

Lap Joint Flange Pipe End Applications
CSA AMERICA, INC (CSA/AM)
CSA/AM CSA/ANSI LC 1 (2005; Addenda 1B 2011) Fuel Gas Piping

Systems Using Corrugated Stainless Steel
Tubing (CSST)
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM APP GUIDE (updated on-line) Approval Guide

http://www.approvalguide.com/

INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-25 (2008) Standard Marking System for Valves,

Fittings, Flanges and Unions


NFPA 54 (2012) National Fuel Gas Code

Code

(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1981 (2008) Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines

for Mechanical Systems, 3rd Edition
THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)
SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3 (2007) Commercial Blast Cleaning
UFC 3-310-04 (2012) Seismic Design for Buildings
UL FLAMMABLE & COMBUSTIBLE (2012) Flammable and Combustible Liquids

and Gases Equipment Directory
The gas piping system includes natural gas or propane and piping and
appurtenances from point of connection with supply system, as indicated, to
gas operated equipment within the facility. Submit operation and
maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA and 01 78 24.00 20 FACILITY ELECTRONIC OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE SUPPORT INFORMATION (eOMSI), in three separate packages.
Section 23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to
this section, with additions and modifications specified herein.
1.3.1 Gas Facility System and Equipment Operation
Include shop drawings showing piping layout, locations of system valves,

gas line markers; step-by-step procedures for system start up, operation
and shutdown (index system components and equipment to the system
drawings); isolation procedures including valve operation to shutdown or
isolate each section of the system (index valves to the system maps and
provide separate procedures for normal operation and emergency shutdown if
required to be different). Submit Data package No. 4.
1.3.2 Gas Facility System Maintenance
Include maintenance procedures and frequency for system and equipment;

identification of pipe materials and manufacturer by locations, pipe repair
procedures, and jointing procedures at transitions to other piping material
or material from a different manufacturer. Submit Data Package No.4.
1.3.3 Gas Facility Equipment Maintenance
Include identification of valves, shut-offs, disconnects, and other

equipment by materials, manufacturer, vendor identification and location;
maintenance procedures and recommended tool kits for valves and equipment;
recommended repair methods (i.e., field repair, factory repair, or
replacement) for each valve and piece of equipment; and preventive
maintenance procedures, possible failure modes and troubleshooting guide.
Submit Data Package No. 3.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Gas Piping System; G,
SD-03 Product Data
Gas equipment connectors; G,

Gas Piping System; G,
Pipe Coating Materials; G,
Pressure regulators; G,
Valves; G,
Warning and identification tape; G,
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing; G,
Pressure Tests; G,
Test With Gas; G,
SD-07 Certificates
Welders procedures and qualifications; G,

assigned number, letter, or symbol; G,
pipe coating materials; G,
Gas facility system and equipment operation; G,

Gas facility system maintenance; G,
Gas facility equipment maintenance; G,
Submit manufacturer's descriptive data and installation instructions for

approval for compression-type mechanical joints used in joining dissimilar
materials and for insulating joints. Mark all valves, flanges and fittings
in accordance with MSS SP-25.
1.5.1 Welding Qualifications
a. Weld piping in accordance with qualified procedures using

performance qualified welders and welding operators in accordance with
API RP 2009, ASME BPVC SEC IX, and ASME B31.9. Welding procedures
qualified by others, and welders and welding operators qualified by
another employer may be accepted as permitted by ASME B31.9. Notify
the Contracting Officer at least 24 hours in advance of tests, and
perform at the work site if practicable.
b. Submit a certified copy of welders procedures and qualifications

metal and PE in conformance with ASME B31.9 for each welder and welding
operator. Submit the assigned number, letter, or symbol that will be
used in identifying the work of each welder to the Contracting Officer.
1.5.2 Shop Drawings
Submit drawings for complete Gas Piping System, within 30 days of contract
award, showing location, size and all branches of pipeline; location of all
required shutoff valves; and instructions necessary for the installation of
gas equipment connectors and supports.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products and that
essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least
2 years prior to bid opening. Asbestos or products containing asbestos are
not allowed. Submit catalog data and installation instructions for pipe,
valves, all related system components, pipe coating materials and
application procedures. Conform to NFPA 54 and with requirements specified
herein. Provide supply piping to appliances or equipment at least as large
as the inlets thereof.
2.2 GAS PIPING SYSTEM AND FITTINGS
2.2.1 Steel Pipe, Joints, and Fittings
a. Pipe: Black carbon steel in accordance with ASTM A53/A53M,

Schedule 40, threaded ends for sizes 2 inches and smaller; otherwise,
plain end beveled for butt welding.
b. Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, black malleable iron.
c. Socket-Welding Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel.
d. Butt-Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, with backing rings of

compatible material.
e. Unions: ASME B16.39, black malleable iron.
f. Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5 steel flanges or

convoluted steel flanges conforming to ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1, with
flange faces having integral grooves of rectangular cross sections
which afford containment for self-energizing gasket material.
2.2.2 Steel Tubing, Joints and Fittings
Provide steel tubing conforming to ASTM 01.01, and ASTM A513/A513M, with
tubing joints made up with gas tubing fittings recommended by the tubing
manufacturer.
2.2.3 Sealants for Steel Pipe Threaded Joints
Provide joint sealing compound as listed in UL FLAMMABLE & COMBUSTIBLE,

Class 20 or less. For taping, use tetrafluoroethylene tape conforming to
UL FLAMMABLE & COMBUSTIBLE.
2.2.4 Warning and Identification
Provide pipe flow markings, warning and identification tape, and metal tags
as required.
2.2.5 Flange Gaskets
Provide gaskets of nonasbestos compressed material in accordance with

ASME B16.21, 1/16 inch thickness, full face or self-centering flat ring
type, containing aramid fibers bonded with styrene butadiene rubber (SBR)
or nitrile butadiene rubber (NBR) suitable for a maximum 600 degree F
service, to be used for hydrocarbon service.
2.2.6 Pipe Threads
Provide pipe threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1.
2.2.7 Escutcheons
Provide chromium-plated steel or chromium-plated brass escutcheons, either

one piece or split pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or set
screw.
2.2.8 Insulating Pipe Joints
2.2.8.1 Insulating Joint Material
Provide insulating joint material between flanged or threaded metallic pipe

systems where shown to control galvanic or electrical action.
2.2.8.2 Threaded Pipe Joints
Provide threaded pipe joints of steel body nut type dielectric unions with
insulating gaskets.
2.2.8.3 Flanged Pipe Joints
Provide joints for flanged pipe consisting of full face sandwich-type

flange insulating gasket of the dielectric type, insulating sleeves for
flange bolts, and insulating washers for flange nuts. Provide lap joint
flange pipe ends conforming to ASTM F2015.
2.3 VALVES
Provide lockable shutoff or service isolation valves and bypass valves as

indicated in the drawings conforming to the following:
2.3.1 Valves 2 Inches and Smaller
Provide valves 2 inches and smaller conforming to ASME B16.33 of materials

and manufacture compatible with system materials used. Provide manually
operated household cooking gas appliance valves conforming to ANSI Z21.1
and ANSI Z21.15/CSA 9.1.
2.3.2 Valves 2-1/2 Inches and Larger
Provide valves 2-1/2 inches and larger of carbon steel conforming to

API Spec 6D, Class 150.
2.4 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Provide pipe hangers and supports conforming to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.
2.5 REGULATORS AND SHUTOFF VALVES
Provide regulators conforming to ANSI Z21.18/CSA 6.3 for appliances

ANSI Z21.78/CSA 6.20 for combination gas controls for gas appliances, and
ANSI Z21.80/CSA 6.22 for line pressure regulators. Provide shutoff valves
conforming to ANSI Z21.15/CSA 9.1 for manually controlled gas shutoff valves
and ANSI Z21.21/CSA 6.5 for automatic shutoff valves for gas appliances.
2.6 SEISMIC PROVISIONS
Provide earthquake automatic gas shutoff valve conforming to ASCE 25-06,

SMACNA 1981 or excess flow valve (EFV) conforming with CSA US 3-92 IAS U.S.
Requirements 3-92 for Excess Flow Valves and UL listed or AGA listed or
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO)
listed. The earthquake valve may be either pendulum or ball construction
with remote, pneumatic electronic or electric actuator. The EFV may be
either a bypass (automatic reset) or a non-bypass type (manual reset).
2.7 BOLTING (BOLTS AND NUTS)
Stainless steel bolting; ASTM A193/A193M, Grade B8M or B8MA, Type 316, for
bolts; and ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8M, Type 316, for nuts. Dimensions of
bolts, studs, and nuts shall conform with ASME B18.2.1 and ASME B18.2.2
with coarse threads conforming to ASME B1.1, with Class 2A fit for bolts
and studs and Class 2B fit for nuts. Bolts or bolt-studs shall extend
through the nuts and may have reduced shanks of a diameter not less than
the diameter at root of threads. Bolts shall have American Standard
regular square or heavy hexagon heads; nuts shall be American Standard
heavy semifinished hexagonal.
2.8 GASKETS
Fluorinated elastomer, compatible with flange faces.
2.9 IDENTIFICATION FOR ABOVEGROUND PIPING
ASME A13.1 for legends and type and size of characters. For pipes 3/4 inch
od and larger, provide printed legends to identify contents of pipes and
arrows to show direction of flow. Color code label backgrounds to signify
levels of hazard. Make labels of plastic sheet with pressure-sensitive
adhesive suitable for the intended application. For pipes smaller than 3/4
inch od, provide brass identification tags 1 1/2 inches in diameter with
legends in depressed black-filled characters.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions
in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy or
areas of conflict before performing the work.
3.2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
Provide required excavation, backfilling, and compaction as specified in

Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL.
3.3 GAS PIPING SYSTEM
Provide a gas piping system from the point of delivery, defined as the and
bypass valve outlet of the meter set assembly, service regulator or shutoff
valve.
3.3.1 Protection and Cleaning of Materials and Components
Protect equipment, pipe, and tube openings by closing with caps or plugs
during installation. At the completion of all work, thoroughly clean the
entire system.
3.3.2 Workmanship and Defects
Piping, tubing and fittings shall be clear and free of cutting burrs and
defects in structure or threading and shall be thoroughly brushed and
chip-and scale-blown. Repair of defects in piping, tubing or fittings is
not allowed; replace defective items when found.
3.4 PROTECTIVE COVERING
3.4.1 Aboveground Metallic Piping Systems
3.4.1.1 Ferrous Surfaces
Touch up shop primed surfaces with ferrous metal primer. Solvent clean
surfaces that have not been shop primed . Mechanically clean surfaces that
contain loose rust, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by power
wire brushing or commercial sand blasted conforming to SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3
and prime with ferrous metal primer or vinyl type wash coat. Finish primed
surfaces with two coats of exterior oil paint or vinyl paint.
3.5 INSTALLATION
Install the gas system in conformance with the manufacturer's

recommendations and applicable provisions of NFPA 54 and AGA XR0603, and as
indicated. Perform all pipe cutting without damage to the pipe, with an
approved type of mechanical cutter, unless otherwise authorized. Use wheel
cutters where practicable. On steel pipe 6 inches and larger, an approved
gas cutting and beveling machine may be used.
3.5.1 Metallic Piping Installation
Bury underground piping a minimum of 18 inches below grade. Make changes

in direction of piping with fittings only; mitering or notching pipe to
form elbows and tees or other similar type construction is not permitted.
Branch connection may be made with either tees or forged branch outlet
fittings. Provide branch outlet fittings which are forged, flared for
improvement of flow where attached to the run, and reinforced against
external strains.
3.5.2 Concealed Piping in Buildings
Do not use combinations of fittings (unions, tubing fittings, running
threads, right- and left-hand couplings, bushings, and swing joints) to

conceal piping within buildings.
3.5.2.1 Piping and Tubing in Partitions
Locate concealed piping and tubing in hollow, rather than solid,

partitions. Protect tubing passing through walls or partitions against
physical damage both during and after construction, and provide appropriate
safety markings and labels. Provide protection of concealed pipe and
tubing in accordance with CSA/AM CSA/ANSI LC 1.
3.5.3 Aboveground Piping
Run aboveground piping as straight as practicable along the alignment and

elevation indicated, with a minimum of joints, and separately supported
from other piping system and equipment. Install exposed horizontal piping
no farther than 6 inches from nearest parallel wall and at an elevation
which prevents standing, sitting, or placement of objects on the piping.
3.5.4 Final Gas Connections
Unless otherwise specified, make final connections with rigid metallic pipe
and fittings. Provide accessible gas shutoff valve and coupling for each
gas equipment item.
3.5.5 Seismic Requirements
Support and brace piping and attached valves to resist seismic loads in
conformance with ASCE 25-06 and as specified in UFC 3-310-04, and Section
23 05 48.00 40 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT as indicated.
CSST tubing and fittings that are seismically qualified in accordance with
the FM APP GUIDE: Flexible Piping Systems for Flammable Gases shall meet
the seismic requirements in accordance with the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
3.6 PIPE JOINTS
Design and install pipe joints to effectively sustain the longitudinal

pull-out forces caused by contraction of the piping or superimposed loads.
3.6.1 Threaded Metallic Joints
Provide threaded joints in metallic pipe with tapered threads evenly cut
and made with UL approved graphite joint sealing compound for gas service
or tetrafluoroethylene tape applied to the male threads only. Threaded
joints up to 1-1/2 inches in diameter may be made with approved
tetrafluoroethylene tape. Threaded joints up to 2 inches in diameter may
be made with approved joint sealing compound. After cutting and before
threading, ream pipe and remove all burrs. Caulking of threaded joints to
stop or prevent leaks is not permitted.
3.6.2 Welded Metallic Joints
Conform beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and inspection of welds to

NFPA 54. Remove weld defects and make repairs to the weld, or remove the
weld joints entirely and reweld. After filler metal has been removed from
its original package, protect and store so that its characteristics or
welding properties are not affected adversely. Do not use electrodes that
have been wetted or have lost any of their coating.
3.7 PIPE SLEEVES
Provide pipes passing through concrete or masonry walls or concrete floors

or roofs with pipe sleeves fitted into place at the time of construction.
Do not install sleeves in structural members except where indicated or
approved. Make all rectangular and square openings as detailed. Extend
each sleeve through its respective wall, floor or roof, and cut flush with
each surface, except in mechanical room floors not located on grade where
clamping flanges or riser pipe clamps are used. Extend sleeves in
mechanical room floors above grade at least 4 inches above finish floor.
Unless otherwise indicated, use sleeves large enough to provide a minimum
clearance of 1/4 inch all around the pipe. Provide steel pipe for sleeves
in bearing walls, waterproofing membrane floors, and wet areas . Provide
sleeves in nonbearing walls, floors, or ceilings of steel pipe, galvanized
sheet metal with lock-type longitudinal seam, or moisture-resistant fiber
or plastic. For penetrations of fire walls, fire partitions and floors
which are not on grade, seal the annular space between the pipe and sleeve
with fire-stopping material and sealant that meet the requirement of
Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPINGG.
3.8 PIPES PENETRATING WATERPROOFING MEMBRANES
Install pipes penetrating waterproofing membranes as specified in Section

22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.
3.9 FIRE SEAL
Fire seal all penetrations of fire rated partitions, walls and floors in
accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.10 ESCUTCHEONS
Provide escutcheons for all finished surfaces where gas piping passes
through floors, walls, or ceilings except in boiler, utility, or equipment
rooms.
3.11 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
Provide drips, grading of the lines, freeze protection, and branch outlet
locations as shown and conforming to the requirements of NFPA 54.
3.12 BUILDING STRUCTURE
Do not weaken any building structure by the installation of any gas

piping. Do not cut or notch beams, joists or columns. Attach piping
supports to metal decking. Do not attach supports to the underside of
concrete filled floors or concrete roof decks unless approved by the
3.13 PIPING SYSTEM SUPPORTS
Support gas piping systems in buildings with pipe hooks, metal pipe straps,
bands or hangers suitable for the size of piping or tubing. Do not support
any gas piping system by other piping. Conform spacing of supports in gas
piping and tubing installations to the requirements of NFPA 54. Conform
the selection and application of supports in gas piping and tubing
installations to the requirements of MSS SP-69. In the support of multiple
pipe runs on a common base member, use a clip or clamp where each pipe
crosses the base support member. Spacing of the base support members is
not to exceed the hanger and support spacing required for any of the
individual pipes in the multiple pipe run. Rigidly connect the clips or
clamps to the common base member. Provide a clearance of 1/8 inch between
the pipe and clip or clamp for all piping which may be subjected to thermal
expansion.
3.14 ELECTRICAL BONDING AND GROUNDING
Provide a gas piping system within the building which is electrically

continuous and bonded to a grounding electrode as required by NFPA 70.
3.15 SHUTOFF VALVE
Install the main gas shutoff valve and bypass valve at meter controlling
the gas piping system to be easily accessible for operation, as indicated,
protected from physical damage, and marked with a metal tag to clearly
identify the piping system controlled. Install valves approximately at
locations indicated. Orient stems vertically, with operators on top, or
horizontally. Provide stop valve on service branch at connection to main
and shut-off valve on riser outside of building.
3.16 PRESSURE REGULATOR
Provide plug cock or ball valve ahead of regulator. Install regulator

outside of building and 18 inches aboveground on riser. Install regulator
inside building and extend a full-size vent line from relief outlet on
regulator to a point outside of building. Install gas meter in conjunction
with pressure regulator. On outlet side of regulator meter, provide a
union and a 3/8 inch gage tap with plug.
3.17 TESTING
Submit test procedures and reports in booklet form tabulating test and
measurements performed; dated after award of this contract, and stating the
Contractor's name and address, the project name and location, and a list of
the specific requirements which are being certified. Test entire gas
piping system to ensure that it is gastight prior to putting into service.
Prior to testing, purge the system, clean, and clear all foreign material.
Test each joint with an approved gas detector, soap and water, or an
equivalent nonflammable solution. Inspect and test each valve in
conformance with API Std 598 and API Std 607. Complete testing before any
work is covered, enclosed, or concealed, and perform with due regard for
the safety of employees and the public during the test. Install bulkheads,
anchorage and bracing suitably designed to resist test pressures if
necessary, and as directed and or approved by the Contracting Officer. Do
not use oxygen as a testing medium.
3.17.1 Pressure Tests
Submit test procedures and reports in booklet form tabulating test and
measurements performed; dated after award of this contract, and stating the
Contractor's name and address, the project name and location, and a list of
the specific requirements which are being certified. Before appliances are
connected, test by filling the piping systems with air or an inert gas to
withstand a minimum pressure of 3 pounds gauge for a period of not less
than 10 minutes as specified in NFPA 54 without showing any drop in
pressure. Do not use Oxygen for test. Measure pressure with a mercury
manometer, slope gauge, or an equivalent device calibrated to be read in
increments of not greater than 0.1 pound. Isolate the source of pressure
before the pressure tests are made.
3.17.2 Test With Gas
Before turning on gas under pressure into any piping, close all openings
from which gas can escape. Immediately after turning on the gas, check the
piping system for leakage by using a laboratory-certified gas meter, an
appliance orifice, a manometer, or equivalent device. Conform all testing
to the requirements of NFPA 54. If leakage is recorded, shut off the gas
supply, repair the leak , and repeat the tests until all leaks have been
stopped.
3.17.3 Purging
After testing is completed, and before connecting any appliances, fully

purge all gas piping. Do not purge piping into the combustion chamber of
an appliance. Do not purge the open end of piping systems into confined
spaces or areas where there are ignition sources unless the safety
precautions recommended in NFPA 54 are followed.
3.17.4 Labor, Materials and Equipment
Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for conducting the
testing and purging.
3.18 PIPE COLOR CODE MARKING
Provide color code marking of piping as specified in Section 09 90 00

PAINTS AND COATINGS, conforming to ASME A13.1.
SECTION 23 23 00
REFRIGERANT PIPING
10/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AHRI 710 I-P (2009) Performance Rating of Liquid-Line

Driers
AHRI 720 (2002) Refrigerant Access Valves and Hose

Connectors
ANSI/AHRI 750 (2007) Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion

Valves
ANSI/AHRI 760 (2007) Performance Rating of Solenoid

Valves for Use With Volatile Refrigerants

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 (2010; Addenda A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I,

J, K, L, N and O; Errata 2011; INT 1 2012;
Errata 2012; Addenda AD, SD, AE and AF
2013) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-Safety
Standard for Refrigeration Systems and
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 34-Designation and
Safety Classification of Refrigerants
ASHRAE 17 (2008) Method of Testing Capacity of

Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves
AWS A5.8/A5.8M (2011; Amendment 2012) Specification for

Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding
AWS BRH (2007; 5th Ed) Brazing Handbook
AWS Z49.1 (2012) Safety in Welding and Cutting and

Allied Processes
ASME B16.22 (2012) Standard for Wrought Copper and

Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
ASME B16.26 (2011) Standard for Cast Copper Alloy
Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes
ASME B31.1 (2012; INT 2-6, 8-10, 13, 15, 17-25, 27-31
and 42-46) Power Piping
ASME B31.5 (2013) Refrigeration Piping and Heat

Transfer Components
ASME B40.100 (2005; R 2010) Pressure Gauges and Gauge

Attachments

Welded and Seamless
ASTM A653/A653M (2011) Standard Specification for Steel

Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM B280 (2013) Standard Specification for Seamless

Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and
Refrigeration Field Service
ASTM B32 (2008) Standard Specification for Solder

Metal
ASTM B62 (2009) Standard Specification for

Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings
ASTM B75/B75M (2011) Standard Specification for Seamless

Copper Tube
ASTM B813 (2010) Standard Specification for Liquid

and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper
and Copper Alloy Tube
ASTM D3308 (2012) PTFE Resin Skived Tape
ASTM D520 (2000; R 2011) Zinc Dust Pigment
ASTM E84 (2012c) Standard Test Method for Surface

Materials

INDUSTRY (MSS)


1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Refrigerant Piping System; G
SD-03 Product Data
Refrigerant Piping System

Qualifications; G
Refrigerant Piping Tests; G
Demonstrations; G
Verification of Dimensions
SD-06 Test Reports
Refrigerant Piping Tests
SD-07 Certificates
Service Organization; G
Maintenance
1.3.1 Qualifications
Structural members shall be welded in accordance with Section 05 12 00

STRUCTURAL STEEL.
1.3.2 Contract Drawings
Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate

all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. Carefully
investigate the plumbing, fire protection, electrical, structural and
finish conditions that would affect the work to be performed and arrange
such work accordingly, furnishing required offsets, fittings, and
accessories to meet such conditions.
Protect stored items from the weather, humidity and temperature variations,
dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Proper protection and care of all
material both before and during installation is the Contractor's
responsibility. Replace any materials found to be damaged at the
Contractor's expense. During installation, cap piping and similar openings
to keep out dirt and other foreign matter.
1.5 MAINTENANCE
1.5.1 General
Submit Data Package 2 plus operation and maintenance data complying with
the requirements of Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as
specified herein.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS
a. Provide materials and equipment which are standard products of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products,
that are of a similar material, design and workmanship and that have
been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to
bid opening.
b. The 2 year use shall include applications of equipment and

materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 2 years
experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a product which has
been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products having
less than a 2 year field service record will be acceptable if a
certified record of satisfactory field operation, for not less than
6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown.
c. Products shall be supported by a service organization. System

components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated
locations. Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service
organizations for support of the equipment which includes their
addresses and qualifications. The service organizations shall be
reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and be able to
render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency
basis during the warranty period of the contract.
d. Exposed equipment moving parts, parts that produce high operating

temperature, parts which may be electrically energized, and parts that
may be a hazard to operating personnel shall be insulated, fully
enclosed, guarded, or fitted with other types of safety devices.
Install safety devices so that proper operation of equipment is not
impaired. Welding and cutting safety requirements shall be in
accordance with AWS Z49.1.
e. Manufacturer's standard catalog data, at least 5 weeks prior to the

purchase or installation of a particular component, highlighted to show
material, size, options, performance charts and curves, etc. in
adequate detail to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements.
Include in the data manufacturer's recommended installation
instructions and procedures. Provide data for the following components
as a minimum:
a. Piping and Fittings

b. Valves
c. Piping Accessories
d. Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
2.2 ELECTRICAL WORK
Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for

the operation specified and any control wiring required for controls and
devices specified, but not shown, shall be provided.
2.3 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM
Refrigerant piping, valves, fittings, and accessories shall be in

accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 and ASME B31.5, except as specified
herein. Refrigerant piping, valves, fittings, and accessories shall be
compatible with the fluids used and capable of withstanding the pressures
and temperatures of the service. Refrigerant piping, valves, and
accessories used for refrigerant service shall be cleaned, dehydrated, and
sealed (capped or plugged) prior to shipment from the manufacturer's
plant. Submit drawings, at least 5 weeks prior to beginning construction,
provided in adequate detail to demonstrate compliance with contract
requirements. Drawings shall consist of:
a. Piping layouts which identify all valves and fittings.
b. Plans and elevations which identify clearances required for

maintenance and operation.
2.4 PIPE, FITTINGS AND END CONNECTIONS (JOINTS)
2.4.1 Copper Tubing
Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B280 annealed or hard drawn as

required. Copper tubing shall be soft annealed where bending is required
and hard drawn where no bending is required. Soft annealed copper tubing
shall not be used in sizes larger than 1-3/8 inches. Joints shall be
brazed except that joints on lines 7/8 inchand smaller may be flared. Cast
copper alloy fittings for flared copper tube shall conform to ASME B16.26
and ASTM B62. Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint pressure fittings
shall conform to ASME B16.22 and ASTM B75/B75M. Joints and fittings for
brazed joint shall be wrought-copper or forged-brass sweat fittings. Cast
sweat-type joints and fittings shall not be allowed for brazed joints.
Brass or bronze adapters for brazed tubing may be used for connecting
tubing to flanges and to threaded ends of valves and equipment.
2.4.2 Solder
Solder shall conform to ASTM B32, grade Sb5, tin-antimony alloy for service
pressures up to 150 psig. Solder flux shall be liquid or paste form,
non-corrosive and conform to ASTM B813.
2.4.3 Brazing Filler Metal
Filler metal shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M, Type BAg-5 with AWS Type 3
flux, except Type BCuP-5 or BCuP-6 may be used for brazing copper-to-copper
joints.
2.5 VALVES
Valves shall be designed, manufactured, and tested specifically for

refrigerant service. Valve bodies shall be of brass, bronze, steel, or
ductile iron construction. Valves 1 inch and smaller shall have brazed
connections. Valves larger than 1 inch shall have tongue-and-groove flanged
end connections. Threaded end connections shall not be used, except in

pilot pressure or gauge lines where maintenance disassembly is required.
Internal parts shall be removable for inspection or replacement without
applying heat or breaking pipe connections. Valve stems exposed to the
atmosphere shall be stainless steel or corrosion resistant metal plated
carbon steel. Direction of flow shall be legibly and permanently indicated
on the valve body. Control valve inlets shall be fitted with integral or
adapted strainer or filter where recommended or required by the
manufacturer. Purge, charge and receiver valves shall be of manufacturer's
standard configuration.
2.5.1 Refrigerant Stop Valves
Valve shall be the globe or full-port ball type with a back-seating stem
especially packed for refrigerant service. Valve packing shall be
replaceable under line pressure. Valve shall be provided with a handwheel
or wrench operator and a seal cap. Valve shall be the straight or angle
pattern design as indicated.
2.5.2 Check Valves
Valve shall be the swing or lift type as required to provide positive

shutoff at the differential pressure indicated. Valve shall be provide
with resilient seat.
2.5.3 Liquid Solenoid Valves
Valves shall comply with ANSI/AHRI 760 and be suitable for continuous duty
with applied voltages 15 percent under and 5 percent over nominal rated
voltage at maximum and minimum encountered pressure and temperature service
conditions. Valves shall be direct-acting or pilot-operating type,
packless, except that packed stem, seal capped, manual lifting provisions
shall be furnished. Solenoid coils shall be moisture-proof, UL approved,
totally encapsulated or encapsulated and metal jacketed as required.
Valves shall have safe working pressure of 400 psi and a maximum operating
pressure differential of at least 200 psi at 85 percent rated voltage.
Valves shall have an operating pressure differential suitable for the
refrigerant used.
2.5.4 Expansion Valves
Valve shall conform to ANSI/AHRI 750 and ASHRAE 17. Valve shall be the
diaphragm and spring-loaded type with internal or external equalizers, and
bulb and capillary tubing. Valve shall be provided with an external
superheat adjustment along with a seal cap. Internal equalizers may be
utilized where flowing refrigerant pressure drop between outlet of the
valve and inlet to the evaporator coil is negligible and pressure drop
across the evaporator is less than the pressure difference corresponding to
2 degrees F of saturated suction temperature at evaporator conditions.
Bulb charge shall be determined by the manufacturer for the application and
such that liquid will remain in the bulb at all operating conditions. Gas
limited liquid charged valves and other valve devices for limiting
evaporator pressure shall not be used without a distributor or discharge
tube or effective means to prevent loss of control when bulb becomes warmer
than valve body. Pilot-operated valves shall have a characterized plug to
provide required modulating control. A de-energized solenoid valve may be
used in the pilot line to close the main valve in lieu of a solenoid valve
in the main liquid line. An isolatable pressure gauge shall be provided in
the pilot line, at the main valve. Automatic pressure reducing or constant
pressure regulating expansion valves may be used only where indicted or for
constant evaporator loads.
2.5.5 Safety Relief Valves
Valve shall be the two-way type, unless indicated otherwise. Valve shall
bear the ASME code symbol. Valve capacity shall be certified by the
National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors. Valve shall be of
an automatically reseating design after activation.
2.5.6 Evaporator Pressure Regulators, Direct-Acting
Valve shall include a diaphragm/spring assembly, external pressure

adjustment with seal cap, and pressure gauge port. Valve shall maintain a
constant inlet pressure by balancing inlet pressure on diaphragm against an
adjustable spring load. Pressure drop at system design load shall not
exceed the pressure difference corresponding to a 2 degrees F change in
saturated refrigerant temperature at evaporator operating suction
temperature. Spring shall be selected for indicated maximum allowable
suction pressure range.
2.5.7 Refrigerant Access Valves
Refrigerant access valves and hose connections shall be in accordance with

AHRI 720.
2.6 PIPING ACCESSORIES
2.6.1 Filter Driers
Driers shall conform to AHRI 710 I-P. Sizes 5/8 inch and larger shall be
the full flow, replaceable core type. Sizes 1/2 inch and smaller shall be
the sealed type. Cores shall be of suitable desiccant that will not plug,
cake, dust, channel, or break down, and shall remove water, acid, and
foreign material from the refrigerant. Filter driers shall be constructed
so that none of the desiccant will pass into the refrigerant lines.
Minimum bursting pressure shall be 1,500 psi.
2.6.2 Sight Glass and Liquid Level Indicator
2.6.2.1 Assembly and Components
Assembly shall be pressure- and temperature-rated and constructed of

materials suitable for the service. Glass shall be borosilicate type.
Ferrous components subject to condensation shall be electro-galvanized.
2.6.2.2 Gauge Glass
Gauge glass shall include top and bottom isolation valves fitted with
automatic checks, and packing followers; red-line or green-line gauge
glass; elastomer or polymer packing to suit the service; and gauge glass
guard.
2.6.2.3 Bull's-Eye and Inline Sight Glass Reflex Lens
Bull's-eye and inline sight glass reflex lens shall be provided for
dead-end liquid service. For pipe line mounting, two plain lenses in one
body suitable for backlighted viewing shall be provided.
2.6.2.4 Moisture Indicator
Indicator shall be a self-reversible action, moisture reactive, color

changing media. Indicator shall be furnished with full-color-printing tag
containing color, moisture and temperature criteria. Unless otherwise
indicated, the moisture indicator shall be an integral part of each
corresponding sight glass.
2.6.3 Vibration Dampeners
Dampeners shall be of the all-metallic bellows and woven-wire type.
2.6.4 Flexible Pipe Connectors
Connector shall be a composite of interior corrugated phosphor bronze or

Type 300 Series stainless steel, as required for fluid service, with
exterior reinforcement of bronze, stainless steel or monel wire braid.
Assembly shall be constructed with a safety factor of not less than 4 at300
degrees F. Unless otherwise indicated, the length of a flexible connector
shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the service intended.
2.6.5 Strainers
Strainers used in refrigerant service shall have brass or cast iron body,
Y-or angle-pattern, cleanable, not less than 60-mesh noncorroding screen of
an area to provide net free area not less than ten times the pipe diameter
with pressure rating compatible with the refrigerant service. Screens
shall be stainless steel or monel and reinforced spring-loaded where
necessary for bypass-proof construction.
2.6.6 Pressure and Vacuum Gauges
Gauges shall conform to ASME B40.100 and shall be provided with throttling
type needle valve or a pulsation dampener and shut-off valve. Gauge shall
be a minimum of 3-1/2 inches in diameter with a range from 0 psig to
approximately 1.5 times the maximum system working pressure. Each gauge
range shall be selected so that at normal operating pressure, the needle is
within the middle-third of the range.
2.6.7 Temperature Gauges
Temperature gauges shall be the industrial duty type and be provided for
the required temperature range. Gauges shall have Fahrenheit scale in 2
degrees graduations scale (black numbers) on a white face. The pointer
shall be adjustable. Rigid stem type temperature gauges shall be provided
in thermal wells located within 5 feet of the finished floor. Universal
adjustable angle type or remote element type temperature gauges shall be
provided in thermal wells located 5 to 7 feet above the finished floor.
Remote element type temperature gauges shall be provided in thermal wells
located 7 feet above the finished floor.
2.6.7.1 Stem Cased-Glass
Stem cased-glass case shall be polished stainless steel or cast aluminum,

9 inches long, with clear acrylic lens, and non-mercury filled glass tube
with indicating-fluid column.
2.6.7.2 Bimetallic Dial
Bimetallic dial type case shall be not less than 3-1/2 inches, stainless
steel, and shall be hermetically sealed with clear acrylic lens.
Bimetallic element shall be silicone dampened and unit fitted with external
calibrator adjustment. Accuracy shall be one percent of dial range.
2.6.7.3 Liquid-, Solid-, and Vapor-Filled Dial
Liquid-, solid-, and vapor-filled dial type cases shall be not less than
3-1/2 inches, stainless steel or cast aluminum with clear acrylic lens.
Fill shall be nonmercury, suitable for encountered cross-ambients, and
connecting capillary tubing shall be double-braided bronze.
2.6.7.4 Thermal Well
Thermal well shall be identical size, 1/2 or 3/4 inch NPT connection,
brass or stainless steel. Where test wells are indicated, provide captive
plug-fitted type 1/2 inch NPT connection suitable for use with either
engraved stem or standard separable socket thermometer or thermostat.
Mercury shall not be used in thermometers. Extended neck thermal wells
shall be of sufficient length to clear insulation thickness by 1 inch.
2.6.8 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
Pipe hangers, inserts, guides, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and
MSS SP-69.
2.6.9 Escutcheons
Escutcheons shall be chromium-plated iron or chromium-plated brass, either

one piece or split pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or set
screws.
2.7 FABRICATION
2.7.1 Factory Coating
Unless otherwise specified, equipment and component items, when fabricated

from ferrous metal, shall be factory finished with the manufacturer's
standard finish, except that items located outside of buildings shall have
weather resistant finishes that will withstand 3000 hours exposure to the
salt spray test specified in ASTM B117 using a 5 percent sodium chloride
solution. Immediately after completion of the test, the specimen shall
show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, cracking, or loss of adhesion and
no sign of rust creepage beyond 1/8 inch on either side of the scratch
mark. Cut edges of galvanized surfaces where hot-dip galvanized sheet
steel is used shall be coated with a zinc-rich coating conforming to
ASTM D520, Type I.
2.7.2 Factory Applied Insulation
Refrigerant suction lines between the cooler and each compressor shall be
insulated with not less than 3/4 inch thick unicellular plastic foam.
Factory insulated items installed outdoors are not required to be
fire-rated. As a minimum, factory insulated items installed indoors shall
have a flame spread index no higher than 75 and a smoke developed index no
higher than 150. Factory insulated items (no jacket) installed indoors and
which are located in air plenums, in ceiling spaces, and in attic spaces
shall have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed
index no higher than 50. Flame spread and smoke developed indexes shall be
determined by ASTM E84. Insulation shall be tested in the same density and
installed thickness as the material to be used in the actual construction.
Material supplied by a manufacturer with a jacket shall be tested as a
composite material. Jackets, facings, and adhesives shall have a flame
spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed index no higher than
50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, perform a

verification of dimensions in the field. Submit a letter, at least 2 weeks
prior to beginning construction, including the date the site was visited,
conformation of existing conditions, and any discrepancies found before
performing any work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Pipe and fitting installation shall conform to the requirements of

ASME B31.1. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at
the jobsite, and worked into place without springing or forcing, completely
clearing all windows, doors, and other openings. Cutting or other
weakening of the building structure to facilitate piping installation will
not be permitted without written approval. Pipe or tubing shall be cut
square, shall have burrs removed by reaming, and shall permit free
expansion and contraction without causing damage to the building structure,
pipe, joints, or hangers.
3.2.1 Directional Changes
Changes in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of

pipe 4 inches and smaller will be permitted, provided a pipe bender is used
and wide weep bends are formed. Mitering or notching pipe or other similar
construction to form elbows or tees will not be permitted. The centerline
radius of bends shall not be less than 6 diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe
showing kinks, wrinkles, flattening, or other malformations will not be
accepted.
3.2.2 Functional Requirements
Piping shall be sloped 1/2 inch/10 feet of pipe in the direction of flow to
ensure adequate oil drainage. Open ends of refrigerant lines or equipment
shall be properly capped or plugged during installation to keep moisture,
dirt, or other foreign material out of the system. Piping shall remain
capped until installation. Equipment piping shall be in accordance with
the equipment manufacturer's recommendations and the contract drawings.
Equipment and piping arrangements shall fit into space allotted and allow
adequate acceptable clearances for installation, replacement, entry,
servicing, and maintenance.
3.2.3 Fittings and End Connections
3.2.3.1 Threaded Connections
Threaded connections shall be made with tapered threads and made tight with
PTFE tape complying with ASTM D3308 or equivalent thread-joint compound
applied to the male threads only. Not more than three threads shall show
after the joint is made.
3.2.3.2 Brazed Connections
Brazing shall be performed in accordance with AWS BRH, except as modified

herein. During brazing, the pipe and fittings shall be filled with a
pressure regulated inert gas, such as nitrogen, to prevent the formation of
scale. Before brazing copper joints, both the outside of the tube and the
inside of the fitting shall be cleaned with a wire fitting brush until the
entire joint surface is bright and clean. Brazing flux shall not be used.
Surplus brazing material shall be removed at all joints. Steel tubing
joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Joints in steel tubing shall be painted with the same
material as the baked-on coating within 8 hours after joints are made.
Tubing shall be protected against oxidation during brazing by continuous
purging of the inside of the piping using nitrogen. Piping shall be
supported prior to brazing and not be sprung or forced.
3.2.3.3 Flared Connections
When flared connections are used, a suitable lubricant shall be used

between the back of the flare and the nut in order to avoid tearing the
flare while tightening the nut.
3.2.4 Valves
3.2.4.1 General
Refrigerant stop valves shall be installed on each side of each piece of

equipment such as compressors condensers, evaporators, receivers, and other
similar items in multiple-unit installation, to provide partial system
isolation as required for maintenance or repair. Stop valves shall be
installed with stems horizontal unless otherwise indicated. Ball valves
shall be installed with stems positioned to facilitate operation and
maintenance. Isolating valves for pressure gauges and switches shall be
external to thermal insulation. Safety switches shall not be fitted with
isolation valves. Filter dryers having access ports may be considered a
point of isolation. Purge valves shall be provided at all points of
systems where accumulated noncondensable gases would prevent proper system
operation. Valves shall be furnished to match line size, unless otherwise
indicated or approved.
3.2.4.2 Expansion Valves
Expansion valves shall be installed with the thermostatic expansion valve

bulb located on top of the suction line when the suction line is less than
2-1/8 inches in diameter and at the 4 o'clock or 8 o'clock position on
lines larger than 2-1/8 inches. The bulb shall be securely fastened with
two clamps. The bulb shall be insulated. The bulb shall installed in a
horizontal portion of the suction line, if possible, with the pigtail on
the bottom. If the bulb must be installed in a vertical line, the bulb
tubing shall be facing up.
3.2.4.3 Valve Identification
Each system valve, including those which are part of a factory assembly,
shall be tagged. Tags shall be in alphanumeric sequence, progressing in
direction of fluid flow. Tags shall be embossed, engraved, or stamped
plastic or nonferrous metal of various shapes, sized approximately 1-3/8

inch diameter, or equivalent dimension, substantially attached to a
component or immediately adjacent thereto. Tags shall be attached with
nonferrous, heavy duty, bead or link chain, 14 gauge annealed wire, nylon
cable bands or as approved. Tag numbers shall be referenced in Operation
and Maintenance Manuals and system diagrams.
3.2.5 Vibration Dampers
Vibration damper shall be provided in the suction and discharge lines on

spring mounted compressors. Vibration dampers shall be installed parallel
with the shaft of the compressor and shall be anchored firmly at the
upstream end on the suction line and the downstream end in the discharge
line.
3.2.6 Strainers
Strainers shall be provided immediately ahead of solenoid valves and

expansion devices. Strainers may be an integral part of an expansion valve.
3.2.7 Filter Dryer
A liquid line filter dryer shall be provided on each refrigerant circuit

located such that all liquid refrigerant passes through a filter dryer.
Dryers shall be sized in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
for the system in which it is installed. Dryers shall be installed such
that it can be isolated from the system, the isolated portion of the system
evacuated, and the filter dryer replaced. Dryers shall be installed in the
horizontal position except replaceable core filter dryers may be installed
in the vertical position with the access flange on the bottom.
3.2.8 Sight Glass
A moisture indicating sight glass shall be installed in all refrigerant

circuits down stream of all filter dryers and where indicated. Site
glasses shall be full line size.
3.2.9 Discharge Line Oil Separator
Discharge line oil separator shall be provided in the discharge line from
each compressor. Oil return line shall be connected to the compressor as
recommended by the compressor manufacturer.
3.2.10 Accumulator
Accumulators shall be provided in the suction line to each compressor as

recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
3.2.11 Flexible Pipe Connectors
Connectors shall be installed perpendicular to line of motion being

isolated. Piping for equipment with bidirectional motion shall be fitted
with two flexible connectors, in perpendicular planes. Reinforced
elastomer flexible connectors shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Piping guides and restraints related to
flexible connectors shall be provided as required.
3.2.12 Temperature Gauges
Temperature gauges shall be located specifically on, but not limited to the
following: the sensing element of each automatic temperature control
device where a thermometer is not an integral part thereof. Thermal wells
for insertion thermometers and thermostats shall extend beyond thermal
insulation surface not less than 1 inch.
3.2.13 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69,
except as modified herein. Pipe hanger types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be
used. Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be
fabricated to permit adequate adjustment after erection while still
supporting the load. Piping subjected to vertical movement, when operating
temperatures exceed ambient temperatures, shall be supported by variable
spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers.
3.2.13.1 Hangers
Type 3 shall not be used on insulated piping. Type 24 may be used only on
trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames.
3.2.13.2 Inserts
Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is

placed. Continuous inserts which allow more adjustments may be used if
they otherwise meet the requirements for Type 18 inserts.
3.2.13.3 C-Clamps
Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued in accordance with MSS SP-69 and
have both locknuts and retaining devices, furnished by the manufacturer.
Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable.
3.2.13.4 Angle Attachments
Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with an

added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.
3.2.13.5 Saddles and Shields
Where Type 39 saddle or Type 40 shield are permitted for a particular pipe
attachment application, the Type 39 saddle, connected to the pipe, shall be
used on all pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is
60 degrees F or higher. Type 40 shields shall be used on all piping less
than 4 inches and all piping 4 inches and larger carrying medium less than
60 degrees F. A high density insulation insert of cellular glass shall be
used under the Type 40 shield for piping 2 inches and larger.
3.2.13.6 Horizontal Pipe Supports
Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69 and a

support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting joint at
each change in direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall be spaced not
over 5 feet apart at valves.
3.2.13.7 Multiple Pipe Runs
In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or

clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member.
Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support
spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run.
3.2.13.8 Structural Attachments
Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in

concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and
anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5. Supports
shall not be attached to metal decking. Masonry anchors for overhead
applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only. Structural
steel brackets required to support piping, headers, and equipment, but not
shown, shall be provided under this section. Material used for support
shall be as specified under Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL.
3.2.14 Pipe Alignment Guides
Pipe alignment guides shall be provided where indicated for expansion

loops, offsets, and bends and as recommended by the manufacturer for
expansion joints, not to exceed 5 feet on each side of each expansion
joint, and in lines 4 inches or smaller not more than 2 feet on each side
of the joint.
3.2.15 Pipe Anchors
Anchors shall be provided wherever necessary or indicated to localize

expansion or to prevent undue strain on piping. Anchors shall consist of
heavy steel collars with lugs and bolts for clamping and attaching anchor
braces, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor braces shall be installed in
the most effective manner to secure the desired results using turnbuckles
where required. Supports, anchors, or stays shall not be attached where
they will injure the structure or adjacent construction during installation
or by the weight of expansion of the pipeline. Where pipe and conduit
penetrations of vapor barrier sealed surfaces occur, these items shall be
anchored immediately adjacent to each penetrated surface, to provide
essentially zero movement within penetration seal. Detailed drawings of
pipe anchors shall be submitted for approval before installation.
3.2.16 Building Surface Penetrations
Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members except where indicated

or approved. Sleeves in nonload bearing surfaces shall be galvanized sheet
metal, conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, Coating Class G-90, 20 gauge.
Sleeves in load bearing surfaces shall be uncoated carbon steel pipe,
conforming to ASTM A53/A53M, Standard weight. Sealants shall be applied to
moisture and oil-free surfaces and elastomers to not less than 1/2 inch
depth. Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members.
3.2.16.1 General Service Areas
Each sleeve shall extend through its respective wall, floor, or roof, and
shall be cut flush with each surface. Pipes passing through concrete or
masonry wall or concrete floors or roofs shall be provided with pipe
sleeves fitted into place at the time of construction. Sleeves shall be of
such size as to provide a minimum of 1/4 inch all-around clearance between
bare pipe and sleeves or between jacketed-insulation and sleeves. Except
in pipe chases or interior walls, the annular space between pipe and sleeve
or between jacket over-insulation and sleeve shall be sealed in accordance
with Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
3.2.16.2 Waterproof Penetrations
Pipes passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane shall be

installed through a 17 ounce copper sleeve, or a 0.032 inch thick aluminum
sleeve, each within an integral skirt or flange. Flashing sleeve shall be
suitably formed, and skirt or flange shall extend not less than 8 inches
from the pipe and be set over the roof or floor membrane in a troweled
coating of bituminous cement. The flashing sleeve shall extend up the pipe
a minimum of 2 inches above the roof or floor penetration. The annular
space between the flashing sleeve and the bare pipe or between the flashing
sleeve and the metal-jacket-covered insulation shall be sealed as
indicated. Penetrations shall be sealed by either one of the following
methods.
a. Waterproofing Clamping Flange: Pipes up to and including 10 inches

in diameter passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane may be
installed through a cast iron sleeve with caulking recess, anchor lugs,
flashing clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts.
Waterproofing membrane shall be clamped into place and sealant shall be
placed in the caulking recess.
b. Modular Mechanical Type Sealing Assembly: In lieu of a

waterproofing clamping flange and caulking and sealing of annular space
between pipe and sleeve or conduit and sleeve, a modular mechanical
type sealing assembly may be installed. Seals shall consist of
interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the
annular space between the pipe/conduit and sleeve with corrosion
protected carbon steel bolts, nuts, and pressure plates. Links shall
be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around
the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each nut.
After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve,
tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing elements to
expand and provide a watertight seal rubber sealing elements to expand
and provide a watertight seal between the pipe/conduit seal between the
pipe/conduit and the sleeve. Each seal assembly shall be sized as
recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe/conduit and sleeve
involved. The Contractor electing to use the modular mechanical type
seals shall provide sleeves of the proper diameters.
3.2.16.3 Fire-Rated Penetrations
Penetration of fire-rated walls, partitions, and floors shall be sealed as

specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.2.16.4 Escutcheons
Finished surfaces where exposed piping, bare or insulated, pass through

floors, walls, or ceilings, except in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms,
shall be provided with escutcheons. Where sleeves project slightly from
floors, special deep-type escutcheons shall be used. Escutcheon shall be
secured to pipe or pipe covering.
3.2.17 Access Panels
Access panels shall be provided for all concealed valves, vents, controls,
and items requiring inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of

sufficient size and located so that the concealed items may be serviced and
maintained or completely removed and replaced. Access panels shall be as
specified in Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.
3.2.18 Field Applied Insulation
Field installed insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00

THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, except as defined differently
herein.
3.2.19 Field Painting
Painting required for surfaces not otherwise specified, and finish painting
of items only primed at the factory are specified in Section 09 90 00
PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.2.19.1 Color Coding
Color coding for piping identification is specified in Section 09 90 00

PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.2.20 Identification Tags
Provide identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic or

engraved anodized aluminum indicating service and item number on all
valves and dampers. Tags shall be 1-3/8 inch minimum diameter and marking
shall be stamped or engraved. Indentations shall be black for reading
clarity. Tags shall be attached to valves with No. 12 AWG copper wire,
chrome-plated beaded chain or plastic straps designed for that purpose.
3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
Clean uncontaminated system(s) by evacuation and purging procedures

currently recommended by refrigerant and refrigerant equipment
manufacturers, and as specified herein, to remove small amounts of air and
moisture. Systems containing moderate amounts of air, moisture,
contaminated refrigerant, or any foreign matter shall be considered
contaminated systems. Restoring contaminated systems to clean condition
including disassembly, component replacement, evacuation, flushing,
purging, and re-charging, shall be performed using currently approved
refrigerant and refrigeration manufacturer's procedures. Restoring
contaminated systems shall be at no additional cost to the Government as
determined by the Contracting Officer. Water shall not be used in any
procedure or test.
3.4 TRAINING COURSE
a. Submit a schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the date of the

proposed training course, which identifies the date, time, and location
for the training. The training period shall consist of a total 8 hours
of normal working time and start after the system is functionally
completed but prior to final acceptance tests.
b. The field posted instructions shall cover all of the items

contained in the approved operation and maintenance manuals as well as
demonstrations of routine maintenance operations.
c. Submit 6 complete copies of an operation manual in bound 8 1/2 by
11 inch booklets listing step-by-step procedures required for system

startup, operation, abnormal shutdown, emergency shutdown, and normal
shutdown at least 4 weeks prior to the first training course. The
booklets shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, and parts
list. The manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model number,
service manual, and a brief description of all equipment and their
basic operating features.
d. Submit 6 complete copies of maintenance manual in bound 8 1/2 x 11

inch booklets listing routine maintenance procedures, possible
breakdowns and repairs, and a trouble shooting guide. The manuals
shall include piping layouts and simplified wiring and control diagrams
of the system as installed.
3.5 REFRIGERANT PIPING TESTS
After all components of the refrigerant system have been installed and
connected, subject the entire refrigeration system to pneumatic,
evacuation, and startup tests as described herein. Submit a schedule, at
least 2 weeks prior to the start of related testing, for each test.
Identify the proposed date, time, and location for each test. Conduct
tests in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Water and electricity
required for the tests will be furnished by the Government. Provide all
material, equipment, instruments, and personnel required for the test.
Provide the services of a qualified technician, as required, to perform all
tests and procedures indicated herein. Field tests shall be coordinated
with Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS.
Submit 6 copies of the tests report in bound 8 1/2 by 11 inch booklets
documenting all phases of the tests performed. The report shall include
initial test summaries, all repairs/adjustments made, and the final test
results.
3.5.1 Preliminary Procedures
Prior to pneumatic testing, equipment which has been factory tested and
refrigerant charged as well as equipment which could be damaged or cause
personnel injury by imposed test pressure, positive or negative, shall be
isolated from the test pressure or removed from the system. Safety relief
valves and rupture discs, where not part of factory sealed systems, shall
be removed and openings capped or plugged.
3.5.2 Pneumatic Test
Pressure control and excess pressure protection shall be provided at the

source of test pressure. Valves shall be wide open, except those leading
to the atmosphere. Test gas shall be dry nitrogen, with minus 70 degree F
dewpoint and less than 5 ppm oil. Test pressure shall be applied in two
stages before any refrigerant pipe is insulated or covered. First stage
test shall be at 10 psi with every joint being tested with a thick soap or
color indicating solution. Second stage tests shall raise the system to
the minimum refrigerant leakage test pressure specified in
ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 with a maximum test pressure 25 percent greater.
Pressure above 100 psig shall be raised in 10 percent increments with a
pressure acclimatizing period between increments. The initial test
pressure shall be recorded along with the ambient temperature to which the
system is exposed. Final test pressures of the second stage shall be
maintained on the system for a minimum of 24 hours. At the end of the 24
hour period, the system pressure will be recorded along with the ambient
temperature to which the system is exposed. A correction factor of 0.3 psi
will be allowed for each degree F change between test space initial and
final ambient temperature, plus for increase and minus for a decrease. If
the corrected system pressure is not exactly equal to the initial system
test pressure, then the system shall be investigated for leaking joints.
To repair leaks, the joint shall be taken apart, thoroughly cleaned, and
reconstructed as a new joint. Joints repaired by caulking, remelting, or
back-welding/brazing shall not be acceptable. Following repair, the entire
system shall be retested using the pneumatic tests described above. The
entire system shall be reassembled once the pneumatic tests are
satisfactorily completed.
3.5.3 Evacuation Test
Following satisfactory completion of the pneumatic tests, the pressure

shall be relieved and the entire system shall be evacuated to an absolute
pressure of 300 micrometers. During evacuation of the system, the ambient
temperature shall be higher than 35 degrees F. No more than one system
shall be evacuated at one time by one vacuum pump. Once the desired vacuum
has been reached, the vacuum line shall be closed and the system shall
stand for 1 hour. If the pressure rises over 500 micrometers after the 1
hour period, then the system shall be evacuated again down to 300
micrometers and let set for another 1 hour period. The system shall not be
charged until a vacuum of at least 500 micrometers is maintained for a
period of 1 hour without the assistance of a vacuum line. If during the
testing the pressure continues to rise, check the system for leaks, repair
as required, and repeat the evacuation procedure. During evacuation,
pressures shall be recorded by a thermocouple-type, electronic-type, or a
calibrated-micrometer type gauge.
3.5.4 System Charging and Startup Test
Following satisfactory completion of the evacuation tests, the system shall

be charged with the required amount of refrigerant by raising pressure to
normal operating pressure and in accordance with manufacturer's
procedures. Following charging, the system shall operate with high-side
and low-side pressures and corresponding refrigerant temperatures, at
design or improved values. The entire system shall be tested for leaks.
Fluorocarbon systems shall be tested with halide torch or electronic leak
detectors.
3.5.5 Refrigerant Leakage
If a refrigerant leak is discovered after the system has been charged, the
leaking portion of the system shall immediately be isolated from the
remainder of the system and the refrigerant pumped into the system receiver
or other suitable container. Under no circumstances shall the refrigerant
be discharged into the atmosphere.
3.5.6 Contractor's Responsibility
At all times during the installation and testing of the refrigeration

system, take steps to prevent the release of refrigerants into the
atmosphere. The steps shall include, but not be limited to, procedures
which will minimize the release of refrigerants to the atmosphere and the
use of refrigerant recovery devices to remove refrigerant from the system
and store the refrigerant for reuse or reclaim. At no time shall more than
3 ounces of refrigerant be released to the atmosphere in any one
occurrence. Any system leaks within the first year shall be repaired in
accordance with the requirements herein at no cost to the Government
including material, labor, and refrigerant if the leak is the result of

defective equipment, material, or installation.
SECTION 23 35 19.00 20
INDUSTRIAL VENTILATION AND EXHAUST

02/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AMCA 210 (2007) Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans

for Aerodynamic Performance Rating
AMCA 211 (2005; Rev 6 2012) Certified Ratings

Programme - Product Rating Manual for Air
Fan Performance
AMCA 300 (2008) Reverberant Room Method for Sound

Testing of Fans
AMCA 301 (2006; INT 2007) Methods for Calculating

Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data
AMCA 99 (2010) Standards Handbook
AMCA Licensed Products (Online) Directory of Products Licensed

Under the AMCA International Certified
Ratings Program
AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA)

Life for Roller Bearings

Life for Ball Bearings
AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH)
ACGIH-2092S (2004) Industrial Ventilation: A Manual

of Recommended Practice
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)
AISC 360 (2005) Specification for Structural Steel

Buildings
AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2012; Errata 2011) Structural Welding

Code - Steel
SECTION 23 35 19.00 20 Page 1

AWS D1.3/D1.3M (2008; Errata 2008) Structural Welding

Code - Sheet Steel
AWS Z49.1 (2012) Safety in Welding and Cutting and

Allied Processes
ASTM A1011/A1011M (2012b) Standard Specification for Steel,

Sheet, and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and
High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability and Ultra-High Strength

Steel Products

Strip
ASTM A36/A36M (2008) Standard Specification for Carbon

Structural Steel
ASTM A653/A653M (2011) Standard Specification for Steel

Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM B152/B152M (2013) Standard Specification for Copper

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar

ASTM D1330 (2004; R 2010) Rubber Sheet Gaskets

Environments
ASTM D2000 (2012) Standard Classification System for

Rubber Products in Automotive Applications
ASTM D2665 (2012) Standard Specification for

Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain,
Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings
NEMA ICS 1 (2000; R 2008; E 2010) Standard for

Industrial Control and Systems: General
Requirements
SECTION 23 35 19.00 20 Page 2

NEMA ICS 2 (2000; R 2005; Errata 2008) Standard for

Controllers, Contactors, and Overload
Relays Rated 600 V
NEMA ICS 6 (1993; R 2011) Enclosures
NFPA 91 (2010) Standard for Exhaust Systems for

Air Conveying of Vapors, Gases, Mists and
Noncombustible Particulate Solids
RUBBER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (RMA)
RMA IP-20 (2007) Specifications for Drives Using

Classical V-Belts and Sheaves.
Specifications for A, B, C, and D Cross
Sections
RMA IP-22 (2007) Specifications for Drives Using

Narrow V-Belts and Sheaves (Joint
RMA/MPTA), 4th Edition

(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1403 (2008) Accepted Industry Practice for

Industrial Duct Construction, 2nd Edition
SMACNA 1520 (1999) Round Industrial Duct Construction

Standards, 3rd Edition
SMACNA 1922 (2004) Rectangular Industrial Duct

Construction Standards, 2nd Edition
SMACNA 1972 CD (2012) HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual -

2nd Edition
THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)
SSPC Paint 20 (2002; E 2004) Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I,

Inorganic, and Type II, Organic)
MIL-DTL-12276 (2006; Rev E; Notice 1 2011) Varnish,

Phenolic, Baking
MIL-DTL-24441 (2009; Rev D) Paint, Epoxy-Polyamide,

General Specification for
MIL-P-21035 (1991; Rev B; Notice 2 2003) Paint, High

Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair
(Metric)
MIL-PRF-23236 (2009; Rev D) Coating Systems for Ship
SECTION 23 35 19.00 20 Page 3

Structures
CID A-A-272 (Rev B; Notice 1) Caulking Compounds
FS TT-S-001543 (Rev B; Notice 1) Sealing Compound:

Silicone Rubber Base (For Calking,
Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and
Other Structures)
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
29 CFR 1910.219 Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus
UL 214 (1997; Rev thru Aug 2001) Tests for

Flame-Propagation of Fabrics and Films
1.2.1 SMACNA Duct Construction Manuals
The recommendations in the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'

National Association (SMACNA) duct construction manuals shall be considered
mandatory requirements. Substitute the word "shall" for "should" in these
manuals.
1.2.2 Fan Data
For fans include fan curves or rating tables and derating factors. Provide
certified performance curves showing total pressure, power, and mechanical
efficiency versus flow rate of the operating density and fan speed. All
areas of unstable operation shall be indicated. For fans equipped with
adjustable capacity controls such as variable inlet or vaneaxial fans with
adjustable blade settings, minimum and maximum performance shall be
indicated along with performance for fire intermediate settings.
1.2.3 Natural Ventilation
Evaluate natural ventilation for appropriate spaces, and design air

distribution systems to operate in the same direction as natural
ventilation to reduce energy cost of pumping outdoor air.
1.2.4 Industrial Ventilation and Exhaust Systems
Submit drawings including fan installation drawings; duct systems; supports

and anchor location and load imposed.
1.2.5 Start-Up Tests
Submit start-up tests reports in accordance with the paragraph entitled

"Testing, Adjusting and Balancing." Submit final test report for the system
s tested, describing all test apparatus, instrumentation calculations,
factors, flow coefficients, sound levels, and equipment data based on
ACGIH-2092S recommended forms or reasonable facsimiles thereof to suit
project conditions. Adjustment and setting data shall be included in test
report. Submit sound level test reports for high noise level equipment.
SECTION 23 35 19.00 20 Page 4

1.3 SUBMITTALS

approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Industrial ventilation and exhaust systems; G
SD-03 Product Data
Fans; G
Dust Collection Units; G
Filter Boxes; G
SD-07 Certificates
Welding test procedures; G
Welders' identification; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Fan tests, including sound power level tests; G
Dust Collection exhaust system start-up tests; G
Sound level tests; G
Fans, Data Package 2; G
Dust Collection exhaust system, Data Package 2; G
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE DATA.
Posted operating instructions
Submit text of posted operating instructions for ventilation and

exhaust systems.
1.4.1 Welders' Identification
Submit a listing of the names and identification symbols to be used to

identify the work performed by the welder or welding operator who after
completing a welded joint shall identify it as his work by applying his
assigned symbol for a permanent record.
SECTION 23 35 19.00 20 Page 5

1.4.2 Qualification of Welders
Qualify each welder or welding operator by tests using equipment, welding

procedures and a base metal and electrode or filler wire from the same
compatible group number that will be encountered in the applicable welding
test procedures. Welders or welding operators who make acceptable
procedure qualification test welds will be considered performance qualified
for the welding procedure used. Determine performance qualification in
accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Notify the Contracting Officer 24 hours in
advance as to the time and place of tests and wherever practical perform
the tests at the work site.
1.4.3 TAB Requirements
Requirements are specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND

BALANCING.
1.5 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Provide for ventilation and exhaust system. In addition, permanently mark,

drill, and pin as an integral part of device, final adjustment and settings
pursuant to testing, adjusting, and balancing.
1.6 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.6.1 Guards and Screens
Provide metal personnel safety guards for normally accessible unducted fan
inlets and discharges and moving power transmission components in
accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1910.219.
1.6.2 Welding
Conform to AWS Z49.1 for safety in welding and cutting.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FANS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
2.1.1 General Performance, Component, and Other Requirements
Fans shall have certified performance ratings as evidenced by conformance

to the requirements of AMCA 211, and shall be listed in
AMCA Licensed Products, or shall be currently eligible for such listing.
Fans shall generally be in accordance with AMCA 99 unless superseded by
other requirements stated elsewhere herein. Determine performance data for
fans in accordance with AMCA 210. Select fans to minimize the exposure of
personnel working in or occupying the immediate installation area. The
total sound power level of the fan tests shall not exceed 90 dBA when
tested per AMCA 300 and rated per AMCA 301, or it shall be provided with an
appropriate attenuation device or devices. Scheduled fan performance is
the performance required under specified or indicated installation
conditions with specified or indicated accessories. The net installed air
performance of the fan, with accessories/appurtenances in place, shall be
sufficient to meet the scheduled performance within the limits of the fan
rating certification tolerance. Affix the manufacturer's product
identification nameplate to each unit. Apply additional requirements for
specific service or generic type or class of fan. If nonuniform air flow
conditions are likely to be encountered, contact the fan manufacturer to
SECTION 23 35 19.00 20 Page 6

ensure that the fan is rated for the additional fan inlet and outlet
effect. Install fans to minimize fan system effect in accordance with
AMCA 201. Fans shall be listed in the Directory of Products licensed to
use AMCA seal.
2.1.2 Bearings and Lubrication
Precision anti-friction or sleeve type with provisions for self-alignment

and for radial and thrust loads imposed by the service. Provide
water-cooled bearings where required for the service or recommended by the
manufacturer.
2.1.2.1 Anti-friction Bearings
Constructed of steel alloys with a certified L-10 minimum rated life of

40,000 hours under load conditions imposed by the service. Rated and
selected in accordance with ABMA 9 and ABMA 11. Provide with dust-tight
seals suitable for environment and lubricant pressures encountered; cast
ferrous metal housing, bolted-split pillow block type where located within
fan casings; grease lubricated with provisions to prevent overheating due
to excess lubricant; surface ball check type grease supply fittings.
Provide manual or automatic grease pressure relief fittings visible from
normal maintenance locations. Include lubrication extension tubes where
necessary to facilitate safe maintenance during operation and fill tubes
with lubricant prior to equipment operation. Prelubricated, sealed,
anti-friction bearings, which conform to above specified materials and L-10
life requirements, may be provided for fans requiring less than 1/2
horsepower.
2.1.2.2 Sleeve Bearings
Premounted, self-aligning, continuous oil supply, single or double ring

lubricated, insert type, with suitable provisions for shaft expansion and
such thrust as may be imposed by service loads. Provide water cooling for
shaft surface speed exceeding 1200 feet per minute. Provide each sleeve
bearing with approximately 16 ounce capacity constant level oiler and oil
level gage. Include on sleeve bearing submittal data: Bearing
manufacturing source, type, lubricant, clearances, "L/D" ratio,
antifriction metal, belt angle, shaft speed, shaft critical speed, Brinell
hardness at journal, and shaft surface finish at journal in micro-inches.
2.1.3 Motors and Motor Starters
Conform to NEMA MG 1 and NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2. Motors less than 1 hp
shall meet NEMA High Efficiency requirements. Motors 1 hp and larger shall
meet NEMA Premium Efficiency requirements. Motors shall not exceed 1800
rpm, unless otherwise indicated, and shall be variable-speed, totally
enclosed fan cooled type. Provide part-winding or wye-delta type motor
starters with weather resistant NEMA 3R enclosure in accordance with
NEMA ICS 6. Provide single-phase motors with inherent thermal overload
protection with manual reset. Provide three-phase motors with thermal
overload protection in the control panel. Provide permanently lubricated or
grease-lubricated ball or roller bearings; auxiliary lubrication and relief
fittings on outside of fan casing; arrange grease lines to minimize
pressure on bearing seals. Motor power shall not be less than brake power
required with blades set at maximum pitch angle at any air delivery from
the indicated amount down to 50 percent thereof.
SECTION 23 35 19.00 20 Page 7

2.1.4 Guards and Screens
Construct guards and screens to provide, as applicable: required strength

and clearance with minimal reduction in free area at fan inlets and
discharges; cooling; access panels for tachometer readings; ease of
sectional disassembly for maintenance and inspection functions where guard
total weight exceeds 50 pounds; weather protection where components are
weather exposed. Installed guards and screens shall not negate noise
control and vibration isolation provisions.
2.1.5 Power Transmission Components
2.1.5.1 Fan Drives
Direct or V-belt type as indicated. V-belt drives shall conform to

RMA IP-20 and RMA IP-22. Drives shall be applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's published recommendations, unless specified otherwise. Base
power rating of a V-belt drive on maximum pitch diameter of sheaves.
Provide classical belt section adjustable sheave type, with a minimum
service factor of 1.5 for drives with motors rated up to and including 30 hp.
Provide classical section or narrow section, fixed sheave or adjustable
sheave type with a minimum 1.5 service factor for drives with motors rated
over 30 hp. Provide at least two belts for drives with motors rated one hp
and above.
2.1.5.2 Sheaves
Statically and dynamically balanced, machined cast ferrous metal or

machined carbon steel, bushing type, secured by key and keyway. Pitch
diameter or fixed sheaves and adjustable sheaves, when adjusted to
specified limits, shall not be less than that recommended by NEMA MG 1.
Select adjustable sheaves that provide the required operating speed with
the sheave set at midpoint of its adjustment range. The adjustment range
for various size and type belts shall be: 16 percent, minimum for
Classical section belts; 12 percent, minimum for Narrow section belts. Belt
deflection in adjustable sheave drives shall not exceed 1 1/2 degrees.
Provide companion sheaves for adjustable sheave drives with wide groove
spacing to match driving sheaves, except that standard fixed pitch spacing
may be used for all two-through-four groove drives whose center-to-center
dimensions exceed the following: "A" and "B" Section 16 inches; "C" Section
25 inches; "D" Section 36 inches. Furnish endless, static dissipating,
oil-resistant, synthetic cloth or filament reinforced elastomer
construction belts.
2.2 CENTRIFUGAL FANS
2.2.1 General Requirements for Centrifugal Fans
Provide fan of backward inclined type blades. Arrange fans for indicated
service, and construct for the applicable AMCA 99Class pressure ratings as
indicated for system design pressure and temperature. Fan shaft shall be
solid steel, ground and finished as required for the service, with first
critical speed a minimum 25 percent higher than cataloged fan speed.
Select fan for maximum efficiency, minimum noise, and stability during all
modes of system operation. Vibration isolation mountings shall be spring
type and limit vibration transmissibility to a maximum 5 percent of the
unbalanced force at lowest equipment speed, unless otherwise specified or
indicated. Arrangement and drives shall be as indicated.
SECTION 23 35 19.00 20 Page 8

2.2.2 Industrial Exhausters
Single-width, single-inlet type arranged for indicated service and

constructed for duty at indicated system design pressure and temperature
not to exceed 200 degrees F. Continuously welded carbon steel scroll with
required reinforcement, flanged inlet and outlet connections, inlet bolted
to scroll side sheet, threaded and plugged scroll drain, bolted access door
with gasket; Carbon steel shaft, shaft seal; continuously welded carbon
steel impeller assembly. Provide protective coating on fan surfaces
exposed to air stream; Motor shall be totally enclosed type. Mount
complete assembly including motor, power transmission components, and
guards on a common vibration isolation base with spring mountings
conforming to requirements indicated.
2.2.3 Utility Sets
Single-width, single-inlet, nonoverloading scroll type. Scroll shall be

continuously welded carbon steel with required reinforcement, flanged inlet
and outlet connections, streamline orifice inlet bolted and gasketed to
scroll side sheet, threaded and piped scroll drain. Carbon steel shaft
finished as required and fitted withshaft seal; welded carbon steel
impeller assembly; backward inclined flat or single thickness airfoil type
impeller blades. Provide protective coating for fan surfaces exposed to air
stream and weather. Motor and power transmission components shall be
enclosed in ventilated weathertight hood. Discharge shall be fitted with an
automatic gravity shutter. Mount complete assembly from individual points
of support on rails and vibration isolated by double-rubber-in-shear
mountings.
2.3 Dust Collection Units and Dust Collection Exhaust System
Dust collection unit shall perform as an air filtration system used in

conjunction with the total containment bullet trap. Unit shall act as an
active lead accumulation system that captures and removes airborne lead
particulates from within the deflection aperture and deceleration chamber
of the total containment bullet trap.
The dust collection unit system shall employ a containment canister where
bullet components are directed and contained. The components can then be
removed for disposal or recycling. The canister shall be connected to the
dust collection unit with an air-tight seal. The canister shall have a
locking lid.
The dust collection unit shall maintain an average airflow rate of at least
150 cfm for every 5 feet of linear bullet trap. The velocity of the air
entering each chamber shall be maintained at above 360 fpm through the
trap's opening.
The filtration section of the dust collection unit shall process airflow at
an efficiency rate exceeding 99.99% on 1 micron particulates and 99.9% on
0.12 micron particulates.
The dust collection unit shall incorporate a self-monitoring, self-cleaning

process. All filter elements shall be disposable and have an average life
expectancy of 5000 operating hours.
Provide a redundant HEPA grade filtration system integrated with the dust
collection unit. The HEPA filter shall exceed 99.99% efficiency on 0.12
micron particulates.
SECTION 23 35 19.00 20 Page 9

ACCESSORIES:
a. Backwards Incline Fan System

b. 55 Gallon Drum (For Deposit)
c. Local or Remote Start/Stop
d. Duct Manifold System
e. Air Compressor System
f. Motor Starter
2.4 BASIC MATERIALS
2.4.1 Coated and Uncoated Carbon Steel Sheets, Plates, and Shapes
2.4.1.1 Mill Galvanized Steel Sheet
ASTM A653/A653M, lock forming quality, Coating G-90.
2.4.1.2 Mill Galvanized Steel Shapes
ASTM A36/A36M galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.
2.4.1.3 Uncoated (Black) Carbon Steel Sheet
ASTM A1011/A1011M.
2.4.1.4 Uncoated (Black) Carbon Steel Plates and Shapes
ASTM A36/A36M.
2.4.2 Corrosion Protection
Treat equipment fabricated from ferrous metals that do not have a zinc
coating conforming to ASTM A123/A123M for prevention of corrosion with a
factory coating or paint system that will withstand 125 hours in a
salt-spray fog test except that equipment located outdoors shall withstand
3,000 hours. Perform salt-spray fog test in accordance with ASTM B117.
Each specimen shall have a standard scribe mark as defined in ASTM D1654.
Upon completion of exposure, evaluate and rate the coating or paint system
in accordance with procedures A and B of ASTM D1654. The rating of failure
at the scribe mark shall be not less than six (average creepage not greater
than 1/8 inch). The rating of the unscribed area shall be less than ten
(no failure). Thickness of coating or paint system on the actual equipment
shall be identical to that on the test specimens with respect to materials,
conditions of application, and dry-film thickness.
2.5 HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEMS
Heat recovery systems are specified in Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY

DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS.
2.5.1 Filter Boxes
Provide a side access, galvanized steel duct mounted filter box assembly
with integral holding frames suitable for accommodating HEPA filters.
Provide filter box constructed of minimum 0.05 inch thick galvanized steel
with extruded aluminum tracks and individual universal holding frames with
polyurethane foam gaskets and positive sealing clips designed to
accommodate various standard size filters in various efficiency ranges.
SECTION 23 35 19.00 20 Page 10

Provide access doors with positive sealing, heavy duty quick opening
half-twist latches and sponge neoprene gasketing on each side of filter box
for removal and replacement of filters. For each filter box provide one
magnehelic gauge or inclined manometer with static pressure taps, shut-off
and vent cocks, and aluminum tubing with range 0.0073 to 0.21 psi.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
2.6.1 Filler Metal, Welding
AWS filler metal specification and grade compatible with base materials to
develop full joint strength.
2.6.2 Flashing Materials
Mill galvanized, phosphatized, steel sheet with minimum spangle, conforming

to ASTM A653/A653M, Coating G90, 24 gage minimum thickness. Mill No. 1 or
2D finished, stainless steel, fully annealed, soft temper, conforming to
ASTM A167, Type 304, 0.015 inch minimum thickness. Mill finished copper,
conforming to ASTM B152/B152M, minimum 16 ounces per square foot.
2.6.3 Flexible Connectors
2.6.3.1 General Service
Airtight, fire-retardant, fume and vapor resistant, chloroprene or

chlorosulfonated polyethylene impregnated, woven fibrous glass fabric,
rated for continuous service at 250 degrees F, conforming to UL 214, with
20 ounce per square yard weight for service at 2 inches water gage and
under and 30 ounce per square yardweight for service over 2 inches water
gage. Provide with or without integral 24 gage mill galvanized sheet metal
connectors.
2.6.3.2 Dust Collection Service
1/8 inch thick, single-ply, synthetic fabric reinforced chloroprene

suitable for 225 degrees F.
2.6.4 Gaskets
2.6.4.1 Elastomer Buna N
Sheet, 1/8 inch thick, conforming to ASTM D2000, Type 2BG410B14.
2.6.4.2 Elastomer Chloroprene
Sheet, 1/8 inch thick, conforming to ASTM D2000, Type 2BE410B14.
2.6.4.3 Rubber
Sheet, 1/8 inch thick red or black, natural, reclaimed, synthetic rubber or
mixture thereof, conforming to ASTM D1330.
2.6.5 Protective Coating Materials
2.6.5.1 Baked Unmodified Phenolic
MIL-DTL-12276, Type II.
SECTION 23 35 19.00 20 Page 11

2.6.5.2 Epoxy Coating
Conform to MIL-PRF-23236, Type I, Class 1 or MIL-DTL-24441 system, Formula

150 green primer 3 mils, Formula 151 haze gray 3 mils, and Formula 152 white
3 mils.
2.6.5.3 Inorganic Zinc Coating
SSPC Paint 20, Type I-C (Self-cure type).
2.6.5.4 Galvanizing Repair Paint
Conform to MIL-P-21035.
2.6.6 Sealants
2.6.6.1 Elastomeric
Sealant specified in these specifications or referenced standards as

elastomeric or without further qualification, shall be silicone,
polyurethane, polysulfide, polyisobutylene, or acrylic terpolymer suitable
for the service. For sealing of nongasketed duct joints during fabrication
or assembly, sealant shall be polyurethane, acrylic terpolymer or
polysulfide. Sealants shall conform to the following:
a. Silicone: Conforming to FS TT-S-001543, single component type, not

requiring primed substrate, with manufacturer published estimated life
of 30 years and a maximum 5 percent shrinkage when cured.
b. Polyurethane: Conforming to ASTM C920, Type 2, Class A, single

component type, not requiring primed substrate, with manufacturer
published estimated life of 20 years and a maximum 10 percent shrinkage
when cured.
c. Polysulfide: Conforming to ASTM C920, Type 2, Class A, single

when cured.
d. Polyisobutylene/Butyl: Conforming to CID A-A-272, Type 1, single

when cured.
e. Acrylic Terpolymer: Conforming to ASTM C920, single component type,

not requiring primed substrate, with manufacturer's published estimated
life of 20 years and a maximum 10 percent shrinkage when cured.
2.6.6.2 Caulking of Building Surface Penetration
Foamed silicones, two-component, fire-resistant, low-exotherm, room

temperature vulcanizing silicone.
2.7 SPECIALTIES
Steel, cast iron, stainless steel, nonferrous metal, or plastic to match

duct construction, or as indicated.
SECTION 23 35 19.00 20 Page 12

2.7.1 Access Ports, Test
With gasketed screw cap and flange, to suit exhaust service.
2.7.2 Damper Regulators
Incremental position indicating and locking type, with satin finish chrome
plated, flush surface mounting cover and regulator box where concealment is
required in finished spaces. For splitter dampers, provide splitter tip
mounted trunnion brackets with self-locking screw regulator or rods with
external swivel joint brackets.
2.7.3 Cast Iron Access Door
Cast iron frame, hinged and gasketed cast iron door, quick closing clamps
for watertight sealing, 6 by 9 inches minimum size.
2.8 SUPPORTS AND HANGERS
2.8.1 General Requirements for Supporting Elements
Provide ducting systems and equipment supporting elements including but not
limited to building structure attachments; supplementary steel; hanger
rods, stanchions and fixtures; vertical duct attachments; horizontal duct
attachments; anchors; supports. Design supporting elements for stresses
imposed by systems, with a minimum safety factor of 4.0 based on duct being
50 percent full of particulate conveyed. Supporting elements shall conform
to SMACNA 1403, SMACNA 1922, SMACNA 1520, and NFPA 91, as applicable, and
modified and supplementary requirements specified herein. Do not use weld
studs and powder actuated anchoring devices to support mechanical systems
components without prior approval.
2.8.2 Vertical Attachments
Provide in accordance with SMACNA Standards, except mill galvanized iron

straps shall be a minimum of one inch wide, 16 gage thick.
2.8.3 Horizontal Attachments
Provide as indicated in accordance with SMACNA Standards.
2.8.4 Supplementary Steel
Provide where required to frame structural members between existing members

or where structural members are used in lieu of commercially rated
supports. Such supplementary steel shall be fabricated in accordance with
the AISC 360.
2.8.5 Vibration Isolators
Conform to Section 23 05 48.00 40 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC

PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.
2.9 DUCTWORK, DUST COLLECTION
2.9.1 General Requirements for Dust Collection Ductwork
Fabricate system ductwork from black carbon steel, with welded seams and
flanged and gasketed joints, minimum 5 percent post-consumer recycled
SECTION 23 35 19.00 20 Page 13

content, or minimum 20 percent post-industrial recycled content. Construct

duct to handle lead particulate. Provide ductwork in accordance with best
practice recommendations and requirements of SMACNA 1922 and SMACNA 1520.
2.9.2 Fabrication of Dust Collection Ductwork
Provide indicated sizes, lengths and configuration without deviation unless

otherwise approved. Assemble ductwork airtight as defined under paragraph
entitled "Ductwork Structural Integrity and Leakage Testing," in this
section and include necessary reinforcements, bracing, supports, framing,
gasketing and fastening to guarantee rigid construction and freedom from
vibration, airflow induced motion, and excessive deflection. Welding
shall conform to requirements specified herein. Provide flanges at
equipment and enclosure connections, where necessary for ease of access to
equipment or maintenance disassembly, and where indicated. Provide elbows
and fittings a minimum 2 gages heavier than straight ducts of equal
diameter.
2.9.3 Radius Elbows
Fabricated from butt welded specified piece gore sections or from formed
welded or seamless tubing to a minimum centerline radius of 2.0 diameters.
Assemble, weld, and finish ground gore sections to eliminate internal
projections. Construct gored elbow in accordance with the following:
400 mm diameter and less 16 inches Over 400 mm diameter Over 16 inches
diameter and less diameter
90 degree - 5 piece minimum 90 degree - 7 piece minimum
2.9.4 Flanged Joints
Gasketed with full face gaskets 1/8 inch thick red or black rubber as
specified under paragraph, "Miscellaneous Materials," in this section.
2.9.5 Access Doors
Provide hinged, gasketed, and fitted with snap-action closures access

doors. Equip access door with gaskets of common weather stripping type,
foamed, closed-cell, elastomer with pressure sensitive adhesive back.
Provide cleanout adjacent to every bend and vertical riser. In horizontal
duct runs, locate cleanout door with maximum of spacing of 12 feet for ducts
12 inches or less in diameter and 20 feet for larger ducts.
2.9.6 Flexible Connectors
Provide flange secured flexible connectors, conforming to requirements

specified under paragraph entitled "Miscellaneous Materials," in this
section, utilizing bellows type metal expansion joint.
SECTION 23 35 19.00 20 Page 14

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Installation Requirements
Install in accordance to NFPA 91, and SMACNA 1922, and SMACNA 1520.
Provide mounting and supports for equipment, ductwork, and accessories,
including structural supports, hangers, vibration isolators, stands, clamps
and brackets, access doors, blast gates, and dampers. Install accessories
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Construct positive
pressure duct inside buildings airtight.
3.1.1.1 Indoor Shooting Range Facilities
For Indoor Shooting Range facilities, conform to OSHA and NIOSH.
3.1.2 Electrical Ground Continuity
Where electrical ground continuity is required, provide brazed connection

insulated, multi-strand, copper wire jumpers across points of
discontinuity. Provide connection to ground and continuity testing as part
of the work of Division 16.
3.1.3 Special Requirements for Installation of Thermoplastic Ductwork
Requirements for installation of thermoplastic ductwork for nonflammable

corrosive fume and vapor exhaust:
3.1.3.1 Slope
Slope horizontal ducts one inch in 40 feet in the direction of airflow or

one inch in 10 feet in opposite to the direction of airflow. Where
necessary, slope duct to common drainage point.
3.1.3.2 Drains
Provide drains at all low points, at internal to duct drainage

restrictions, at base of risers, and where indicated. Provide drain
connections of one inch IPS couplings with polytetrafluoroethylene paste
lubricated plug where drainage piping is not indicated, and where piping is
indicated, provide PVC Type DWV piping conforming to ASTM D2665 to points
indicated. Provide trap of one inch greater depth than the positive or
negative pressure in the duct but not less than 2 inches.
3.1.3.3 Duct Supports
Isolate duct support contact surfaces from supporting steel by 1/4 inch
thick closed-cell foamed cellular elastomer insulation material of a width
greater than support. Provide duct support system to include additional
weight due to collection of condensate and washing water in nondrainable,
deflected surface and other areas.
3.1.4 Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Work
Sheet metal thickness, reinforcement and fabrication, where not indicated,

shall conform to SMACNA 1403.
SECTION 23 35 19.00 20 Page 15

3.1.5 Building Penetrations
3.1.5.1 General Penetration Requirements
Provide properly sized, fabricated, located, and trade coordinated sleeves

and prepared openings, for duct mains, branches, and other item
penetrations, during the construction of the surface to be penetrated.
Provide sleeves for round duct 15 inches and smaller and prepared openings
for round duct larger than 15 inches and square or rectangular duct.
Fabricate sleeves, except as otherwise specified or indicated, from 20 gage,
0.0396 inch thick mill galvanized sheet metal. Sleeves penetrating load
bearing surfaces shall be standard weight galvanized steel pipe. Provide
roof penetrations as shown in SMACNA 1403.
3.1.5.2 Framed Opening
Provide framed openings in accordance with approved shop drawings. Refer

to paragraph entitled "Fire Dampers," in this section, for related work.
3.1.5.3 Clearances
Provide a minimum one inch clearance between penetrating and penetrated

surfaces. Fill clearance space with bulk fibrous glass, or mineral wood or
foamed silicone and seal and close.
3.1.5.4 Tightness
Penetration shall be weathertight, vaportight to prevent vapor transmission

to conditioned spaces, sound tight to prevent sound transmission to or
between normally occupied or finished spaces and deleterious or hazardous
substance-tight where substances or gases could migrate.
3.1.5.5 Sealants
Provide sealant of elastomeric type or foamed silicone type, as specified

under paragraph entitled "Sealants," in this section. Apply to oil free
surfaces to a minimum 3/8 inch depth.
3.1.5.6 Closure Collars
Provide a minimum 4 inches wide, unless otherwise indicated, for exposed

ducts and items on each side of penetrated surface, except where equipment
is installed. Install collar tight against the surface and fit snugly
around penetrating item without contact. Grind sharp edges smooth to
prevent damage to penetrating surface. Fabricate collars for round ducts
15 inches in diameter or less from 20 gage, 0.0396 inch nominal thickness,
mill galvanized steel. Attach collars a minimum of 4 fasteners to where
the opening is 12 inches in diameter or less, and a minimum of 8 fasteners
where the opening is 20 inches in diameter or less. Fabricate collars for
square and rectangular ducts with a maximum side of 15 inches or less from
20 gage, 0.0396 inch nominal thickness, mill galvanized steel. Fabricate
collars for round, square, and rectangular ducts with minimum dimension over
15 inches from 18 gage, 0.0516 inch in nominal thickness, mill galvanized
steel. Install collars with fasteners a maximum of 6 inches on center.
Where penetrating items are irregularly shaped and where approved, smoothly
finished, fire-retardant, foamed silicone elastomer may be utilized without
closure collar.
SECTION 23 35 19.00 20 Page 16

3.1.6 Installation of Flexible Connectors
Flexibly connect duct connected and vibration isolated fans , ducts

crossing building expansion joints and specified or indicated components ,
except where direct connections are specified or indicated. When fans are
started, stopped, or operating, flexible connector surfaces shall be
curvilinear, free of stress induced by misalignment or fan reaction forces,
and shall not transmit vibration. Leakage shall not be perceptible to the
hand when placed within 6 inches of the flexible connector surface or
joint. Provide a minimum of 6 inches and a maximum of 2 feet active length
with a minimum of one inch of slack, secured at each end by folding in to
24 gage sheet metal or by metal collar frames.
3.1.7 Installation of Supports
3.1.7.1 Selection
Select duct and equipment support system taking into account the best
practice recommendations and requirements of SMACNA 1922, SMACNA 1520, and
NFPA 91; location and precedence of work under other sections;
interferences of various piping and electrical work; facility equipment;
building configuration; structural and safety factor requirements;
vibration and imposed loads under normal and abnormal service conditions.
Indicated support sizes, configurations, and spacings are the minimal type
of supporting component required for normal loads. Where installed loads
are excessive for the normal support spacings, provide heavier duty
components or reduce the element spacing. After system start-up, replace
or correct support elements which vibrate and cause noise or possible
fatigue failure. Exercise special care to prevent cascading failure.
3.1.7.2 General Requirement for Supports
Securely attach supporting elements to building structural steel or

structural slabs. Where supports are required between building structural
members provide supplementary structural steel as specified for work under
this section. On submittals show location of supports and anchors and
loads imposed on each point of support or anchor. Do not hang ductwork or
equipment from piping, or other ducts or equipment. Attach supports to
structural framing member and concrete slab. Do not anchor supports to
metal decking unless a means is provided and approved for preventing the
anchor from puncturing the metal decking. Where supports are required,
between structural framing members, provide suitable intermediate metal
framing. Where C-clamps are used, provide retainer clips. A maximum span
of 10 feet shall exist between any two points, with lesser spans as
specified or as required by duct assemblies, interferences, and loads
imposed or permitted. Provide a minimum one set of two vertical support
elements for each point of support and each length of duct, except as
otherwise specified. Install supports on both sides of all duct turns,
branch fittings, and transitions. Cross-brace hangers sufficiently to
eliminate sway. Perforated strap hangers are prohibited. Where ductwork
system contains heavy equipment, hang such equipment independently of the
ductwork. Coordinate deflection of duct and equipment mountings and
conform to Section 23 05 48.00 40 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.
3.1.7.3 Methods of Attachment
Clamp, or weld when approved, attachment to building structural steel in

accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Construct masonry anchors selected for
SECTION 23 35 19.00 20 Page 17

overhead applications of ferrous materials only. Install masonry anchors

in rotary, non-percussion, electric drilled holes. Self-drilling anchors
may be used provided masonry drilling is performed with electric hammers
selected and applied in such a manner as to prevent concrete spalling or
cracking. Pneumatic tools are prohibited.
3.1.8 Welding
Welding test agenda shall be done in accordance with the applicable

provisions of AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.3/D1.3M.
3.1.9 Test Ports
Provide test access ports at points required for work under paragraph
entitled "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing," in this section. Locate test
ports in straight duct as far as practical downstream of fans, change of
direction fittings, takeoffs, interior to duct accessories, and like
turbulent flow areas.
3.1.10 Ductwork Cleaning
Protect duct openings from construction debris using temporary caps,

flanges, or other approved means. Clean ductwork in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Clean dirty duct interior with high
velocity water and oil-free air streams or by vacuum cleaning as required
by project conditions. After construction is complete but accessible and
prior to acceptance, remove all construction debris from exterior
surfaces. Do not close duct inspection ports until inspected by the
3.1.11 Factory and Field Painting and Finishing
3.1.11.1 Factory Work
Factory finish interior ferrous metal and other specified metallic

equipment and component surfaces with manufacturer's standard surface
preparation, primer, and finish coating. Factory finish exterior to
building space ferrous metal surfaces and other exterior to building and
interior to building metallic or nonmetallic surfaces with specified
protective coating system in accordance with the paragraph entitled
"Protective Coating Material," in this section and otherwise with
manufacturer's standard surface preparation, primer and finish which meet
the requirements of paragraph entitled "Corrosion Prevention."
3.1.11.2 Field Work
Touch-up or if necessary, repaint factory applied finishes which are

marred, damaged, or degraded during shipping, storage, handling, or
installation to match the original finish. Clean and prime field or shop
fabricated ferrous metals required for the installation specified under
this section in accordance with the applicable provisions of Section
09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. Painting of surfaces not otherwise specified
and finish painting of items only primed at the factory or elsewhere, are
specified as part of the work under Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
SECTION 23 35 19.00 20 Page 18

3.2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
3.2.1 Ductwork Structural Integrity and Leakage Testing
Leakage test procedure and apparatus shall be in accordance with

SMACNA 1972 CD. Total leakage, prorated to length of duct under test,
shall not exceed one percent of system capacity. Confirm that duct leakage
is less than three percent of coil airflow for new systems. Do not permit
leakage in positive pressure ducts in buildings carrying flammable or toxic
materials.
3.2.2 Power Transmission Components Adjustment
Test and adjust V-belts and sheaves for proper alignment and tension
preliminary to operation and after 72 hours of operation at final speed, in
the presence of the Contracting Officer. Belts on drive side shall be
uniformly loaded, not bouncing. Align direct-drive couplings to less than
half of manufacturer's allowable range of misalignment.
3.2.3 Preliminary Tests
Conduct an operational test on the entire exhaust duct systems, components,

and equipment for a period of not less than 6 hours after power
transmission components are adjusted. Replace filters, if any, after
preliminary tests and prior to conducting final acceptance tests.
3.2.4 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Work
Perform work in accordance with the applicable and recommended procedures

of: ACGIH-2092S. Provide apparatus, certified, calibrated,
instrumentation including that to measure sound levels, motor current, and
power factor. Unless approved otherwise, instruments shall be limited to
manometers and approved aneroid type gages (such as a Magnehelic).
Velometers may be used for low velocity measurements if approved by the
3.2.5 Systems Volume Acceptance Criteria
Systems final volume shall be within the following limits:
Fan: Plus 10 percent, minus zero percent of design volume at design

temperature
Equipment: Plus or minus 5 percent of design volume at design temperature
Note: Tolerances shall be taken on clean or dirty conditions as indicated

on the drawings.
3.2.6 Perform Start-Up Tests for the following:
a. Dust collection exhaust system start-up test.
3.2.7 Sound Level Tests
Report to the Contracting Officer in writing, sound levels higher than 84

dBA at hoods or at workers' normal operating positions at equipment in
addition to being included in the required test reports.
SECTION 23 35 19.00 20 Page 19

3.3 SYSTEM OPERATION DEMONSTRATION
After systems and equipment testing, adjusting, and balancing has been
completed and accepted, demonstrate the complete and correct functioning of
systems equipment and controls by operation through normal ranges and
sequences, and by simulation of abnormal conditions. Manually and
automatically cause every device to function as intended. Readjust, as
necessary, any settings and after sufficient operating time, but not less
than 6 hours, verify ability of equipment and controls to establish and
maintain stable and accurate operation and required system performance.
Note any abnormal deviations, such as excessive vibration, noise, and heat,
binding damper mechanisms, and incorrect fan rotation. Make any necessary
repairs, replacements or adjustments.
3.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT
Separate waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan, placing copper
materials, ferrous materials, and galvanized sheet metal in designated
areas for reuse. Close and seal tightly all partly used adhesives and
solvents; store protected in a well-ventilated, fire-safe area at moderate
temperature.
SECTION 23 35 19.00 20 Page 20

SECTION 23 81 00.00 20
UNITARY AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT

11/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AHRI DCUP (Online) Directory of Certified Unitary

Products

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)

ASHRAE 52.2 (2012; Errata 2013) Method of Testing

General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices
for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size
ASHRAE 55 (2010; Errata 2011; Addenda A 2011;

Addenda B, C, D, E and F 2012; Errata
2012; Addenda H and G 2013) Thermal
Environmental Conditions for Human
Occupancy
ASHRAE 62.1 (2010; Errata 2011; INT 3 2012; INT 4

2012; INT 5 2013) Ventilation for
Acceptable Indoor Air Quality

2012; INT 13-16 2012; Errata 9-12 2013;
ASME B31.5 (2013) Refrigeration Piping and Heat

Transfer Components
SECTION 23 81 00.00 20 Page 1


Steel Products


Environments
ASTM F1040 (1987; R 2007) Standard Specification for

Filter Units, Air Conditioning, Viscous -
Impingement and Dry Types, Replaceable
NEMA ICS 1 (2000; R 2008; E 2010) Standard for

Industrial Control and Systems: General
Requirements

Relays Rated 600 V
MIL-DTL-5541 (2006; Rev F) Chemical Conversion Coatings

on Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
Energy Star (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy

Efficiency Labeling System
CID A-A-50502 (Basic) Air Conditioners, (Unitary Heat

Pump), Air to Air (3,000 to 300,000 BTU)
FS OO-A-374 (Rev C; Notice 1) Air Conditioners with

Remote Condensing Units or Remote
Air-Cooled, and Water-Cooled Condenser
Units, Unitary
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)
LEED NC (2009) Leadership in Energy and

Environmental Design(tm) New Construction
Rating System
UL 873 (2007; Reprint Jul 2012) Standard for

Temperature-Indicating and -Regulating
Equipment
SECTION 23 81 00.00 20 Page 2

UL 900 (2004; Reprint Feb 2012) Standard for Air

Filter Units
Section 23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, applies to

this section with the additions and modifications specified herein.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Control system wiring diagrams
SD-03 Product Data
Heat pumps, air to air
Air conditioners
Submit documentation for Energy Star qualifications or meeting

FEMP requirements. Indicate Energy Efficiency Rating.
Filters; (LEED NC)
Thermostats
Coatings for finned tube coils
For packaged terminal units, include indoor noise rating.
SD-06 Test Reports
Salt-spray tests
Start-up and initial operational tests
Heat pumps, air to air
Air conditioners
Filters
Thermostats
Refrigerant piping and accessories
Heat pumps, air to air, Data Package 3
SECTION 23 81 00.00 20 Page 3

Air conditioners, Data Package 3
Filters, Data Package 2
Thermostats, Data Package 2

MAINTENANCE DATA and Section 01 78 24.00 20 FACILITY ELECTRONIC
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT INFORMATION (eOMSI).
Posted operating instructions
Accomplish work in accordance with the referenced publications, except as

modified by this section. Consider the advisory or recommended provisions
to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" had been substituted for the
words "should" or "could" or "may," wherever they appear. Interpret
reference to "the Authority having jurisdiction," "the Administrative
Authority," "the Owner," or "the Design Engineer" to mean the Contracting
Officer.
1.4.2 Detail Drawing
For refrigerant piping, submit piping, including pipe sizes. Submit

control system wiring diagrams.
1.4.3 Safety
Design, manufacture, and installation of unitary air conditioning equipment

shall conform to ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34.
1.4.4 Posted Operating Instructions
Submit posted operating instructions for each packaged air conditioning

unit.
1.4.5 Sizing
Size equipment based on Design Manual CS from the Air Conditioning

Contractors of America; do not oversize.
1.5 REFRIGERANTS
Refrigerants shall have an Ozone Depletion Factor (ODF) of 0.05 or less.

The ODF shall be in accordance with the "Montreal Protocol On Substances
That Deplete The Ozone Layer," September 1987, sponsored by the United
Nations Environment Programme. CFCs and HCFCs and Halons shall not be
permitted. Refrigerant shall be an approved alternative refrigerant per
EPA's Significant New Alternative Policy (SNAP) listing.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
For proper Indoor Environmental Quality, maintain positive pressure within

the building. Ventilation shall meet or exceed ASHRAE 62.1 and all
SECTION 23 81 00.00 20 Page 4

published addenda. Meet or exceed filter media efficiency as tested in

accordance with ASHRAE 52.2. Thermal comfort shall meet or exceed ASHRAE 55.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 HEAT PUMPS, AIR TO AIR
CID A-A-50502, except as modified in this article; Type II, Class 1. List
units with capacities smaller than 135,000 Btu/hr in the AHRI DCUP; in lieu
of listing in the ARI Directory, a letter of certification from ARI that
the units have been certified and will be listed in the next Directory will
be acceptable. Provide factory assembled units complete with accessories,
wiring, piping, and controls. Provide units with air filters as specified
in the paragraph entitled "Filters."
2.1.1 Energy Performance
Minimum energy efficiency shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP.
2.1.2 Air Coils
Extended-surface fin and tube type with seamless copper tubes with copper
or aluminum fins securely bonded to the tubes. Provide fins of aluminum
alloy 7072. Provide a coating on outdoor air coils as specified in the
paragraph entitled "Coatings for Finned Tube Coils." Coils to be coated
shall be part of manufacturer's standard product for capacities and ratings
indicated and specified. Provide plate type fins.
2.1.3 Supplemental Electric Heaters
Provide electrical resistance heaters integral with the unit where indicated.
Heaters shall have a total capacity as indicated. Provide internal fusing
for heaters.
2.1.4 Compressors
For compressors above 20 tons, compressor speed shall not exceed 3450 rpm.
For equipment over 10 tons, provide automatic capacity reduction of at
least 50 percent of rated capacity. Capacity reduction may be accomplished
by cylinder unloading, use of multiple, but not more than four compressors,
or a combination of the two methods. Units with cylinder unloading shall
start with capacity reduction devices in the unloaded position. Units with
multiple compressors shall have a means to sequence starting of
compressors. Provide compressors with devices to prevent short cycling
when shutdown by safety controls. Provide reciprocating compressors with
crankcase heaters, and vibration isolators.
2.1.5 Mounting Provisions
Provide units that permit mounting as indicated. Provide suitable lifting

attachment plates to enable equipment to be lifted to normal position.
2.1.6 Temperature Controls
Provide controls as specified in CID A-A-50502 and as modified herein.

Provide indoor thermostats of the adjustable type that conform to
applicable requirements of UL 873. Provide manual means for temperature
set-back. Provide thermostats capable of controlling supplemental heat as
specified in CID A-A-50502. Provide a manual selector switch or other
SECTION 23 81 00.00 20 Page 5

means to permit the supplementary heater to be energized when the heat pump
compressor and associated equipment are inoperative. Control supplementary
heater with the room thermostat while bypassing the outdoor thermostat.
Locate switch adjacent to or as an integral part of the room thermostat.
An indicator light on the room thermostat or manual heat switch shall
indicate when supplementary heaters are operating.
2.1.7 Accessories
In addition to accessories specified in CID A-A-50502, provide the

following accessories for heat pump units.
a. Protective grille around outside unit coils
b. Start capacitor kit
2.2 AIR CONDITIONERS
2.2.1 Split-System Type
FS OO-A-374, except as modified herein; Type SPY, Style A, Class 1.

Additional requirements for various system components are specified in this
paragraph; however, basic requirements for the system and system components
are contained in FS OO-A-374. Provide separate assemblies designed to be
used together. Base ratings on the use of matched assemblies. Provide
performance diagrams for units with capacities not certified by ARI to
verify that components of the air conditioning system furnished will
satisfy the capacity requirement specified or indicated. Minimum energy
efficiency shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP, at a minimum. List
units with capacities smaller than 135,000 Btu/hr in the AHRI DCUP; in lieu
of listing in the ARI Directory, a letter of certification from ARI that
units have been certified and will be listed in the next Directory will be
acceptable. Provide capacity, electrical characteristics and operating
conditions as indicated.
2.2.2 Compressors
For compressors over 20 tons, compressor speed shall not exceed 3450 rpm.
For systems over 10 tons provide automatic capacity reduction of at least
50 percent of rated capacity. Capacity reduction may be accomplished by
cylinder unloading, use of multi- or variable speed compressors, use of
multiple, but not more than four compressors, or a combination of the two
methods. Units with cylinder unloading shall start with capacity reduction
devices in the unloaded position. Units with multiple compressors shall
have means to sequence starting of compressors. Provide compressors with
devices to prevent short cycling when shut down by safety controls. Device
shall delay operation of compressor motor for at least 3 minutes but not
more than 6 minutes. Provide a pumpdown cycle for units 20 tons and over.
Provide reciprocating compressors with crankcase heaters in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations. If compressors are paralleled, provide
not less than two independent circuits.
2.2.3 Coils
On coils with all-aluminum construction, provide tubes of aluminum alloy

1100, 1200, or 3102; provide fins of aluminum alloy 7072; and provide tube
sheets of aluminum alloy 7072 or 5052. Provide a separate air cooled
condenser circuit for each compressor or parallel compressor installation.
Provide a coating on condenser coils and fins as specified in the paragraph
SECTION 23 81 00.00 20 Page 6

entitled "Coatings for Finned Tube Coils." Coils to be coated shall be part
of manufacturer's standard product for capacities and ratings indicated and
specified. Provide plate type fins.
2.2.4 Condenser Controls
Provide start-up and head pressure controls to allow for system operation
at ambient temperatures down to 14 degrees F.
2.2.5 Fans
Provide belt-driven evaporator fans with adjustable pitch pulleys; except

for units less than 5 ton capacity, direct drive with at least two speed
taps may be used. Select pulleys at approximately midpoint of the
adjustable range.
2.2.6 Filters
Provide filters of the type specified in this section.
2.2.7 Thermostats
Provide adjustable type that conforms to applicable requirements of UL 873.

Provide cooling type with contacts hermetically sealed against moisture,
corrosion, lint, dust, and foreign material. Design to operate on not more
than 1.5 degrees Fdifferential and of suitable range calibrated in degrees F.
Provide independent temperature sensing elements electrically connected to
control the compressor. Provide system selector switches to provide "COOL"
and "OFF" and fan selector switches to provide "AUTOMATIC" and "ON."
Provide relays, contactors, and transformers located in a panel or panels
for replacement and service.
2.2.7.1 Cooling
a. When thermostat is in "COOL" position with fan selector switch in

"AUTO" position, compressor, evaporator fan, and condenser fan shall
cycle together.
b. When thermostat is in "COOL" position with fan selector switch in "ON"

position, compressor, and condenser fan shall cycle together and
evaporator fan shall run continuously.
2.2.7.2 Supply Air Fan
a. When fan selector switch is in "AUTO" position with thermostat in "OFF"

position, fan shall not run.
b. When fan selector switch is in "ON" position, fan shall run

continuously.
2.3 FILTERS
Provide filters to filter outside air and return air and locate as indicated.
Provide replaceable (throw-away) type. Filters shall conform to UL 900,
Class 1. Polyurethane filters shall not be used on units with multiframe
filters. Filters shall contain a minimum of 85 percent biobased material
like cotton.
SECTION 23 81 00.00 20 Page 7

2.3.1 Replaceable Type Filters
ASTM F1040 throw-away frames and media, standard dust holding capacity, 350
fpm maximum face velocity, and one inch thick. Filters shall have a
minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 8 when tested in accordance
with ASHRAE 52.2.
2.4 COATINGS FOR FINNED TUBE COILS
Where stipulated in equipment specifications of this section, coat finned

tube coils of the affected equipment as specified below. Apply coating at
the premises of a company specializing in such work. Degrease and prepare
for coating in accordance with the coating applicator's procedures for the
type of metals involved. Completed coating shall show no evidence of
softening, blistering, cracking, crazing, flaking, loss of adhesion, or
"bridging" between the fins.
2.4.1 Phenolic Coating
Provide a resin base thermosetting phenolic coating. Apply coating by

immersion dipping of the entire coil. Provide a minimum of two coats.
Bake or heat dry coils following immersions. After final immersion and
prior to final baking, spray entire coil with particular emphasis given to
building up coating on sheared edges. Total dry film thickness shall be
2.5 to 3.0 mils.
2.4.2 Chemical Conversion Coating with Polyelastomer Finish Coat
Dip coils in a chemical conversion solution to molecularly deposit a

corrosion resistant coating by electrolysis action. Chemical conversion
coatings shall conform to MIL-DTL-5541, Class 1A. Cure conversion coating
at a temperature of 110 to 140 degrees F for a minimum of 3 hours. Coat
coil surfaces with a complex polymer primer with a dry film thickness of 1
mil. Cure primer coat for a minimum of 1 hour. Using dip tank method,
provide three coats of a complex polyelastomer finish coat. After each of
the first two finish coats, cure the coils for 1 hour. Following the third
coat, spray a fog coat of an inert sealer on the coil surfaces. Total dry
film thickness shall be 2.5 to 3.0 mils. Cure finish coat for a minimum of
3 hours. Coating materials shall have 300 percent flexibility, operate in
temperatures of minus 50 to plus 220 degrees F, and protect against
atmospheres of a pH range of 1 to 14.
2.5 MOTORS AND STARTERS
NEMA MG 1, NEMA ICS 1, and NEMA ICS 2. Variable speed. Motors less than 1
hp shall meet NEMA High Efficiency requirements. Motors 1 hp and larger
shall meet NEMA Premium Efficiency requirements. Determine specific motor
characteristics to ensure provision of correctly sized starters and
overload heaters. Provide motors to operate at full capacity with a
voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent of the motor voltage rating.
Motor size shall be sufficient for the duty to be performed and shall not
exceed its full load nameplate current rating when driven equipment is
operated at specified capacity under the most severe conditions likely to
be encountered. When motor size provided differs from size indicated or
specified, the Contractor shall make the necessary adjustments to the
wiring, disconnect devices, and branch circuit protection to accommodate
equipment actually provided. Provide general-purpose weather-resistant
type starter enclosures in accordance with NEMA ICS 6.
SECTION 23 81 00.00 20 Page 8

2.6 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND ACCESSORIES
Provide accessories as specified in Section 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING.

Install per that section and the manufacturer's requirements.
2.7 FINISHES
Provide steel surfaces of equipment including packaged terminal units, heat

pumps, and air conditioners, that do not have a zinc coating conforming to
ASTM A123/A123M, or a duplex coating of zinc and paint, with a factory
applied coating or paint system. Provide a coating or paint system on
actual equipment identical to that on salt-spray test specimens with
respect to materials, conditions of application, and dry-film thickness.
2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
2.8.1 Salt-Spray Tests
Salt-spray test the factory-applied coating or paint system of equipment

including packaged terminal units, heat pumps, and air conditioners in
accordance with ASTM B117. Conduct test for 3000 hours for equipment
installed outdoors, or 125 hours for equipment installed indoors. Test
specimens shall have a standard scribe mark as defined in ASTM D1654. Upon
completion of exposure, evaluate and rate the coating or paint system in
accordance with procedures A and B of ASTM D1654. Rating of failure at the
scribe mark shall not be less than six, average creepage not greater than
1/8 inch. Rating of the unscribed area shall not be less than 10, no
failure.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
Install equipment and components in a manner to ensure proper and

sequential operation of equipment and equipment controls. Install
equipment not covered in this section, or in manufacturer's instructions,
as recommended by manufacturer's representative. Provide proper
foundations for mounting of equipment, accessories, appurtenances, piping
and controls including, but not limited to, supports, vibration isolators,
stands, guides, anchors, clamps and brackets. Foundations for equipment
shall conform to equipment manufacturer's recommendation, unless otherwise
indicated. Set anchor bolts and sleeves using templates. Provide anchor
bolts of adequate length, and provide with welded-on plates on the head end
embedded in the concrete. Level equipment bases, using jacks or steel
wedges, and neatly grout-in with a nonshrinking type of grouting mortar.
Locate equipment to allow working space for servicing including shaft
removal, disassembling compressor cylinders and pistons, replacing or
adjusting drives, motors, or shaft seals, access to water heads and valves
of shell and tube equipment, tube cleaning or replacement, access to
automatic controls, refrigerant charging, lubrication, oil draining and
working clearance under overhead lines. Provide electric isolation between
dissimilar metals for the purpose of minimizing galvanic corrosion.
3.1.1 Unitary Air Conditioning System
Install as indicated, in accordance with requirements of ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34,

and the manufacturer's installation and operational instructions.
SECTION 23 81 00.00 20 Page 9

3.2 PIPING
Brazing, bending, forming and assembly of refrigerant piping shall conform

to ASME B31.5. Refer to Specification Section 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING
for installation requirements. Install per that section and the
manufacturer's requirements.
3.3 AUXILIARY DRAIN PANS, DRAIN CONNECTIONS, AND DRAIN LINES
Provide auxiliary drain pans under units located above finished ceilings or
over mechanical or electrical equipment where condensate overflow will
cause damage to ceilings, piping, and equipment below. Provide separate
drain lines for the unit drain and auxiliary drain pans. Trap drain pans
from the bottom to ensure complete pan drainage. Provide drain lines full
size of drain opening. Traps and piping to drainage disposal points shall
conform to Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.
3.4 ACCESS PANELS
Provide access panels in accordance with specification section 05 50 13

MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS for concealed valves, controls, dampers,
and other fittings requiring inspection and maintenance.
3.5 AIR FILTERS
Provide access space for servicing filters. Install filters with suitable
sealing to prevent bypassing of air.
3.6 FLASHING AND PIPE PENETRATIONS
Provide flashing for equipment supports and roof penetrations and flashing
where piping or ductwork passes through exterior walls in accordance with
Section 07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL.
3.7 IDENTIFICATION TAGS AND PLATES
Provide equipment, gages, thermometers, valves, and controllers with tags

numbered and stamped for their use. Provide plates and tags of brass or
suitable nonferrous material, securely mounted or attached. Provide
minimum letter and numeral size of 1/8 inch high.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.8.1 Leak Testing
Upon completion of installation of air conditioning equipment, test

factory- and field-installed refrigerant piping with an electronic-type
leak detector. Use same type of refrigerant to be provided in the system
for leak testing. When nitrogen is used to boost system pressure for
testing, ensure that it is eliminated from the system before charging.
Minimum refrigerant leak field test pressure shall be as specified in
ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34, except that test pressure shall not exceed 150 psig on
hermetic compressors unless otherwise specified as a low side test pressure
on the equipment nameplate. If leaks are detected at time of installation
or during warranty period, remove the entire refrigerant charge from the
system, correct leaks, and retest system.
SECTION 23 81 00.00 20 Page 10

3.8.2 Evacuation, Dehydration, and Charging
After field charged refrigerant system is found to be without leaks or

after leaks have been repaired on field-charged and factory-charged
systems, evacuate the system using a reliable gage and a vacuum pump
capable of pulling a vacuum of at least one mm Hg absolute. Evacuate
system in accordance with the triple-evacuation and blotter method or in
accordance with equipment manufacturer's printed instructions and recharge
system.
3.8.3 Start-Up and Initial Operational Tests
Test the air conditioning systems and systems components for proper
operation. Adjust safety and automatic control instruments as necessary to
ensure proper operation and sequence. Conduct operational tests for not
less than 8 hours.
3.8.4 Performance Tests
Upon completion of evacuation, charging, startup, final leak testing, and

proper adjustment of controls, test the systems to demonstrate compliance
with performance and capacity requirements. Test systems for not less than
8 hours, record readings hourly. At the end of the test period, average
the readings, and the average shall be considered to be the system
performance. Refer to Specification Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING
AND BALANCING for additional requirements.
3.9 WASTE MANAGEMENT
Separate waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan, placing copper
materials in designated areas for reuse. Close and seal tightly all partly
used adhesives and solvents; store protected in a well-ventilated,
fire-safe area at moderate temperature.
SECTION 23 81 00.00 20 Page 11

SECTION 23 81 28.10 22
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) MULTI-SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING AND HEAT PUMP
EQUIPMENT
07/13
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)


2012; INT 13-16 2012; Errata 9-12 2013;
ETL TESTING LABORATORIES (ETL)
ETL DLP (updated continuously) Directory of ETL

Listed Products
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)
ISO 9001 (2008; Corr 1 2009) Quality Management

Systems- Requirements
ISO 14001 (2009; Corr 1) Environmental Management

Systems - Requirements With Guidance for
Use - TECHNICAL CORRIGENDUM 1 - Second
Edition

Code
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
Energy Star (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy

Efficiency Labeling System
SECTION 23 81 28.10 22 Page 1

1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Control system wiring diagrams
Submit Shop Drawings, at least 5 weeks prior to beginning

construction, provided in adequate detail to demonstrate
compliance with contract requirements.
SD-03 Product Data
Indoor Units; G
Outdoor Units; G
Refrigerant Valves; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Performance Tests; G
Manufacturers Installation Instructions
Operation and Maintenance Training

MAINTENANCE DATA and 01 78 24.00 20 FACILITY ELECTRONIC OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT INFORMATION (eOMSI).
Indoor Units; G, Data Package 3
Outdoor Units; G, Data Package 3

applies to work specified in this section.
EQUIPMENT, applies to work specified in this section.
Section 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING, applies to work specified in this

section.
a. Provide a complete air cooled, multiple evaporator, direct expansion
SECTION 23 81 28.10 22 Page 2

heating and cooling system. The system shall consist of multiple

evaporators using PID control The outdoor unit shall be a direct
expansion (DX), air-cooled heat recovery air-conditioning system,
variable speed driven compressor multi zone split system, using R410A
refrigerant. The outdoor unit may connect an indoor evaporator
capacity up to 200 percent to that of the outdoor condensing unit
capacity. All indoor units shall each be capable of operating
separately with individual temperature control.
b. The outdoor units shall be interconnected to the indoor units in

accordance with the manufacturer's engineering data detailing each
available indoor unit. The indoor units shall be connected to the
outdoor utilizing the manufacturer's specified piping joints and
headers.
a. The units shall be listed by ETL DLP and bear the ETL label.
b. All wiring shall be in accordance with NFPA 70, the National Electric
Code.
c. The system will bear the Energy Star label.
d. The system will be produced in an ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 facility. The
system shall be factory tested for safety and function.
e. The outdoor unit shall be factory charged with R410A.
Unit shall be stored and handled according to the manufacturer's

recommendations.
1.7 WARRANTY
The units shall have a manufacturer's warranty for a period of one (1) year
from date of installation. The units shall have a limited labor warranty
for a period of one (1) year from date of installation. The compressors
shall have a minimum warranty of 5 years parts and labor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 OUTDOOR UNITS
2.1.1 General
The outdoor unit shall be designed specifically for use with all other
series components.
a. The outdoor unit shall be factory assembled and pre-wired with all
necessary electronic and refrigerant controls. The refrigeration
circuit of the condensing unit shall consist of a scroll compressor,
motors, fans, condenser coil, electronic expansion valve, solenoid
valves, 4 way valve, distribution headers, capillaries, filters, shut
off valves, oil separators, service parts, liquid receivers and
accumulators.
b. Both liquid and suction lines must be individually insulated between
SECTION 23 81 28.10 22 Page 3

the outdoor and indoor units.
c. The outdoor unit can be wired and piped with outdoor unit access from
left, right or rear.
d. The connection ratio of indoor units must be individually insulated

between the outdoor and indoor units.
e. The sound pressure dB(A) at rated conditions shall be a value of 58

decibels at 3 feet from the front of the unit. The outdoor unit shall
be capable of operating at further reduced noise during the night time.
f. The system will automatically restart operation after a power failure

and will not cause any settings to be lost, thus eliminating the need
for re-programming.
g. The outdoor unit shall be modular in design and should allow for a
side-by-side installation with minimum spacing.
h. The following safety devices shall be included on the condensing unit:

high pressure switch, control circuit fuses, crankcase heaters, fusible
plug, high pressure switch, overload relay, inverter overload
protector, thermal protectors for compressor and fan motors,
overcurrent protection for the inverter and anti-recycling timers. To
ensure the liquid refrigerant does not flash when supplying to the
various fan coil units, the circuit shall be provided with a
sub-cooling feature. Oil recovery cycle shall be automatic occurring 2
hours after start of operation and then every 8 hours of operation.
i. The outdoor unit shall be capable of heating operation at 0 degrees F

dry bulb ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls.
2.1.2 Condenser Coil
a. The condenser coil shall be manufactured from copper tubes expanded

into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
b. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchanger,
rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance.
c. The coils shall be complete with corrosion treatment of an acrylic

resin type. The thickness of the coating must be between 2.0 to 3.0
microns.
d. Coils shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 at the

factory and be suitable for the working pressure of the installed
system.
2.1.3 Compressor
a. The scroll compressor shall be variable speed controlled which is

capable of changing the speed to follow the variations in total cooling
load as determined by the suction gas pressure as measured in the
condensing unit.
b. The inverter driven compressor in each condensing unit shall be of

highly efficient reluctance DC, hermetically sealed scroll.
c. The capacity control range shall be 6 to 100 percent, with 29
SECTION 23 81 28.10 22 Page 4

individual capacity steps. Each non-inverter compressor shall also be

of the hermetically sealed scroll type.
d. Each compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater, high

pressure safety switch, and internal thermal overload protector.
e. Oil separator shall be standard with equipment together with an oil

balancing circuit.
f. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.
g. The control wiring shall be a two-wire multiplex transmission system,

making it possible to connect multiple indoor units to one outdoor unit
with 2-cable wire, thus simplifying the wiring operation.
h. The VRV system must interface with the BACnet DDC system as described
in Section 23 09 23.13 22 BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR
HVAC.
i. The control wiring lengths are: outdoor to indoor unit is 6,665 ft,
outdoor to central controller is 3,330 ft, outdoor unit to remote
controller is 1,665 ft. Wiring type is 16 AWG, 2 wire, non-polarity,
non-shielded, stranded.
2.2 BRANCH SELECTOR BOX FOR VRV HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM
2.2.1 General
The branch selector boxes shall be provided for use with heat recovery
system components.
a. These selector boxes shall be factory assembled, wired and piped.
b. The sum of connected capacity of all indoor air handlers shall range up
to 200 percent of rated capacity.
c. These branch controllers must be run tested at the factory.
d. These selector boxes must be mounted indoors.
e. When simultaneously heating and cooling, the units in heated mode shall
energize their sub cooling solenoid valve.
2.2.2 Unit Cabinet
a. These units shall have a galvanized steel plate casing.
b. Each cabinet shall house multiple refrigeration control valves and a

liquid gas separator.
c. The cabinet shall contain a tube in tube heat exchanger.
d. The unit shall have sound absorption thermal insulation material made
of flame and heat resistant foamed polyethylene.
2.2.3 Refrigerant Valves
a. The unit shall be furnished with a 3-way refrigerant valve to control

the direction of refrigerant flow.
SECTION 23 81 28.10 22 Page 5

b. Electronic expansion valves shall be used to control the variable

refrigerant flow.
c. The refrigerant connections must be of the solder-joint type.
2.2.4 Drainage
a. The unit shall not require drainage.
b. The control voltage between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be
non-shielded 2 conductor cable.
2.3 INDOOR UNITS - CEILING CONCEALED DUCTED UNIT
2.3.1 General
The indoor unit shall be a built-in ceiling concealed fan coil unit,
operable with R410A refrigerant, equipped with an electronic expansion
valve, for installation into the ceiling cavity. The unit shall be
constructed of a galvanized steel casing. It shall be available from 7,500
Btu/h to 48,000 Btu/h capacities and compatible with the outdoor unit heat
pump and heat recovery model. It shall be a horizontal discharge air with
horizontal return air or bottom return air configuration. Unit shall be a
low height (11-7/8") construction. Computerized PID control shall be used
to maintain room temperature within 1 degrees F. The unit shall be
equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while
inhibiting changes in room temperature. Included as standard equipment,
MERV B filters, isolation valves at evaporator, a condensate drain pan and
drain pump kit. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 35 dB(A)
to 43 dB(A) at low speed 5 feet below the suction grille.
2.3.2 Indoor Unit
a. The indoor unit shall be completely factory assembled and tested.

Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional
expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector,
solder-joint connections, condensate drain pan, condensate drain pump,
self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and
test run switch. The unit shall have an adjustable external static
pressure switch.
b. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air
prior to shipment from the factory.
c. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit.
d. Return air shall be through a net mold resistant filter.
e. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan and condensate
pump.
f. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor.
g. Switch box shall be reached from the side or bottom for ease of service
and maintenance.
SECTION 23 81 28.10 22 Page 6

2.3.3 Unit Cabinet
The cabinet shall be located into the ceiling and ducted to the supply and
return openings. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing
foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation. Optional high efficiency
air filters shall be available for the unit.
2.3.4 Fan
The fan shall be direct-drive Sirocco type fan, statically and dynamically
balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available. The air flow
rate shall be available in high and low settings. The fan motor shall be
thermally protected and shall be tested in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP.
2.3.5 Filter
The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long-life filter

with mildew proof resin.
2.3.6 Coil
a. Coils shall be the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes
expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
b. The coil shall be a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled
bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance.
c. The coil shall be a 3 row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 14 FPI
design completely factory tested.
d. The refrigerant connections shall be solder-joint connections and the

condensate will be 1 -1/4 inch outside diameter PVC.
e. A condensate pan shall be located under the coil.
f. A condensate pump shall be located below the coil in the condensate pan
with a built in safety arm.
g. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line.
2.3.7 Electrical
Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be
a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). Transmission (control) wiring
between the indoor and remote controller shall be a maximum distance of
1,640 feet.
2.3.8 Control
The unit shall have controls to perform input functions necessary to

operate the system. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with
connection to BACnet networks. Submit control system wiring diagrams
2.3.9 Accessories
Provide a wall mounted, hard wired remote sensor kit for ceiling-embedded
type fan coils. The temperature sensor shall be located where indicated in
the documents, if not indicated, contractor shall request a location from
the engineer in writing.
SECTION 23 81 28.10 22 Page 7

2.4 INDIVIDUAL ZONE CONTROLLER - WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
2.4.1 Physical Characteristics
The control system shall be a neutral color plastic material. Each control
may have a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
2.4.2 Electrical Characteristics
2.4.2.1 General
From each circuit board to the controls, the electrical voltage shall be 16
volts DC.
2.4.2.2 Wiring
Control wiring shall be installed in a daisy chain configuration from

indoor unit to indoor unit then to the branch selector box and outdoor
unit. Control wiring shall run from the indoor unit terminal block to the
specific. The wire shall be a non-shielded, 2-core sheathed vinyl cord or
cable, size AWG18-2.
2.4.3 Controller Characteristics
The wired remote controller shall be able to control 1 group (maximum of 16

fan coil units) and shall be able to function as follows:
a. The controller shall have a maximum wiring length of 1,640 feet.
b. The controller shall have a self diagnosis function that constantly

monitors the system for malfunctions (total of 80 components).
c. The controller shall be able to immediately display fault location and

condition.
d. An LCD digital display will allow the temperature to be set in 1

degrees F units.
e. The controller shall monitor room temperature and preset temperature by

microcomputer and can select cool/heat operation mode automatically.
f. The controller shall allow the user to select cool / heat / fan
operation mode with indoor remote controller of choice without using
the cool / heat selector.
The wired remote controller shall have the following features:
Operation Start/Stop
Operation Mode
Temperature Settings
60 Degrees F - 90 Degrees F Set Point
Range
Fan Speed
Airflow Direction
Monitoring Status
Malfunction Flashing
Malfunction Content
SECTION 23 81 28.10 22 Page 8

Filter Sign
Operation Mode
Temperature Setting
Permit/Prohibit Selection
Fan Speed
Airflow Direction
Control Management Field Setting Mode

Group Setting
Auto Re-Start
2.5 INTELLIGENT TOUCH CONTROLLER
2.5.1 Physical Characteristics
The control system shall be a neutral color plastic material. The

controller has a 5.7" Liquid Crystal Display (LCD, QVGA 320x240, 4096
colors).
2.5.2 Electrical Characteristics
2.5.2.1 General
From each outdoor unit circuit board to the I-touch controller, the daisy
chained wiring electrical voltage shall be 16 volts DC.
2.5.2.2 Wiring
For heat recovery the control wiring shall be installed in a daisy chain
configuration from outdoor unit to each branch selector box then from the
branch selector box to the indoor unit.
2.5.2.3 Control Wiring Size
The wire shall be a non-shielded, stranded, 2 conductor PVC or vinyl clad

cable. 18-gauge copper cabling specified. Application of UV stabilized
cable should be standard when exposed to outside elements. Plenum rated
where applicable. Maximum wiring length between controller and indoor
units: 3,280 ft.
2.5.2.4 Power Supply to Controller
24V AC (transformer to be field supplied).
2.5.3 Controller Characteristics
The intelligent controller shall be able to control, via a full color LCD
touch screen, up to 10 outdoor units and 64 indoor unit groups (maximum 128
Fan Coil Units) with the following functions:
a. On/Off selection for each fan coil unit or group
b. Temperature set point adjustment for each fan coil unit or group
c. Fan speed adjustment for each fan coil unit or group
d. Heat/cool/automatic changeover mode selection
e. Forced shutdown terminals
SECTION 23 81 28.10 22 Page 9

f. Priority settings for restriction of local access for start/stop,

heat/cool mode and set point adjustment (at local remote controllers if
installed)
g. Temperature limitation in both heating and cooling mode
h. Weekly schedule with start up and shut off times, temperature settings
and operation modes, 16 operations/ each day can be set in one
schedule, and 8 different schedules are available. In addition a
yearly calendar is also available for holidays or periods of non use.
i. Actual time and display setting
j. Reset ability for malfunction codes and filter maintenance warning
k. Maximum 13 months backup power supply to maintain the memory
l. Malfunction reports can be sent via e-mail to a cell phone or a PC
m. Remote monitoring via PC, network and web browser (optional).

Available web browser are: Real time status
monitoring/Operation/Malfunction history display/User password setting
and schedule setting
Manufacturer to provide Web based software for off-site monitoring purposes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
The system must be installed by factory trained and authorized contractor.

The contractor shall install the VRF system in accordance with the
recommendations of the VRF manufacturer as outlined in the Manufacturers
Installation Instructions.
3.2 START-UP
Equipment start-up, performance tests, and commissioning shall be provided

by a factory trained and authorized contractor. Control start-up and
commissioning shall be provided by the factory.
3.3 PRODUCT SUPPORT
Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manuals are to be provided to the

owner once commissioning is complete. Eight hours of Operation and
Maintenance training will be provided to the owner and owner's personnel
once commissioning is complete.
SECTION 23 81 28.10 22 Page 10

SECTION 23 82 00.00 20
TERMINAL HEATING AND COOLING UNITS

11/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES



Environments

Relays Rated 600 V
NFPA 211 (2013) Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces,

Vents, and Solid Fuel-Burning Appliances
NFPA 54 (2012) National Fuel Gas Code

Code

NFPA 90B (2012) Standard for the Installation of

Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems
NFPA 91 (2010) Standard for Exhaust Systems for

Air Conveying of Vapors, Gases, Mists and
Noncombustible Particulate Solids
Section 23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, applies to

this section with additions and modifications specified herein.
SECTION 23 82 00.00 20 Page 1

1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Unit heaters
Unit heaters, Data Package 2

MAINTENANCE DATA.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 UNIT HEATERS
Self-contained and factory assembled, propeller fan with capacities

expressed as Btu per hour output and cubic foot-per-minute air delivery,
operating conditions, and mounting arrangements as indicated. Average fan
bearing life shall be minimum 200,000 hours at operating conditions.
Provide fan motor with direct drive. Construct fan-guard motor mount of
steel wire. Equip each heater with individually adjustable package
discharge louver. Louvers may be substituted by discharge cones or
diffusers. Provide thermostats. Furnish circuit breaker disconnect switch.
2.1.1 Electric Unit Heater
UL listed; wattage, voltage, phase, and number of steps as indicated.

Provide control-circuit terminals and single source of power supply. Heater
5 Kw and larger shall be three-phase, with load balanced on each of the
three phases. Limit leaving air temperature below 140 degrees F at 60
degrees F entering air.
2.1.1.1 Casing
Minimum 21 gage steel.
2.1.1.2 Heating Element
Nickel-chromium heating wire element, free from expansion noise and 60 Hz

hum. Embed element in magnesium-oxide insulating refractory. Seal element
in high-mass steel or corrosion-resisting metallic sheath with fins.
Enclose element ends in terminal box. Space fins at maximum six fins per
inch. Limit fin surface temperature 550 degrees F at any point during
normal operation.
2.1.1.3 Controls
Include limit controls for thermal overheat protection of heaters. For

remote thermostatic operation, provide contactor rated for 100,000 duty
cycles. Provide a control transformer to supply 120-volt thermostat
control circuit for each heater. Provide room thermostat for pilot duty.
SECTION 23 82 00.00 20 Page 2

2.1.1.4 Wiring
Completely factory-prewired to terminal strips, ready to receive branch

circuit and control connections for 140 degrees F copper wiring.
2.2 FAN
Provide steel or aluminum fans with ball or roller bearings for motors over
1/8 horsepower (hp) and sleeve bearings for motors 1/8 hp and under.
Provide sleeve bearings with oil reservoir, if not permanently lubricated.
2.3 MOTOR AND STARTER
NEMA MG 1, and NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, respectively. Provide

continuous-duty motor with built-in automatic reset thermal overload
protection. For motor 1/2 hp and larger, use three-phase. Provide
single-phase motor of permanent split capacitor or capacitor start. Limit
motor speed at 1800 r/min. Wire motor to heater power supply source.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Protect affected equipment items by manufacturers' corrosion-inhibiting

coating or paint system that has proved capable of withstanding salt-spray
test in accordance with ASTM B117. Test indoor and outdoor equipment for
125 hours; test outdoor equipment used in a marine atmosphere for 3000
hours. For each specimen, perform a scratch test as defined in ASTM D1654.
2.5 NOISE VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
EQUIPMENT.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install equipment where indicated and as recommended by manufacturer's

recommendations, NFPA 54, NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B, NFPA 91 and NFPA 211.
3.1.1 Suspensions of Equipment
Provide equipment supports including beam clamps, turnbuckles and twist

links or weld-wire chains, wire ropes with rope clips and rope thimbles,
threaded-eye rod hangers with lock nuts and heat-duct hangers, threaded-eye
bolts with expansion screws, brackets, platform and mounting frame, and
vibration isolators. Locate equipment in such a manner that working space
is available for servicing, such as vacuum pump and burner removal, access
to automatic controls, and lubrication. Provide electrical isolation of
dissimilar metals. Clean interior of casings or cabinets before and after
completion of installation.
3.1.2 Electrical Work
NFPA 70 and Division 26 ELECTRICAL. When replacing original control

wires, provide No. 16 AWG with minimum 105 degrees C insulation.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Administer, schedule, and conduct specified tests. Furnish personnel,
SECTION 23 82 00.00 20 Page 3

instruments and equipment for such tests. Correct defects and repeat the
respective inspections and tests. Conduct inspections and testing in the
presence of the Contracting Officer.
3.2.1 Test Instruments and Apparatus
Provide instruments and apparatus currently certified as being accurate to

within one percent of their full scale. Use gages with a maximum scale
between 1 1/2 and 2 times test pressure.
3.2.2 Field Inspection
Prior to initial operation, inspect equipment installation to ensure that

indicated and specified requirements have been met.
3.2.3 Field Tests
3.2.3.1 Insulation-Resistance Tests for Electrical Equipment
At the completion of wiring, test 600 volt wiring to verify that no short
circuits exist before or after the attachment of electrical heating
equipment to the power source. Make tests with an instrument which applies
a voltage of approximately 500 volts for a direct reading of insulation
resistance.
3.2.3.2 Operational Tests
After completing fire tests and insulation-resistance tests, operate

equipment continuously under varying load conditions to verify functioning
of combustion controls, electrical controls, flame safeguard controls,
safety interlocks, and specified operating sequence. Run each test for a
minimum period of one hour.
SECTION 23 82 00.00 20 Page 4

23 82 01
RANGE VENTILATION SYSTEM

08/13
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
Provide Range Ventilation meeting Navy and NIOSH standards using a

subcontractor experienced in range ventilation to design and construct a
range ventilation system meeting the performance based standards specified
herein. This section applies to the shooting area of the range facility.
This section does not apply to the CQC/Shoothouse or the Breacher
Classroom. The range ventilation system indicated on the drawings is
conceptual in design showing approximate location and size of equipment.
The design intent of the range ventilation has been provided in the
contract documents; however, construction of the range and implementation
of the design should be accomplished in accordance with this section and
the design drawings. Shall comply with Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY,
DISTRIBUTION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS".
The Range ventilation subcontractor is responsible for the entire range

ventilation system including design, controls, and balancing and shall be
on site during acceptance testing.
1.2 REFERENCES

ASA S12.51 (2012) Acoustics Determination of Sound

Power Levels of Noise Sources using Sound
Pressure Precision Method for
Reverberation Rooms


Code


(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1403 (2008) Accepted Industry Practice for

Industrial Duct Construction, 2nd Edition
SMACNA 1819 (2002) Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper

Installation Guide for HVAC Systems, 5th
Edition

Provide a "purge" style system with 100% outside air (no recirculation
allowed) designed for 75 feet per minute (fpm) at the firing line, negative
pressure inside the range, and meeting additional detailed requirements
provided herein. System start up from cold start to "green light" (ready to
fire) shall be 10 minutes or less. Provide ductwork, piping offsets,
fittings, and accessories as required to provide a complete installation.
Coordinate the work of the different trades to avoid interference between
piping, equipment, structural, and electrical work. Provide complete, in
place, all necessary offsets in piping and ductwork, and all fittings, and
other components, required to install the work as indicated and specified.
a. This system is provided for the firing range portion of the facility
(area where shooting occurs) including the "Get Ready" area behind
firing line, the firing line to the bullet trap, but does not include
the Range Safety Office or any non-shooting areas of the facility.
b. The range ventilation contractor shall have experience in range

ventilation systems as defined herein and shall be responsible for
providing the entire system including all range ventilation equipment,
controls, and balancing as necessary to meet the requirements specified
herein.
c. Provide heat to maintain indoor air conditions specified herein.
Provide Heat recovery system using run around glycol piping.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Range Ventilation System Drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
Range Ventilation System Controls; G
SD-05 Design Data
Control Logic/Sequence (list/narrative); G
SD-06 Test Reports
Preliminary Air Flow tests (prior to acceptance testing); G

Acceptance Testing Plan; G
SD-07 Certificates
Range Ventilation Experience; G
Final Air Flow measurements; G

Verification Testing; G
Training Documentation; G
1.4.1 EXPERIENCE CLAUSE
The ventilation contractor providing the range ventilation systems shall

have range ventilation experience in both design and construction of
ventilation systems meeting NIOSH and NAVY requirements and similar to
those included in this project and specifically, providing ventilation for
multi-lane ranges having an air flow averaging 70 to 80 fpm when measured
at each firing location across the width of the firing line, with no
reading less than 50 fpm and maintaining a negative pressure of -0.04
(plus/minus 0.02) inches water gauge, with similar controls to those
required for this project. The range ventilation contractor shall submit a
list of at least 3 ranges in operation within the continental United States
having at least a 24 foot wide firing line and meeting these requirements
and that are accessible to the Navy for verification testing. For each
range listed, include range location, width, number of lanes, a description
of the control system, in-house personnel (including phone number)
responsible for the project, and name/address of owner. The contractor is
responsible for obtaining the owners permission and arranging access for
the Navy to enter these ranges for the purposes of verifying that the
ventilation system meets these requirements. If the ranges are not
available to the Navy or do not meet these requirements, the range
ventilation subcontractor will be deemed unsuitable. The experience
pertains to only that work which the range ventilation subcontractor has
done with in-house personnel currently employed (i.e. work done through
subcontractors does not count.)
1.4.2 Verification Testing
The Navy will measure the air flow at each firing lane at 1 foot, 3 feet,
and 5 feet off the floor in each lane. Acceptable readings are 75 fpm (plus
or minus 10 percent) over entire range, with no one reading less than 50 fpm.
Smoke released at each lane shall move positively downrange. Any smoke
moving backwards (up-range) shall constitute failure. The pressure
differential on either side of range entrance shall be measured. Acceptable
differential readings are between -0.02 and -0.06 inches water gauge.
Verify control system operating as designed. NOTE: This paragraph applies
only to experience verification of existing ranges for the sole purposes of
validating contractor's experience. The system requirements and acceptance
tests for the new range ventilation system are more stringent.
1.4.3 Prevention of Corrosion
Protect metallic materials against corrosion.
Provide additional protective coatings on exterior ductwork and equipment

that meets or exceeds the requirements of a 3,000 hour salt spray test in
accordance with ASTM B117.
1.4.4 MAINTENANCE
The installing range subcontractor will provide 1 year's maintenance and

warranty to the ventilation system as part of this construction contract
and shall include the following.
a. Monthly monitoring: The ventilation systems performance shall be

monitored at least monthly through a modem provided by the range
subcontractor and connected to the telecommunications system. Modem
shall be capable of sending information on all control points specified
for the DDC system.
b. Quarterly preventative maintenance (4 visits): At approximately 3

month, 6 months, 9 months, and 12 months after range opening) perform
routine maintenance and check controls on all ventilation equipment.
These visits may be performed by a local contractor trained by the
range ventilation subcontractor.
c. Bi-annual air balancing: (2 visits): At approximately 6 months and 12

months, perform a check and rebalancing of the ventilation system.
Document critical parameters including control and damper settings,
outside and inside air temperatures, filter loadings, etc. These visits
shall be done a representative from the range ventilation subcontractor.
1.4.5 COMPLIANCE VERIFICATION
Compliance with the performance based requirements will be determined and

accepted by NAVFAC's Small Arms Range Center of Expertise at NAVFAC-MIDLANT
in Norfolk, VA.
1.4.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Materials and assemblies installed in the work shall be inspected and found
to be in compliance with the industry standards and these specifications
prior to acceptance of the work. Items found not to be in compliance shall
be removed or corrective measures taken, to assure compliance with the
referenced standard. Prior to testing and balancing the system, the range
ventilation contractor shall verify that range has been properly sealed.
Material Standards
Materials, equipment, fixtures, and other appurtenances shall comply with

applicable Underwriters Laboratories, (UL) Inc., American National
Standards Institute, Inc., and National Electrical Manufacturer's
Association standards including ASA S12.51, AMCA 201, NFPA 70, NFPA 90A,
SMACNA 1403, SMACNA 1819, and SMACNA 1966.
All materials shall be new, and shall bear the label of Underwriters
Laboratories whenever standards have been established and label service is
normally and regularly furnished by the agency. All equipment provided
shall be listed and labeled suitable for the specified purpose,
environment, and application and installed in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. All insulation shall be asbestos free.
Manufacturer's Nameplate

conspicuous place, the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
1.4.7 TRAINING
After installation of the equipment and systems, provide a training course

for Government personnel covering the items listed below and the Operations
and Maintenance manuals. The course will be divided into two parts: a
general overview and familiarization with the system and equipment for all
attendees, followed by a more in-depth/detailed discussion of the control
panel and preventative maintenance for a select group. Provide two copies
of the Operations and Maintenance manual for attendees. Provide one DVD
disc of the training courses to be used as refresher courses and to train
additional personnel. Training shall be conducted by the same individual
that supervised the installation of the system. Training shall include
classroom discussion as well as hands on maintenance, replacement of
typical components and repair type maintenance training for parts typically
replaced or repaired in the field. Submit training documentation plan 14
calendar days prior to training sessions. Training plan shall include
scheduling, content, outline, and training material handouts. Provide
training for:
a. Operation of the system

b. trouble shooting
c. preventative maintenance
d. Control System
e. Control panel readings and what they mean
f. Filter removal and replacement
Time will vary depending on questions and user interest, but contractor
shall assume a full 8 hour day training session for the range ventilation
system. Coordinate training schedule with range targeting equipment
training since some personnel will be attending both.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 RANGE VENTILATION SYSTEM
2.1.1 General System Requirements: Design the system to provide an air flow
of 75 fpm at the firing line(s) and meeting the acceptance criteria
provided herein. Provide a negative pressure inside the range relative to
the base building with the exhaust designed to exhaust 110% of the supply
volume of air, with actual exhaust volume adjusted during testing and
balancing. System shall be a "purge" style system with 100% outside air.
Design for positive and even movement of air downrange. Each exhaust fan
shall be interlocked with one specific supply air fan.
a. Motor Sizing: Limit AHU motor to 75 hp or less. Provide multiple

paired supply/exhaust units where large cams are required.
b. Location: Locate equipment as indicated. Isolate the supply intake

from the exhaust outlet and separated a minimum of 30 feet.
c. Negative Pressure: Maintain a negative inches of water pressure in the

operating range area of .04 +/- .02 relative to the base building
areas. The exhaust fan speed shall modulate through the VFD to steady
state at a design range differential of -0.50" Static Pressure, and

shall maintain design parameters with only minor adjustments after
steady state has been reached.
d. Noise: Ventilation System shall not exceed 75 decibels when measured

at the firing line and 5 feet back (uprange) from the firing line.
e. Make all ductwork absolutely symmetrical to the extent practical.
f. Variable Frequency Drives: Provide VFD's on both supply and exhaust

systems. Connect ventilation system control equipment to
telephone/modem communication cable (cable provided under other
section).
g. The Design of the system shall be in accordance with Navy

Environmental Health Center, Technical Manual NEHC-TM6290.99-10. The
drawings indicate a generalized arrangement for the Range Ventilation
System. the contractor shall be responsible for the performance of the
system and shall make modifications as necessary to ensure that the
system meets the Range Ventilation System criteria. Submit Range
Ventilation System drawings for approval prior to procurement of
equipment, ductwork and piping.
2.12.2 Supply System
Supply air from the air handling unit shall be delivered through a
continuous graduated plenum, and then through ductwork into the diffuser
system. The ductwork into the diffuser system shall have dampers to allow
for adjustment/control of air into the individual diffuser sections. The
diffuser system shall consist of a series of adjacent sections from which
air enters the range through a double wall radial diffuser.
a. Supply filters: Provide double stage Merv 13 supply filters.
b. Supply diffuser: Provide a double wall radial diffuser with

sufficient surface area and free area to provide an even and quiet
supply of air behind the shooters, and as a minimum:
8 feet ceiling height or less: 24 inches diameters half round

Over 8 feet and up to 10 feet ceiling height: 30 inches
diameter half round
Over 10': 36 inches diameter half round
Quarter round radial diffusers sized to provide equivalent surface area are
acceptable.
d. Alignment of Diffuser section: The radial diffuser sections shall be

aligned with the lanes such that one section provides air to one lane:
i.e. if the range has 4 feet wide lanes, each radial plenum section
shall be in 4 feet sections whose ends match up with the lane dividers.
The intent of this alignment is to aide in the adjusting and balancing
of the system. The supply diffuser shall not restrict view into the
range from the range masters booth.
2.3 Exhaust System
The exhaust fan and filter system should be designed to allow for 350 to
500 fpm velocities across the filter media. Provide a two stage filter
system including a pre-filter followed by a high-efficiency particulate
arrestor (HEPA) filter for final exhaust filter. The exhaust fan should be
designed to allow for operational static pressure at least 7 inches wg. at
the desired volume of air flow, with a "clean" HEPA filter loss of 1.25
inches wg. and a minimum of 5.0 inches across the "dirty" HEPA filter to
allow extended time between filter changes. The final filter media should
be that of at least 99.97% (HEPA) @ .03 micron.
a. Exhaust Plenum: Provide a semi-continuous slot to capture the exhaust

air, with maximum 5 inch of broken slot at duct connections. The
exhaust duct system should be constructed in a fashion that evenly
extracts the supply air from the range.
b. Filter access: Provide HEPA rated filter housing for the HEPA filters.
Provide easy access, removal, and replacement of supply and exhaust
filters. Access doors shall be located with no adjacent equipment,
pipes, or other features blocking or hindering access, and shall be
easily opened without any special tools or equipment. Access door shall
close tightly and evenly around the perimeter. Filters shall be capable
of being removed and replaced without any special tools or equipment.
2.4 Range Ventilation System Controls
Submit control logic/sequence.

Provide On/Off switch or button along with "Do Not Shoot", "Safe to Shoot",
and "Warning" lights. "Safe to Shoot" light will be on only when all
systems are within operating parameters. Otherwise, "Do Not Shoot" light
will be on. In addition, controls will provide warning indicators as
described below. Locate control panel in the RSO. Locate the range
ventilation system warning lights on the control panel inside RSO booth
such all three of these lights are readily visible at all times.
a. Condition to turn on "Do Not Shoot" light. (if any of these conditions
occur, controls will sound alarm and shut down range ventilation
system):
Either supply fan or exhaust fan is off

Range entrance/exit doors remains open for more than a given set
point (adjustable set point, initially use 5 minutes)
Door into trap area is open
Range pressure is outside the upper limit (0 inches of water, non
negotiable) and lower (negative 0.10 inches of water typical, but
adjustable) for a given time (2 minutes typical, but adjustable)
Exhaust Pre-Filter is past its limit (limit adjustable)
HEPA Filter is past its limit (limit adjustable).
Supply static pressure is below its limit (limit adjustable)
b. Condition to turn on "Warning" light:
Exhaust Pre-filter is past set point (set point adjustable)

Exhaust HEPA filter is past set point (set point adjustable)
Supply, Pre-filters on exhaust, or HEPA filters) are greater than
a given set point.
Range temperature is outside given set points (adjustable)
c. Provide DDC with all points necessary to meet requirements herein and
including:
Discharge, outside, and space air temperature

Supply air temperature downstream of heating unit
Supply air static pressure

Supply air filter status
Freezestat (when unit is hot water or steam)
Smoke detector
Supply fan start/stop with Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
Supply fan run status
Supply fan fault status
Supply fan start/stop with VFD
Exhaust fan start/stop with VFD
Exhaust fan run status
Exhaust fan fault status
Exhaust air static pressure
Exhaust air pre-filter differential
Exhaust air HEPA filter differential
Range to base building space(outside double door vestibule) air
pressure differential
Door into bullet Trap area open/closed
Range doors open/closed
d. System Startup
The system shall be manually energized from the switch center console
located in the Range Masters Control Booth. The system shall take a maximum
of 8 minutes for systems with air conditioning and 5 minutes for systems
without air conditioning from cold start to "Safe to Shoot" light.
Energizing the system shall initiate the following sequence:
Supply and Exhaust VFD's initiate fan at low speed
The supply air fan shall ramp up at a predetermined rate (field adjustable)
and the exhaust fan shall track the supply air fan and maintain a negative
pressure at all times.
The supply fan will pause at every increased level for a predetermined time
until the exhaust fan has adjusted to the new position, such that the
building static pressure will be maintained at each ramp-up.
This sequence shall continue until the system is running at design

capacity, with exhaust fan running at steady state at design range
differential. Once steady state has been achieved for the day, the system
shall run smoothly and evenly with no excessive modulating or "hunting".
"Safe to Shoot" light energized.
e. Emergency Cut Off Switch
For each range, provide two emergency red "mushroom" cut off switches,
wired directly to the supply and exhaust VFDs that will manually and safely
shut off the entire ventilation system when pressed without damage to the
system. These cut off switches shall be "hard wired" and provide immediate
shutdown of the system including all supply and exhaust fans into the
range, and shall not rely or be dependent on any control system. Locate one
switch inside the range on the back wall behind the shooters, and the other
inside the range masters office.
2.5 HEPA Vacuum
For each bay, provide one High Efficiency Particulate Arrestor (HEPA) -
Nilfisk Model CFM 137 or equal, with HEPA filter placed in system to remove
particulates prior to reaching fan/motor assembly. Vacuum shall fit in
storage area closet accessible from the range side.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Range Ventilation System
Do no start construction until all design submittals have been approved.

Coordinate Construction with general contractor and ballistic contractor
providing Baffles, Overhead Baffles, Targeting system)
3.13.2 Acceptance Testing
Acceptance Testing is required to verify that the range ventilation system

fully meets the performance requirements specified herein. Prior to
scheduling acceptance testing the contractor shall verify that the range is
relatively "air tight" with all doors, door sweeps, sealants, etc in place
and that all significant holes and gaps sealed. The range ventilation
subcontractor shall perform preliminary air flow tests and shall verify the
system passes all tests prior to scheduling acceptance testing by the
Government. The Range ventilation subcontractor is responsible for meeting
the performance requirements and shall be on site during acceptance testing.
3.3 Acceptance Testing Plan
The contractor shall develop and submit a Testing Plan and "check list"
tailored to their system and designed to provide an accurate and efficient
sequence of testing for their system, including method to run simulated
dirty filter tests. Include a line for each item indicated to be checked
and verified. For each item, include a test method to check each system
requirement. Test by actual operation of condition: For example, physically
open doors and hold open to verify door controls. At the discretion of the
Navy, some tests (for example temperature sensing tests) may be run by
using the controls to "simulate" changing temperatures.
Submit an Acceptance Test Plan and schedule acceptance test minimum of 4

weeks in advance (8 weeks for overseas projects). The contractor is
responsible for assuring the facility is ready for testing (all seals on
doors, roof joints, and penetrations in place, etc) and the ventilation
system is working properly prior to scheduling of tests.
3.4 Control System
a. Control Conditions: Verify each control condition to turn on the "Do

Not Shoot" and "Warning" light.
b. DDC Points: Verify the control panel includes all required points, and
record reading of each one.
c. System Startup: Observe system through startup. Record VFD settings at

each stage. Record time necessary to achieve final steady state. Verify
system runs smoothly without excessive modulating or "hunting" where
system is under continual adjustment to stay within parameters. Verify
time between cold start and green light meets requirements stated
herein.
3.5 Smoke Tests
Provide either a fog machine or "smoke bombs" in sufficient supply to

complete testing. Release smoke in each lane along the entire height
(between 1 foot and 5 feet off the floor). All smoke must move downrange.
Smoke moving up, down, stagnant, or going backwards will constitute failure
of acceptance.
3.6 Air Flow measurements (with Clean HEPA Filters)
Take air flow measurements using a "Velgrid" or similar meter with the
system on and running, with the get-ready area empty. Note the time of day
and outdoor air temperature.
3.7 Measurement Locations and acceptable readings
Take measurements at the firing line in the center of each lane, take air
measurement readings at 1 foot, 3 feet, and 5 feet off the floor.
3.8 Acceptable Readings
a. Individual Readings: No single reading under 50 fpm or over 115 fpm
b. Lane Average: Each lane between 60 fpm and 90 fpm
c. Range Average: Between 72 fpm and 80 fpm
3.9 Final Air Flow Measurements (Simulated "Dirty" filters)
a. HEPA Filters: Simulate loaded HEPA filters to achieve a "yellow"

filters warning light and repeat Air Flow Measurements with acceptable
readings stated above. Contractor is responsible for determining safe
method to simulate loaded filters, but typically done by inserting
cardboard to block off a substantial amount of the filters as necessary
to create a yellow filter warning light.
b. Prefilter loading - Simulate loaded pre-filters - This test may be run

using same method HEPA filters or, if all others tests are successful
than an easier/quicker method of temporary manipulation (manual input)
of the control system may be used.
3.10 Noise measurements
Measure decibels at the firing line and 5 feet behind (uprange) the firing
line with the system on and running. Decibels shall not exceed the level
stated herein.
3.11 Final Acceptance
The contractor will be given three full days to run the acceptance tests,
make adjustments as necessary, and repeat tests until all requirements are
met. Adjustments made to any item will require tests to be repeated on all
other items affected by the adjustment. For example, and modification to
the airflow at any one location in a range bay will require a complete
re-testing of the entire range bay. If the contractor is not able to pass
all acceptance test criteria in this time, the tests will be discontinued.
The contractor will then make adjustments as necessary, confirm the system
is capable of passing the tests, and then re-scheduled acceptance tests at
a time mutually agreed upon by the contractor and the Navy, and at no
additional cost to the Navy.

CD 4598

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

CD 4598

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

SOF SUSTAINMENT TRAINING COMPLEX 14P1391

STONE BAY, CAMP LEJEUNE, NC EPROJECTS W.O. NO: 1294037

AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the

AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL (AMCA)

AMCA 201 (2002; R 2011) Fans and Systems

AMCA 210 (2007) Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans

AMCA 300 (2008) Reverberant Room Method for Sound

AMCA 301 (2006; INT 2007) Methods for Calculating

AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)

AHRI 260 (2011) Sound Rating of Ducted Air Moving

AHRI 410 (2001; Addendum 1 2002; Addendum 2 2005;

AHRI 430 (2009) Central-Station Air-Handling Units

AHRI Guideline D (1996) Application and Installation of

ANSI/AHRI 1060 (2005) Performance Rating of Air-to-Air

AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA)

ABMA 11 (1990; R 2008) Load Ratings and Fatigue

ABMA 9 (1990; R 2008) Load Ratings and Fatigue

AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

ANSI S12.54 (2011) Determination of Sound Power Levels

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING

ASHRAE 52.2 (2012; Errata 2013) Method of Testing

ASHRAE 62.1 (2010; Errata 2011; INT 3 2012; INT 4

ASHRAE 68 (1997) Laboratory Method of Testing to

ASHRAE 70 (2006; R 2011) Method of Testing for

ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

ASME A13.1 (2007; R 2013) Scheme for the

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

ASTM A 249/A 249M (2008) Standard Specification for Welded

ASTM A123/A123M (2012) Standard Specification for Zinc

ASTM A167 (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for

ASTM A53/A53M (2012) Standard Specification for Pipe,

ASTM A924/A924M (2010a) Standard Specification for General

ASTM B117 (2011) Standard Practice for Operating

ASTM B766 (1986; R 2008) Standard Specification for

ASTM C1071 (2012) Standard Specification for Fibrous

ASTM C553 (2011) Standard Specification for Mineral

Commercial and Industrial Applications

ASTM D1654 (2008) Evaluation of Painted or Coated

ASTM D3359 (2009; E 2010; R 2010) Measuring Adhesion

ASTM D520 (2000; R 2011) Zinc Dust Pigment

ASTM E2016 (2011) Standard Specification for

CANADIAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION (CSA)

CSA C22.2 (2011) Safety Requirements for Electrical

INSTITUTE OF ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES AND TECHNOLOGY (IEST)

IEST RP-CC-001 (2009) HEPA and ULPA Filters

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

NEMA MG 1 (2011; Errata 2012) Motors and Generators

NEMA MG 10 (2001; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for

NEMA MG 11 (1977; R 2012) Energy Management Guide for

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 701 (2010) Standard Methods of Fire Tests for

NFPA 90A (2012) Standard for the Installation of

SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION

SMACNA 1819 (2002) Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper

SMACNA 1884 (2003) Fibrous Glass Duct Construction

SMACNA 1966 (2005) HVAC Duct Construction Standards

U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

40 CFR 82 Protection of Stratospheric Ozone

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

UL 181 (2005; Reprint Oct 2008) Factory-Made Air

UL 1995 (2011) Heating and Cooling Equipment

UL 507 (1999; R 2001 thru 2007) Standard for